Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Basics
Operating Instructions
The design and delivered components of the CMM, its options, the program packages, and the relevant documentation are subject to change.
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized and
disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons misusing
this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering
a utility model.
This manual is subject to modification. All rights pertaining to changes in
the CMM and its options reserved.
All product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the corresponding proprietors.
Although utmost care has been taken in preparing the information given
in this manual, we cannot assume any liability for its completeness and
correctness, except in case of willful intent.
CALYPSO
Version 5.6
Operating Instructions
2013-05-24
61212-2011002
Table of contents
Preface
Information about these operating instructions
............................................................................... Preface 1
Configuration of safety instructions .................. Preface 6
Chapter 1
Introduction
Welcome to CALYPSO ................................................... 12
Starting CALYPSO .......................................................... 13
The main window of CALYPSO .................................... 16
Working with CALYPSO ................................................ 18
Operating CALYPSO ....................................................................... 18
Using shortcuts ............................................................................... 19
Entering alphanumeric characters with the mouse ........................ 110
Using context menus .................................................................... 110
Working with toolbars .................................................................. 111
Directory structures in CALYPSO ................................................... 113
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the amount of data to be loaded and the CAD view ...... 216
Defining the view of the CAD model ............................................ 216
Controlling the loading of the CAD model .................................... 217
Moving the CAD model in the CAD window ................................. 218
Zooming the CAD model in or out ................................................ 218
Changing or resetting the model perspective ................................ 219
Rotating the CAD model ............................................................... 219
Displaying the CAD model as a solid ............................................. 221
Splitting the CAD window into several areas ................................. 221
Saving and loading the CAD view ................................................. 223
Deleting a CAD view ..................................................................... 224
Deleting a CAD model in the CAD window ................................... 225
Redrawing the CAD model ........................................................... 225
Saving the CAD view settings ....................................................... 225
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 3
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 4
Defining features
Defining features ........................................................... 42
Options for defining features .......................................................... 42
Preassignments for features ............................................................ 43
Features index card ......................................................................... 44
Definition template for features ...................................................... 45
Automatic feature recognition and automatic feature end ............ 411
Deriving features from CAD files ................................................... 415
Importing features from the CAD model to the measurement plan ...
420
Multiplying features by patterns .................................................... 421
Relative measurement ................................................................... 425
Copying properties of features ...................................................... 435
Tips and tricks for defining features .............................................. 436
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 5
Defining characteristics
Basics about characteristics .......................................... 52
Calculation of geometric elements .............................. 53
Computed feature .......................................................................... 53
Best-fit methods ............................................................................. 53
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 6
10
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
11
Chapter 7
12
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter 8
Outputting form and location plots with the graphics elements ............................................................................ 840
Outputting form and location plots ............................................... 840
Layout of a form and location plot ................................................ 840
Defining graphics elements ........................................................... 842
Examples of form and location plots ............................................. 844
Creating single templates with the graphics editor ........................ 860
Creating graphics forms with the printout header editor ............... 867
Working with the plot window .................................................... 870
CALYPSO
Table of contents
13
Chapter 9
14
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter 10
Managing CALYPSO
Saving and installing CMM data ................................ 102
If a software error occurs the error report ............. 103
Components of the error report .................................................... 103
Preparing the error report ............................................................. 103
Error report - preparing saving ...................................................... 104
Using the error report ................................................................... 105
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
15
Chapter 11
16
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
CALYPSO
Table of contents
17
Chapter 14
AutoRun interface
Introduction to AutoRun interfaces ........................... 142
Basics about AutoRun interfaces ................................ 143
Purpose and basic terms ............................................................... 143
Layout of the AutoRun interface ................................................... 143
Basics about desks ........................................................................ 144
18
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter 15
Duplex mode
Duplex mode with CALYPSO ...................................... 152
Preparing the duplex mode ........................................ 154
Prerequisites for the duplex mode ................................................. 154
Configuring CALYPSO for duplex mode ........................................ 154
Files for duplex mode .................................................................... 157
Establishing the connection and coupling the measuring ranges ... 158
CALYPSO
Table of contents
19
Chapter 16
Chapter 17
Alphabetic index
20
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Information about these operating
instructions
These Basics Instructions are intended for users who want to learn about
the use of CALYPSO and the rational execution of their CALYPSO measuring jobs.
These operating instructions describe how to work with the base module
of CALYPSO. To take full advantage of additional functions, you must
purchase the corresponding option.
NOTICE
The additional CALYPSO options are described in separate manuals.
Reference information about the windows and dialogs can be found in
the dialog reference in the CALYPSO Online Help.
Overview
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
sults [ 81]
Describes which types of printouts are available and how to work with
them. How to save the measuring results in files of different formats
is also described.
er [ 91]
Opens the PiWeb BasicReporter for creating and editing the protocol
templates (PTX files) for Basic Reports.
Additional documents
for CALYPSO
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also provides directions for and examples of using PCM with CALYPSO, with
formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops.
Simulation (option)
Simulation
If you have used the stylus system library to copy the styli of your
CMM virtually, CALYPSO is able to simulate the stylus movements in
the CAD window.
Characteristic IN (option)
You can use the Characteristic IN option without a connected CMM
to import suitable CAD data or Agipp data for manufacturing segments and convert this data into a CALYPSO measurement plan.
Automation (option)
Describes the Automation option, with which automation projects are
realized in combination with the CMM-OS.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Metrotomography (option)
With the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and measure CT data records gained by METROTOM.
Supplementary literature
You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icons
Text conventions The following text conventions and symbols are used in
these instructions:
Example
Description
Features
Comment
<machine name>
C:\windows\w.ini
Preface
Plan CNC-Start
CTRL+A
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
WARNING
A warning indicates a possible risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause death or serious injuries.
Example: Risk of severe crushing of the body caused by heavy loads.
CAUTION
A caution indicates a personal health hazard.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause slight to moderate injuries.
Example: Risk of minor crushing of the limbs caused by small loads.
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Introduction
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-1
Welcome to CALYPSO
Welcome to CALYPSO
CALYPSO was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end, CALYPSO utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward programming
CALYPSO offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every detail
as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option of directly
importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate error-free measurement programs of your own.
Versatile measurement
logs
You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without delay, and afterwards you can still depend on CALYPSO to help. You can
customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select full-graphics
display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows applications, CALYPSO can export the result files, so you can present the data
as graphic or in table form, or in presentation programs whatever you
want.
1-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
1 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click the Calypso icon.
- or Select Start Programs Zeiss CALYPSO 5.6 CALYPSO
5.6.
The Log In window opens and you must identify yourself by entering
the user name and the password.
Exceptions:
Note: If you click Memos, you find information left for you by the
operator on the previous shift.
2 Type in your password and click OK.
When you log in for the first time, CALYPSO prompts you to confirm
your password:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-3
Starting CALYPSO
Starting to work
If the CALYPSO program starts with an empty user desk according to your
settings, you can call in the What do you like to do? window one of
the functions that you require most frequently when starting to work or
switch to one of the measurement plans last opened.
Engine block
Gear
Rotary table
Calypso 5.6.0000
Version 5.6.0000 (01.05.2013)
1-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
NOTICE
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when logging in.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-5
CAD icons
The main window and its principal elements are described briefly below:
Menu bar
The menu bar contains the basic commands for working with CALYPSO.
Toolbar
Icons allow you to run frequently required commands quickly.
1-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CMM
Here you find the CMM settings and the stylus system dialogs.
Measurement plan
This is where you quickly find the important dialogs for preparing the measurement plan.
Characteristics
Features
CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional model of the workpiece and each feature. The model is permanently updated when you
define new features or edit existing ones.
Note: The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you
do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.
CAD icons
The icons allow you to define features in the CAD window and to
work on their representation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-7
The table shows which key combinations of a two-button mouse correspond to the keys of the three-button mouse.
Two-button
mouse
Three-button mouse
left button
corresponds to
left button
right button
corresponds to
middle button
corresponds to
right button
corresponds to
NOTICE
The descriptions in this document are based on a two-button mouse.
Using a 3D mouse
Routines
1-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the lists of features and characteristics, you can open the definition
template for each item which defines the element. You can open additional windows in the definition template.
By selecting another element in the list, the open windows are updated.
It is not necessary to close the windows and to open them again for the
other element.
You can open the strategy window for a feature, for example,and then
view and edit the strategy for any other feature desired without having
to close the strategy window prior to this.
NOTICE
All changes made in the open windows are accepted and saved automatically.
Using shortcuts
If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it is shown next to the menu
item. You can use the following shortcuts:
Shortcut
Function
CTRL+N
CTRL+O
CTRL+S
CTRL+F
CTRL+H
CTRL+A
Select All
CTRL+Z
CTRL+C
CTRL+X
CTRL+V
F2
DEL
ESC
RETURN
RIGHT
Opening the feature and characteristic window for the selected feature
CTRL+RIGHT
ALT+RIGHT
ALT+F4
Exiting CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-9
3 Click Close.
The Typewriter dialog box will appear on the screen whenever a
change is made to an input field.
1-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The toolbar is saved on a user-specific basis: After you have logged in,
CALYPSO automatically displays your toolbar.
You can save and load toolbars. The toolbars are saved as *.config files.
Restructuring toolbars
Use the Toolbar Editor to specify which icons appear in what order in the
toolbar.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-11
1-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Program files
The files required for CALYPSO operation.
User data
The data you process during a CALYPSO session.
This data is stored in different directories. The program files are located
in the program directory and in the program data directory. The user data
is stored in the user directory.
NOTICE
The folder names depend on the language of the installed Windows version. If you install the English Windows version, the folders, too, will have
English designations.
To display the folder names in the address line in the installation language, a certain INI file must be available for each folder. If this file is
missing, this folder will be shown with the English designation.
The program files and the user data are located in the following directories in CALYPSO:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-13
1-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Features [ 115]
Characteristics [ 115]
Features
There are two types of feature in CALYPSO:
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. You use characteristics to specify
the dimensions, shape or location of features along with any applicable
nominal and tolerance values (e.g. the diameter of a hole, the perpendicularity of a hole to a plane and the distance between two planes).
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is the CALYPSO version of what you might be familiar with as a part program or control data. A measurement plan
contains the information the system needs to perform a measurement,
for example:
the features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-15
The measurement plan is displayed as three lists with icons that represent
the characteristics, the features and the other components to be evaluated.
There are two ways of generating measurement plans:
You can begin by using the CMM or a different way to define the
part's features that you want to measure and the characteristics to
evaluate for those features.
Or you can create the characteristics and then determine all the requisite features.
Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified workpiece.
Coordinate systems
For exact location definition and reliable performance of measurements,
precisely defined and convertible coordinate systems are essential.
Machine coordinate system
Part Alignment
A part alignment is bound to the workpiece. For CALYPSO and the CMM,
it locates the position and alignment of the workpiece on the measuring
table. There may be several part alignments for a single workpiece.
Base System
One of the part alignments is defined as the base alignment for the
measurement plan. All other part alignments can be converted to this
base alignment.
In addition, you can also use the local feature alignment for each feature;
the zero point and alignment of this coordinate system are defined in a
specified manner by the feature.
Clearance planes
Six planes define a safe area around a part and any associated fixture
where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the clearance
zone formed by these planes, the stylus can be moved without risk of
collision.
CALYPSO determines the part's clearance planes using only two positions.
1-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
DME Interface
When using CALYPSO with the DME interface, you can control all CMMs
supporting the DME interface.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics and
features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan. This means
that random samples taken from series production can be measured automatically without any need for manual probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-17
1-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO Planner
Licensing
Licenses for options and measurement plans
Options
You can only use an option if the appropriate license is installed on your
system. The licenses installed on your computer are shown in CALYPSO
under Extras Settings Miscellaneous on the Licenses notebook page.
Protected measurement
plans
Furthermore, licenses for individual measurement plans created and protected by Carl Zeiss are also available. To run such a measurement plan,
the corresponding license is required.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-19
1-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Activating licenses
1 To do so, select Extras Settings Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-21
1-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Bubble help
Global Help
Operating In- Displays the Basic Operating Instructions for CALYPSO as a PDF file.
structions
You can print PDF files relating to the various topics from the Online
Help. Links to the PDF files can be found as PDF files under Operating
Instructions.
Tips and
Tricks
Release Info
Product Information
CZ IMT on the IMT on the Internet: Opens the start page of Carl Zeiss IMT on
the internet.
Internet
Academy Web: Opens the Academy Web Login window from
where you can access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
About...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-23
Navigator
The navigator enables you to go straight to the help pages of your choice.
Content
You can view a topic by double-clicking it in the table of contents.
Double-click a book icon to view the list of topics covered in the books
subsections.
Note: If the Navigator is not visible on the screen, click the Show
button at the top left of the help window.
Index
Double-click a term in the alphabetical index to view the help pages
that contain occurrences of the term.
Search
Use this function for full-text searching through the entire Online Help
system. You can use the ? and * wildcards.
Examples: ?D curve finds 2D curve and 3D curve. *stylus
finds spherical-tip stylus, disk stylus, conical stylus, etc.
Favorite places
You can insert bookmarks as shortcuts that will take you quickly back
to pages of your choice.
Display area
The help pages with text and illustrations appear in the display area.
The text contains hotlinks (words or phrases that are underscored and
color-highlighted). Clicking a hotlink takes you straight to another page
containing more information of relevance to the original subject.
1-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The hotlinks to other help pages in the CALYPSO Online Help are grouped
in categories.
Basics and background information
Step-by-step instructions
Details and detailed information
Examples
A list of related topics is displayed when you click one of the Routemap
icons. Select one of the topics from the list in order to go straight to the
corresponding help page.
Buttons
The following buttons are arranged along the top edge of the Help window:
Shows the Navigator.
Hides the Navigator.
Returns to the previous page.
Returns to the page where you last clicked the
Back button.
Takes you to the start page in the Online Help.
Prints the current page (with or without all related
topics, according to your choice).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-25
Context menus
Context menus that you open by right-clicking provide access to additional functions.
Typographic conventions
The following typographic conventions are employed in the Online Help
system:
Highlight
Meaning
Bold
Italic
Topic
File name
AutoSave
001_e_Autosave_/001_Autosave_e.htm
Inserting your own logo into Preparing printout header dathe printout header
ta [ 827]
Recalling (1): 3D line from
circle centers
ing [ 497]
Recalling (2): one element in- Recalling a feature in its entireto a new coordinate system ty [ 4103]
1-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
003_e_Protkopf_aendern/
003_2_demo.htm
011_e_Rueckruf1/011_Rueckruf1.htm
012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm
Video
Topic
File name
True Position (1): base align- Characteristic definition temment as reference, using the plates [ 517]
tangential element
015_e_DINPos1/015_e_DinPos1_CZLogo.htm
018_e_AusreisserFilter/
018_e_AusreisserFilter.htm
022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT/
022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT.htm
4_8Update_Movie12_e/4_8Update_Movie12.htm
4_8Update_Movie27_e/4_8Update_Movie18.htm
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-27
The Academy Web Login window shows the internet address and
the registration code. At the first call, the button is called Register
and then it is called Open.
2 Open the access page of Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:
If your CALYPSO computer is equipped with internet access: Click
Register or Open.
If you want to open the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy on
another computer with internet access: Enter the indicated access
address (with registration code) in a Web Browser.
The access page of the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy opens.
Your registration code is already entered under Register User.
3 Use a login name and a password to log in for the first time to the
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
From now on you can log in at any time to the Carl Zeiss Metrology
Academy by using your selected login name and your password and
use the offered options.
1-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-29
Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
1 Select File Exit.
CALYPSO prompts you to save or reject the changes. CALYPSO then
closes the CALYPSO User Desk, logs you off in CALYPSO and displays the Log In window.
2 To leave a message for the following users, click the Memos button
and enter your message in the Memo Editor.
Note: If system login or automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system settings, then this window is skipped when logging
in and logging off.
3 Click the Terminate button in the Log In window.
CALYPSO is terminated and all dialog boxes opened by CALYPSO (e.g.
Simulation, Events) are closed.
1-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-1
Using a 3D mouse
For convenient rotation and displacement of the CAD model, you can also
use a 3D mouse, e.g. the SpaceNavigator by 3DConnexion.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
Interactive processing
If you use a measurement plan, the selected feature is shown on the CAD
model. You can process features and define new features.
The points to be probed are shown in the CAD window during the manual
CNC run.
You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. If a workpiece is to be processed with different measurement
plans, you require less memory space by saving it separately.
You can include a saved CAD model in your evaluations and, for example,
output it as a plot (see in the Online Help under Outputting the CAD
window as a plot [ 233]).
Stylus simulation
If you have the Simulation option, you can display the stylus system in use
in the CAD window and trace the stylus movements during the CNC run
or its simulation (see Simulation (option) in the Online Help).
You can define the representation of the CMM, the stylus changer rack
and the clamping device and save it as a work area. Depending on the
requirements of the corresponding measurement plan, you load the appropriate work area in addition.
2-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window - depending on the
type of view required.
NOTICE
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. By editing the displayed
CAD model, you do not edit the CAD data on which it is based.
Load settings
If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
Depending on the setting, only one view of the CAD model or only the
number of geometric elements is loaded:
You can modify the view of the CAD model but you cannot extract
any features from it.
In the display of the geometric elements, the CAD model is not shown.
You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. Define the type of saving in the Settings (CAD) window which
you open via CAD Settings. The measurement plan remembers
where the CAD model is stored and loads it from there into the CAD
window.
By saving a measurement plan, the CAD model is saved either together
with the measurement plan or not at all, depending on the setting.
If you save the CAD model separately, you can use it for several measurement plans. It is not possible to process this external CAD model in
an individual measurement plan.
NOTICE
You can save only one CAD model per measurement plan.
If you want to edit a workpiece which consists of several CAD files, you
must load all files before you save them together.
The elements of the work area as well as the workpiece are defined by
means of CAD data.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierarchy tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-3
2 Deselect the Part setting in the context menu of the CAD entity and
select Work Area.
Thus, the selected CAD entity is assigned to the work area.
Positioning CAD entities
The Position function allows you to compile your work area by means of
CAD entities and to position it on the base plate.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Positioning tab.
2 Set the offset and rotation of the desired CAD entity.
The Position function executes the positioning of the entity.
Use Repeat to carry out again the previous transformation.
You can add a defined and saved work area to your measurement plan.
1 Select Planner Load Work Area.
2 Select the desired work area and click Load.
2-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CAD window
CAD icons
Most of the functions can also be selected from the CAD menu.
Switch to Feature Menu /
Define feature
Use mouse to
Rotate CAD
image
Zoom Out
Rotate -> by
increments
Rotate <by
increments
Show
solid model
Render
Use mouse to
Pan CAD image
Select
Rotation mode
Select view
Zoom In
Use Mouse
to Zoom
Fit to CAD
window
The CAD file of the workpiece allows you to work your way through the
preparations without using the CMM. You use the mouse to define features and their probing points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-5
You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.
You can add further probing points to existing features. In this case, the
definition template of the corresponding feature must be open. The
probing points will be added to the existing point list.
You can also define new features in a plane of the part alignment with
probing points. The list of features has to be open for this purpose. The
mouse takes over the function of the stylus with the full functionality of
automatic feature recognition (Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
Defining a coordinate
system in the CAD window
You can define coordinate systems in the CAD window if the CAD model
contains local coordinate systems (Defining a coordinate system in the
CAD window [ 214]).
2-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Switch to
Feature
Menu / Select/
Define/Extract mode
deviation [ 5110]
Select Alignment, see Defining a coordinate system in
Select a feature from the list or in the CAD model (see in the
Online Help under Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).
Use this icon if only selected features were displayed or the solid
or rendered model was shown (see Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-7
Dialog element
Function
Show edges
Render
Use mouse to Rotate Rotates the model about the axis selected with the Select
CAD image
Rotation mode icon (see in the Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]).
Select Rotation
mode
2-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Dialog element
Function
View
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Fits the CAD model into the CAD window (see in the Online
Help under Zooming the CAD model in or out [ 218]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-9
2-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 To return to the view of the entire model, click Show all Calypso
Features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-11
The automatic feature recognition allows CALYPSO to select automatically the correct definition template and to fill it with values.
4 Click OK to confirm the definition of the feature.
The new feature is included in the list of features.
As soon as you run the measurement plan automatically, the CMM will
move precisely to these probing points.
2-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The PointX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the
serial number of the defined points in your measurement plan.
Defining a circle
This option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the
machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the circle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Circle on a Cylinder
from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a cylindrical or tapered bore or an external cylinder in the CAD window.
The CircleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined circles in your measurement plan.
Defining a 2D line
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the 2D line in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Line on a Plane from
the selection list.
2 Draw a line while holding down the left mouse button.
The 2-D LineX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined 2D lines in your measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-13
Defining a rectangle
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the rectangle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Rectangle from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a rectangular body in the CAD window.
3 Select a point of the body.
- or If the specification of an individual point is not sufficient, select another
point.
The RectangleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the serial number of the defined rectangle in your measurement plan.
2-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 For selection and definition, choose Select Alignment from the selection list.
The CAD model shows all its coordinate systems with offset and rotations.
2 Click the desired coordinate system.
A new coordinate system with already assigned special functions is
added to the measurement plan.
Extracting features
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the plane, cone and cylinder features in the CAD window
with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Extract Features from the selection list.
2 Make sure that features or characteristics are shown in the measurement plan area.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If you produced a plane, you will have to define a measurement strategy for this plane (see Measurement strategies for features [ 4160]).
The feature with the addition X after the name is included in the list of
features. X represents here the serial number of the defined features in
your measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-15
The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the workpiece
and the work area. With the load settings, you set the amount of CAD
data to be loaded [ 217]. If you do not need all the functions of the
CAD model, you can load the complete CAD model or only some of the
CAD data. This way the loading time is reduced considerably.
If you do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.
Function
Show Silhouette
Note: With large models, displaying silhouettes leads to long computing times and is switched off when loading a CAD model.
Points
Shows the points defined in the CAD model and selected in the list
of features.
Show PMIs from CAD model (Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Switches the display of the form and location icons on and off.
CT Point Cloud
CAD Model
Highlight selected Feature(s) Shows the features selected in the list of features (default: enabled).
2-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Menu item
Function
(Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Shows the extracted form and location data in the form of small
banners located next to the features.
Comment
Opens the Show Text dialog box where you determine the contents
and representation of an additional text line. When outputting the
CAD view as a plot, this text is also output.
NOTICE
Most of these settings can also be made via CAD Settings in the
Settings (CAD) window under Model Display.
Note: This is the only option which makes it possible to edit or extend
the measurement plan!
No Model: only the features of the CAD model are loaded. Only
individual, unlinked features are shown in the CAD window.
Model View: only one view of the CAD model is loaded. You can
rotate, move or enlarge the view of the CAD model. You cannot
extract any features.
Only surfaces used: only the features of the surfaces used are
loaded. Only individual, unlinked surfaces are shown in the CAD
window.
3 Click Close to save the setting.
The settings will take effect the next time you load a CAD model.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-17
2-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This mode remains active until you switch to the Use mouse to Pan
CAD image or Rotate mode.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-19
You determine the rotation point via the context menu or the menu:
Note: The Use mouse to Rotate CAD image icon remains active
until you click Use mouse to Pan CAD image or Use Mouse to
Zoom.
2-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-21
The upper right area is your CAD work area. The three smaller areas each
show the CAD model from a different axis direction.
2-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-23
A default view is automatically saved under model for each measurement plan. You will see this view each time a measurement plan is
loaded.
4 Confirm the input with Enter.
5 Click OK.
2-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Use of colors
Display of texts
Conversion settings
Extraction settings
Changing settings
1 Select CAD Settings.
2 Select in the tree view in the Settings (CAD) window to the left the
desired branch to open the tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-25
2-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-27
Displaying characteristics
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in the CAD window.
1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Select on the Characteristics index card in the Results Presentation window the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.
Displaying features
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the corresponding characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in
the CAD window.
2-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Modifying a representation
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can modify the measured data, e.g. invert the deviations or load and use the corrections.
Modifying results
1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Select on the Modification tab in the Results Presentation window the data to be modified and saved.
3 Close the window.
Make the general definitions for the CAD view and the banners on the
three tabs Actuals, Characteristics and Features in the Results
Presentation window. These settings can be saved as own CAD view.
The banners are displayed as soon as you have selected measurement
plan features in the measurement plan area or clicked them in the CAD
window.
You can define individually the orientation, division, contents and representation of the banners in the CAD window. To do so, use the context
menu of the banners.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-29
2-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-31
You can print the CAD model in the current view [ 232]. Only the
currently visible area will be printed.
Saved views
You can define and save different representations in the CAD window
(zoom factor, scope of model, rotation angle, offset, magnification factor
etc.) as your own views. You can output this drawn model with spatial
effect in the CNC run.
2-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
2-33
5 Click Graphic in the definition template of the characteristic and select the name of the CAD model as the name of the graphic file.
Once the measurement plan has been completed, the set CAD model will
be output as a plot during evaluation of the respective characteristic.
2-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can change the geometric position of the model with respect
to the base alignment [ 235].
You can modify the CAD model [ 235], i.e. transform, position
or mirror the model.
You can create features from the CAD model [ 238], i.e. create
new or modified CAD entities and features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-35
2-36
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
2-37
2-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Desired element
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
Procedure
Prerequisites/result
Plane, Cylinder,
Cone
Circle
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
necessary, enter an Offset.
If full circle has been activated, the
full circle will also be created when
clicking a circular arc.
Ellipse
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
necessary, enter an Offset.
Slot
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with at least four edges
must be highlighted.
necessary, enter an Offset.
Rectangle
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with four edges must be
highlighted.
necessary, enter an Offset.
Line
Multiple creation
Curve
Click the Curve symbol and enter The vector normal to the plane of
the desired number of points under intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
Points.
By activating Per Segment, each
segment has the same number of
points.
Point
Click the CAD model. The computed coordinates appear in the input
fields. You can correct the coordinates subsequently or enter approximate values from the outset.
CALYPSO
2-39
4 Select the type of feature you want to create from the points.
2-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
2-41
2-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-43
2-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6 Click Comparison.
CALYPSO compares the entities of the new CAD model with the probing points of the features in the measurement plan. The features,
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-45
whose probing points are separated from the corresponding CAD entity less than the specified distance, are shown in the list under Features inside tolerance.
Under Features outside tolerance, all features are shown that
are outside the specified distance to a CAD entity.
7 Click the desired entity in the modification list.
In the CAD window, the feature from the measurement plan to which
the CAD entity marked in the list can be adapted is highlighted in color
and the CAD model is rotated so that the feature is visible. If you ticked
the Show strategy when selecting Feature check box under
Strategy in the Settings (CAD) window, then the strategy of the
feature is also highlighted in color.
Note: Double-click the line to open the definition template for the
feature. You can compare the element's plan values with the actually
measured values. Similarly, the next surface is highlighted in the CAD
window. This ensures that CALYPSO has recognized the right feature.
8 To adapt the feature to the new data of the corresponding CAD entity,
click with the mouse the feature in the CAD window.
- or Mark in the modification list those lines that you want to transfer
to the measurement plan and click Apply.
The adapted feature is shown in italics in the modification list and
moved to the end of the list Features inside tolerance.
If the feature could not be adapted, it is shown in italics in the modification list and moved to the end of the list Features outside tolerance.
9 Click Close to terminate the comparison.
10Save the measurement plan.
2-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Simplification: Free form surfaces are converted to simpler geometric objects (cones, spheres, cylinder, planes). You can modify
the tolerance.
Stitching: Free surfaces, i.e. surfaces that do not belong to bodies, are joined to bodies.
Build Geometry: The entire CAD model is healed geometrically.
Errors and inconsistencies are corrected. This includes the Simplification and Stitching functions.
Note: This process can take some time to complete, especially for larger CAD models.
Correct boundary curves: Gaps in the boundary curves of surfaces and sections which are not exactly aligned are corrected.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-47
Format
File name
ACIS
*.sat
ACIS
*.sab
IGES
*.igs
VDAFS
*.vda
STEP
*.stp
CATIA
*.model
PARASOLID
*.x_t
STL
*.stl
CAD entities with the Work area element assignment are considered as part of the work area. The CAD entity is not saved in the
measurement plan but as work area.
2-48
You work with groups on the Hierarchy tab of the Modify CAD
Model window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 To add a new group, select Add Group in the context menu of the
supper hierarchy level.
When grouping, individual CAD entities or entire groups are shifted
hierarchically.
3 To shift CAD entities, select the CAD entities to be shifted and drag
them to the target group.
CALYPSO
2-49
Moving a CAD entity along the axes of the active coordinate system
2-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click the desired position or the CAD entity in the CAD window.
A local alignment is inserted at the corresponding place parallel to the
coordinate system defined in the CAD entity.
Note: By ticking the Center check box before adding the alignment,
the coordinate system with its origin is automatically positioned in the
center of the surface or feature you clicked.
4 Repeat step 3 for the desired number of coordinate systems.
5 Then click again Create to deactivate the button.
6 Close the dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-51
2-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-53
5 Activate the Center check box if the rotation should refer to a coordinate system parallel to the axis in the center of gravity of the CAD
entity.
Otherwise, the rotation refers to the origin of the selected coordinate
system.
6 Select Apply to move the CAD entity to the defined position and to
rotate it.
2-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-55
2-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-1
plan [ 33]
Step 2: Define the naming conventions.
Step 4: Define the part's features that you want to measure. Defining features [ 42]
Step 5: Define the characteristics for which these features
are to be checked for compliance.
Defining characteristics
You can also change the order: You can lay out the sequence of characteristics first (step 5) and then begin defining features (step 4) and associating them to characteristics.
3-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
After creation, you can edit and supplement each measurement plan.
Combined evaluations
CALYPSO creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also
combine measurement plans and thereby create combined evaluations
(Combining several measurement plans [ 627]).
CALYPSO
3-3
Note: If you have modified measurement plans of other users, it will not
be possible to run them just like that. Thus, results which are not traceable
are avoided.
You can only run the measurement plan once you have reloaded it.
Note: You can only load and run protected ZEISS measurement plans for
which you have a license. You cannot edit them and you cannot copy any
features.
3-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: In the system settings (Extras Settings Environment, Save tab), you can activate the automatic creation of backup
copies (Auto-Save).
Presettings
Stylus
Measurement Plan
Rack Assignment
CAD presettings
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-5
Settings
Filter/Outlier
Defaults for filtering and outlier setting for the following new features
for the entire measurement plan:
Strategy
Point
2D line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
CAD
Defaults for the entire measurement plan used for visualization in the
CAD window. You can also make these settings under CAD Settings in the Settings (CAD) window.
General
The three settings combined in one file. This file does not refer to
individual files but contains the definitions of the three tabs.
3-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Be sure to check all settings at the Position, Angle and Size global
radio buttons.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the selection box
of the feature in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Click OK.
This window is fully described in Features representation in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-7
You can define these settings for each individual measurement plan and
(with the appropriate rights) also for several measurement plans.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode
3-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings ...for this Measurement Plan and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plan window.
To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings ... for several measurement plans and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plans window.
The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to set
the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement plans
to a certain version of CALYPSO.
In addition, certain functions and behaviors can be activated separately.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-9
Measurement
plan
Characteristics
List of characteristics in the order in which the characteristics are carried out in the CNC run
List of features
(Features tab [ 44])
Status of prerequisites
The indicator boxes on the CMM and Measurement Plan tabs reflect
the combined status of the prerequisites:
Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement plan. Manual
measurements, however, can be performed.
Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work, however.
CMM
Features
CMM Settings
Stylus system
Star
3-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CMM tab
Status of results
On the Characteristics tab, the indicator box reflects the results after
the measurement:
CMM Settings: This button indicates the status of the CMM and the
connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. If the CMM has not
been initialized and referenced, the button is red (see Connecting
the CMM [ 313]).
Rotary Table (RT): Click this button to activate a rotary table for the
current measurement plan and to define the settings for rotary table
operation (see Prerequisites for the rotary table [ 355]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-11
3-12
Multiple Printout: Click this button to check and edit the settings for
the result logs (see Editing printout settings [ 363]).
Temperature Compensation: Click this button to have CALYPSO include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of
the CMM in the calculations (see Temperature compensation [ 367]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Green: There is a proper connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. The reference point has been approached.
Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the CMM
and CALYPSO to home the CMM.
Note: When you install an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must be careful that
the stylus does not touch the workpiece nor come to rest anywhere. The
dead weight would, in this case, be determined incorrectly.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM.
- or On the CMM index card, click CMM Settings.
2 Click Connect.
The connection will be established.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-13
The CMM moves to home position automatically to which all measurements and derived calculations are referred.
NOTICE
All reference spheres used are no longer valid after a home position travel.
Before you can reuse the reference spheres, you must determine their
position again via the master stylus.
3-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying styli
Red: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is not
qualified or not permitted for the measurement.
Qualification means that the stylus probes the reference sphere and stylus
correction values are determined from the results. The compliance with
the limit values can be checked automatically by CALYPSO.
When qualifying the stylus, observe the following:
Always define and qualify stylus systems and styli within a measurement plan. You can use defined stylus systems with qualified styli in
all other measurement plans.
The stylus system that you use to set up a measurement plan must be
the same one that you use to run the measurement plan.
Note: If the stylus system can no longer be used, but you have a stylus
system with the same configuration, select Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan to select the suitable stylus system.
Further information
In the list of the prerequisites, the name of the stylus system is displayed that was most recently used for measuring. When opening a
measurement plan, you must use the appropriate stylus system. To
display the stylus system to be used, choose Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan.
In the following sections you will find the instructions on how to insert or
change a stylus system manually and to quality an already qualified stylus
system.
For more information about stylus systems and styli of different types as
well as stylus system management, please refer to the chapter Styli and
stylus systems [ 111].
For information about the automatic stylus change, please refer to the
chapter Stylus system changer [ 131].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-15
2 If you want to install an SP600 and change the stylus system (SP600
plate): Remove the stylus system manually from the SP600 and proceed with step 5.
- or If you want to install an SP600 and change the probe (RDS plate), as
well as in all other cases: Click the red arrow in the left half of the
window.
The message Stylus system will be released in 5 seconds appears on
the screen.
3 Click OK.
4 Carefully grip the stylus system that is about to be ejected.
After five seconds, the CMM ejects the stylus system.
If a trigger probe is involved, deviate the stylus system slightly to be
able to remove it from the holder.
Measuring probes are ejected fully automatically, i.e. you must be holding
the stylus system in your hand at this time.
3-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-17
3-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template. The
part alignment template is described in full detail in Definition template
(Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-19
The primary reference (Rotate Space) restricts two of the three rotational degrees of freedom; e.g., the rotation around the X and Y axes.
You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan. You
can define a new part alignment using Resources Utilities Alignment or with the toolbox.
Selecting the coordinate
system
3-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
you use features with a pattern or a loop index for a coordinate system
determined by the standard method,
you use the loop index in a special function when defining the coordinate system.
Base alignment
The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of the
workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base alignment, read
Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].
The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine coordinate
system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan, on the other
hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to other alignments.
They are used for the correct evaluation of the measuring results.
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features you
want to use for defining the workpiece position on the CMM. If these
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-21
features have already been measured, the current workpiece position will
be calculated and saved.
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, for example, the workpiece position cannot be calculated until later. This can be accomplished
by loading a saved base alignment (see Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [ 323]) or by manually adapting a defined base
alignment (see Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327]).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:
The assignments of the features to the 5 references of the base alignment are saved in the measurement plan.
The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a file.
Start alignment
A part alignment is referred to as a start alignment when it can be used
as a provisional base alignment. It must be possible to generate it by
manual probing and can be permitted only once in a measurement plan.
What is the purpose of a
start alignment?
Simple structure
3-22
The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and with
the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use the Start
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you
must tick the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment index
card.
For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment,
read Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].
Do not select parallel planes for different references (e.g. the surface
of a cube and the surface of a cylinder on top of it). In this case, the
second reference tells CALYPSO nothing more about the orientation
of the workpiece than the first reference did.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-23
3-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five references. CALYPSO automatically enters the information in the fields
when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already measured
the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control console.
7 Define a feature for the reference. There are a number of possibilities:
The feature already exists:
Click the appropriate button of the reference.
Click OK.
The automatic feature recognition engine of CALYPSO automatically registers the geometry of the feature.
Click the appropriate button of the reference in the Alignment dialog box.
Click OK.
Click one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define Circle on a Cylinder, Define 2-D Line or Extract Features
to import the entire feature right away.
CALYPSO updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.
Click OK.
8 Define the features for the other references in the same way.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-25
The default name for the measurement plan is derived from the name of
the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the
name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click the Comment button to type in and save a comment containing additional information.
3-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature has to
be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment. This dialog
box is fully described in Manual Alignment in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is up61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-27
dated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often you
have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a reference, the window displays
the feature needed for the next reference (such as 2D Line1).
After the probing, CALYPSO takes a moment to update the part alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then you are
returned to the Alignment window.
7 Click OK.
The Base / Start Alignment icon will then be green.
When adjusting the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position will
be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the model in the CAD window does not change.
3-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click Add.
4 Enter in the End field, e.g., 5 as number of the loop cycles.
5 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and
select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter an abortion condition, for example
the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-29
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and when
it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is stopped. The
value of the valueA variable is recalculated each time the loop is run.
It stands for the approximation between the measured alignment and
the alignment stored in memory. In the standard protocol, valueA is
designated as Delta.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load, Create Or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
If a Space Point feature measured with the Point Set strategy is used
in the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration.
8 To do so, click Iterative alignment and enter the parameters for
computed iteration.
For computed iteration, the point set is not remeasured but the measured point set is evaluated again. For more information, see Alignment by means of computed iteration [ 330].
9 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece has not been moved
since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece, alignment is computed iteratively until the difference (delta) between two
consecutive alignments is less than the value you specified (0.05).
Refer to the default printout for information on the alignment procedure
and the results, including the value for delta.
3-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can define the parameters for each Space Point feature individually
or for all features used in the coordinate system. CALYPSO checks the
entries and issues warning messages:
Search radius
If the specified search radius is too small, e.g. smaller than the step
width of the scanning strategy, CALYPSO can find a maximum of one
point. If the specified value is too large, e.g. larger than the expansion
of the scanning strategy, the distance between the points and the
target position is too large and the computation is inaccurate (see ill.).
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coordinate system, CALYPSO uses the largest step width and the smallest
expansion of all scanning strategies as basis.
Search radius
Point set
Target position
CALYPSO
3-31
3-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: When making changes on the base alignment of an existing measurement plan, always do so with great care and deliberation especially
when dealing with a complex measurement plan or when the measurement plan contains theoretical features, formulas or parameters. Check
subsequently the nominal values of the features with regard to their correctness.
1 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select either the Change current base alignment or Change
current start alignment option.
4 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window appears on the screen.
It shows which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular reference with another
feature which has already been defined:
Click the button for the reference in question to open the Selection
(Features) window.
In the list, click the feature you want to use.
Confirm twice with OK.
6 If you want to assign a particular reference a feature that has yet to
be defined:
Click the button for the reference in question.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define (e.g.
plane or 2D straight line).
Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the necessary
points of the feature.
Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
console.
As soon as you start probing, CALYPSO updates the feature definition
at the left-hand side of the window.
After probing, confirm twice with OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-33
After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start Alignment icon must be green. When a base / start alignment is changed, the
nominal values of all of the features in the current measurement plan will
be changed. The position of the base/start alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only
measured features are used.
An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to a
point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all of
the three coordinate directions.
Rotate by an angle:
The desired rotation angle is entered directly in degrees.
Rotate by distances:
The rotation angle is entered via vector coordinates.
3-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin in the X,Y
or Z axis:
7 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-35
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the alignment to be rotated, and the angle (in degrees):
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
3-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the system to be rotated,
and the vector for rotation.
Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate system
of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends on the selected
axis of rotation).
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-37
Option
Function
Rotate to Distance (to a given Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific
axis)
coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to origin line
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line passing
through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the tertiary
reference (measured point) in the plane. After this rotation, the X
value and Y value of the nominal point and the tertiary reference have
same ratios.
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line between
a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the tertiary reference has a slope of 45. After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y
of the nominal point and the tertiary reference are equal (delta-X
(delta-Y) is the difference between the two X values (Y values)).
The options only appear in the Special Functions window if they
would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment satisfies certain
preconditions.
Prerequisites
To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary reference function, the following preconditions must be met:
For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is rotated, the tertiary reference must be
Rotate to Distance
Use the Rotate to Distance function to enter a desired value on the
coordinate axis for a feature. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment until
it is set to this value.
Example
3-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
50
CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the nominal distance is achieved.
40
CALYPSO
3-39
When using the Rotate to origin line function, CALYPSO rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
Yact
Y nom
Nominal coordinates
X act
X nom
In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X values and
the Y values for both points (the one defined by the line and the point
for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to origin line is
in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example
3-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Nominal coordinates
X
In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X values (between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary reference) equals
the difference between the Y values which is why it is called Rotate to
same deviation.
Example
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-41
Enter
distance
This can be necessary in the following case, for example: During the
alignment of a workpiece, the primary and the tertiary alignment is to be
measured on the workpiece. The secondary alignment, however, is to be
measured on a fixture that is no longer accessible after clamping down
the workpiece.
As a result, the feature for the secondary alignment can no longer be
measured as soon as the workpiece is clamped onto the fixture.
The base / start alignment can nonetheless be created. To do this, measure the secondary alignment in a separate measurement plan before the
CNC run. You then define the base alignment / start alignment of the
3-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can load the secondary reference for a base alignment/start alignment from another base alignment/start alignment under the following
circumstances:
NOTICE
Both the Load alignment for secondary reference and the Reference axis setting in secondary reference options thus cancel
one another.
Measurement plan already exists
If the workpiece on the machine has been displaced and it thereby becomes necessary to re-qualify the base/start alignment, you must always
qualify the base/start alignment first and load its secondary reference afterward. Not until afterward do you redefine the base/start alignment in
which you want to load the secondary reference.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-43
The first coordinate axis of the new base/start alignment that has already
been determined is compared with the six directions of the axes from the
existing base/start alignment. Among these six axis directions, the axis is
found that forms the smallest angle to the new primary alignment.
Stored
alignment
Z
Y
Spatial
orientation
and origin in
Z
Origin in
X and Y
The determined axis direction of the existing system forms, together with
the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment, an angle smaller
than or equal to 45.
For the secondary alignment, one of the two other axes of the existing
base/start alignment is used:
nearest direction of the existing system
-X
-Y
-Z
It is now important for the new coordinate system to know for which axis
direction (in the new coordinate system) the axis of the existing system
determined above is to be used:
primary axis of the new system
The primary direction (of the new alignment) is found in the first line, the
secondary axis is below it.
3-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
3-45
Other requirements
The following situation is presented as an example: There are two measurement plans one, to measure the plane rotation on a fixture, and a
second, to measure the workpiece on the fixture.
If the base alignment of the plane rotation was re-qualified (e.g., because
the fixture was moved or turned about) and now it is switched over to
the other measurement plan, a very difficult situation develops.
The plane rotation was changed but the base alignment of the workpiece
is still in the same position. This can be compared to the following: A
workpiece was defined on the machine by probings (with complete base
alignment). Now the workpiece is turned about and a new plane is measured. This plane is now replaced by the feature of the current plane rotation of the base alignment. The consequence is: When the base alignment window is opened and closed again, all nominal geometries are
calculated again (shifting of the CAD model) due to the fact that the
actual features of the primary and tertiary alignments were not likewise
measured again.
To compensate for this, the base alignment is calculated from the nominal
geometries again when the base alignment window opens. If the stored
alignment has not changed, the nominal base alignment has a zero vector
and a universal matrix. If it has changed, however, the difference between
the existing alignment and the new alignment in relation to the current
alignment is added and saved.
3-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The calculation and saving of the base alignment when opening the window is only carried out in the case where the Load alignment for
secondary reference function is activated.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-47
4 Tick the Accept local alignment from the CAD model check
box.
5 Move the mouse over the CAD model in the CAD window.
Every time you move over a local alignment in the CAD model, the
name, the offset and the rotation are displayed at the position in the
CAD window.
6 Click with the mouse to transfer the desired alignment to the window.
7 Click twice OK.
3-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3D Best Fit
Six Points
3D Best Fit
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for workpieces for
which no clear references have been defined. This is a situation frequently
encountered in free form measurements.
The 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between any
number of points or geometric elements and their specified geometry.
Number of points
Description
at least 1,
The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.
no upper limit
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-49
If you select the Best fit on CAD model option, the actual points are
first aligned with the nominal points (according to Gauss) and the perpendicular base points of the actual points aligned in this way are then
calculated on the CAD model. Finally, the actual points are aligned with
the perpendicular base points (according to Gauss).
RPS Method
CALYPSO supports two RPS methods: RPS 321 and RPS Freeform.
RPS 321
The RPS 321 method is not suitable for free form measurements. RPS is
short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the 3-2-1
rule.
Number of points
Description
at least 3,
maximum 6
RPS Freeform
Contrary to the RPS 321 method, the RPS Freeform method is suitable for
free form measurements. It uses the same algorithms as the HOLOS program and is primarily used for measuring body panels for motor vehicles.
Number of points
Description
at least 1,
The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.
no upper limit
The RPS Freeform method has the same function as the 3D best fit according to nominal planes. The main planes of the coordinate system
which was selected in the RPS alignment represent the nominal planes.
If more than one direction is defined for a feature, the same feature is
called several times in each direction.
Best fit according to
nominal plane
The normal 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible iterative
fit between the actual points and the nominal points.
3-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For the Best fit according to nominal plane, the actual points are first
projected onto the nominal plane. The nominal plane is defined via the
nominal point and the normal. Then the best possible fit between the
actual points and the nominal points takes place. The perpendicular base
points are recalculated with each iteration step.
P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of tubes.
Number of points
Description
exactly 3
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-51
Select also the type of alignment for the RPS alignment: RPS 321 or
RPS Freeform.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that you
must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of freedom.
2 Click Select Features to define the features you want to use for
alignment.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
3-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Select the features you need for alignment (multiple selection with the
Ctrl key).
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition template
for alignment.
4 If you have to define reference features in addition to those already
listed:
Click the line of the feature for which you want to define a reference.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
Click Select References.
In the selection window, click the feature you want to define as a
reference.
Click OK.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of alignment, define the nominal position in the columns headed Nominal
X, Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction indicated in the drawing for each feature you selected (X, Y or Z check
box).
7 If (during alignment with 3D best fit) you want to perform the best fit
on the CAD model, tick the Best fit on CAD model check box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-53
3-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Rotate Now
Passive RT
0.00
By Eye / Manually
Help Position
0.00
0.00
*
Base Alignment Axis
Auto
+X
0.00
*
*
Reset
The position and the use of the rotary table for the measurement plan
can be determined in this and in other windows. The necessary prerequisites are described in the following sections of the chapter Rotary table:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-55
The names of the clearance planes, of which the safety cube is composed,
begin with the abbreviation CP, followed by the direction to be protected.
For example, CP +X. The names of clearance planes that are additionally
defined when a rotary table is used consist of the abbreviation RTCP and
the direction to be protected. For example, RTCP +X.
Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in some
cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure to do
so may result in collisions with the part.
Prerequisites
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:
All styli of the current stylus system must be qualified. See Qualify-
Method
3-56
The size of the probe must be defined in the default settings under
Extras Settings CMM (on the Probe index card).
You can define the corners of the cube with the CMM [ 357].
You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners manually [ 358].
If you do not have a CMM position (or I-POS) button on your CMM
control console (which allows you to record the current position of
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
the stylus), then you can use the CMM to probe the outside edges
of the part itself as its clearance planes [ 359].
If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes
automatically [ 360]. All you have to do is tell CALYPSO how far
you want the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
Blocking edges is a way of further restricting stylus travel without the need
to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful, for example,
if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the table or the design
of the clamping device is such that it could cause a collision at an edge.
The new route is calculated automatically. See Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [ 361].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-57
(1)
(2)
4 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
5 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece (position 2).
6 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
7 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
8 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
3-58
CALYPSO
4 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
5 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
z y
x
(2)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-59
The procedure is the same as in step 3, but you probe in the opposite
direction.
5 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
6 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
3-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on the
geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach each
plane directly).
You have positioned more than one workpiece on the measuring table.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-61
Note: The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always blocked. The -Y or +Y edge is also blocked if the measuring machine is of the horizontal-arm type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Tick the check boxes for the edges you want to block.
3 Click OK.
The edges you selected are blocked with immediate effect.
3-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can find more details under Creating multiple printouts [ 810].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-63
This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for features. The settings in question are feature-related definitions
and settings applicable to the entire measurement plan, e.g. those
relating to measurement strategies, styli and clearances in a CNC run.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.
Open the measurement plan editor for features by using the icon in the
list of prerequisites or via Resources Features Settings Editor.
3-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
MAN-CNC-Modus
Accept for:
Measurement Plan
Probing
selected features
Stylus System
Units
Set To
Setup Mode
Printer
CMM Parameters
Plane
Warning Limits
Plane
Optical Settings
Circle
Circle
Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Circle
Circle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
Circle
OK
Tabular editor
Cancel
Help
For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor features in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.
This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for characteristics.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.
Additionally, you can have the nominal data (values and formulas,
geometrical features and datums) of the characteristics displayed and
edit them for individual or several characteristics.
You thus overwrite the definitions made in the definition templates
of the characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-65
Warning Limit in %
Accept for:
Form Plot
Measurement Plan
selected features
Characteristic to Statistic
Mode for nominal values
Tolerance Mode
Show formulas
Units
Set To
Type
Z-value1
Angle One 1
W1
Angle Two 1
W2
Angle of lnclination1
TiltAng
Angle of Rotation1
RotAng
Diameter1
Diameter Two1
D2
Radius1
Radius Two1
R2
Width1
Width
Length1
Length
Value
OK
Tabular editor
Cancel
Help
For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
3-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
Purpose of temperature compensation
You can configure CALYPSO to consider the temperature-related expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM
when taking the measurements. Additionally, you may establish temperature limits that trigger a warning when going above or below the limits
at the start of the CNC run.
In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of expansion.
The following table shows the coefficients of expansion of certain
common materials:
Material
Coefficient (micrometers/C)
Aluminum (2024-T3)
22.7
Aluminum (6061-T6)
24.3
Aluminum (7079-T6)
24.7
Cast iron
11.7
Copper
16.6
Magnesium (HK31A-H24)
25.2
Nickel
13.0
15.1
17.8
Carbon steel
11.3
Titanium (B 120VCA)
9.4
NOTICE
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values may
vary slightly from one table to another.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-67
Temperature compensation
If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part, for example
a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have two options:
Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation.
Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective material before starting a new series.
3-68
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
CALYPSO
3-69
Temperature compensation
Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
6 Tick the Warning if workpiece temperature over ... or under ... check box if such a warning should be displayed at CNC start,
and enter the upper and lower limits for the temperature.
7 Tick the Warning, if the difference between workpiece
temperature and qualification temperature of the stylus
used is greater than ... check box if such a warning should be
displayed at CNC start, and enter the maximum admissible difference.
8 Press OK to confirm.
Once you have activated temperature compensation, this means the following:
If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured temperatures will be used automatically to correct the measurements.
3-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
4 If the temperature stylus has not yet been qualified: qualify it now by
probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a rough, not a highly precise qualification of the stylus (Qualifying the styli [ 1125]). To
do this, select the Manual mode and, under Geometry, the Temperature stylus option.
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature stylus.
In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the measuring
force.
After the first probing, an entry called Temperature probing will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point will
be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the Temperature probing feature. You can edit
the data (Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [ 371]).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in the
Temperature Compensation window.
7 Press OK to confirm.
CALYPSO calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be
included in the default printout.
If automatic temperature probing is enabled (Activating the temperature compensation [ 369]), CALYPSO will begin probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the temperature stylus at the start of
the CNC run (in other words before the CNC alignment) and will thus
determine the temperature of the workpiece to a high degree of precision.
Adding a temperature
probing feature
The simplest way to add a Temperature probing feature to the measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing (Determin61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-71
Temperature compensation
ing the temperatures by manual probing [ 370]). A Temperature probing entry with the probed points will be automatically added to the list
of features.
The Temperature probing feature added to the measurement plan can
be edited like any other feature; for example, you can change the point
probed if necessary. You can also copy or delete it. In this manner, you
can add several temperature probed points to a measurement plan.
NOTICE
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the Temperature probing feature that is entered under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
3-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-73
Temperature compensation
3-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
Temperature probing
during a CNC start
At the start of the CNC run, the temperature probing is conducted automatically in accordance with the selected feature. CALYPSO calculates
the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in
the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be
used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature
sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the workpiece temperature limits have been exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly
before the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or to continue the
run.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the difference between
the qualification temperature and the current stylus temperature is exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly before the run begins. You
may decide either to cancel or to continue the run.
Printout
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be included in the default printout.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-75
Temperature compensation
// DEFAULT DIALOG
//TEMP_VALUE=inquireNumber("Workpiece Temp. =")
// or
// LOAD FILE
ALIST=readListFile("wp_temp_value.txt")
// Access to the 1st value of the list parameter
TEMP_STRING=getParameterNamed(ALIST,1)
// Conversion of string to number
TEMP_VALUE=val(TEMP_STRING)
//
// DEFAULT OF TEMP. VALUE
setWPTemperature(TEMP_VALUE)
Note: While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the
temperature values.
If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors and you
do not conduct a temperature probing, you must activate the temperature compensation before starting the measurement plan. At this
point, it would be convenient to go ahead an enter the actual temperatures manually.
3-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
5 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not exactly
20C (68F), click the Scales fields and enter the temperatures from
the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of expansion for the scales are
already known to CALYPSO.)
The compensation values are calculated automatically and displayed.
6 Press OK to confirm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-77
Temperature compensation
Chronological order
CALYPSO performs the measurements and computations for the temperature compensation at the beginning of the CNC run. Any temperature variations of the workpiece and clamping occurring during the CNC
run will not be considered. This is particularly important if you wish to
measure additional elements manually after the CNC run.
When redefining the base alignment, the position of the part reference
point will not be recomputed automatically. You must change the part
reference point yourself after you have redefined the zero point of the
base alignment.
Printouts
3-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-79
Temperature compensation
5 Activate Temperature compensation for different materials and enter the specifications for the temperature compensation of
the clamping.
6 If the part reference point is not the origin of the base alignment, you
must enter the coordinates of the part reference point based on the
base alignment.
7 Press OK to confirm.
The temperature compensation of the base alignment is thus prepared.
3-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Defining features
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-1
Defining features
Defining features
Options for defining features
What is a feature?
Defining features
Importing features
4-2
CALYPSO
Defining features
NOTICE
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the features [ 438].
Special measurement
plan features
Strategy defaults
Select Resources Save / Load Defaults to preset strategy details
on the Strategy index card.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-3
Defining features
Measuring method
Point density
Point masking
SCAN limits
Start angle
Form datum
MMC/LMC mode
VAST Navigator
Manual run
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under System
Set Up (Measurement Methods).
The context menu of the list of features offers the following options:
Menu command
Function
Rename
Check use of feature se- Shows in which characteristics, constructions or coordinate systems
the feature is used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this feature in the References window.
Features
Edit functions
Cut, Copy, Copy with References, Paste, Paste Contents, Paste with
References
Parameter
Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.
Open
Details
Delete
Delete Actuals
Deletes only the actuals of the feature. When using a pattern, you
can restrict the deletion to selected pattern features.
4-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Menu command
Function
Export Points
Opens the Export Points dialog box where you can immediately
export the nominal values, actual values and deviations to a file.
Execute Now!
Meaning
Light gray: The feature has not yet been defined fully.
Dark gray: The feature has been defined fully but has not yet been
measured.
Green: The feature has been defined and measured results have been
gathered.
Letter T: The feature is a theoretical element.
Comment
Measurement strategies
Clearance groups
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-5
Defining features
You will find more information under Definition template (Feature) in the
CALYPSO Online Help.
The definition template is shown in the Features window. This illustration shows the definition template for the Circle feature.
Features
Circle 1
Comment
Projection
Strategy
Circle
Projection to nominal
Evaluation...
Clearance Group
Nominal Data
Tolerance For:
Alignment
Options
(Base alignment)
Nominal
Actual
X
Y
Z
D
A1 Y/Z
A2 Y/Z
Space Axis
Length
Start angle
Angle Segment
Sigma
Form
Min
Point no.
OK
4-6
61212-2011002
Points
Reset
CALYPSO
Defining features
CALYPSO
4-7
Defining features
Element
Name *
Internal
name
Clearance plane
CP +X
SP +X
Clearance group
CG +X
GRP +X
RT clearance plane
RTCP +x
RTSP +X
RT clearance group
RTG +X
RTG +X
Duplicating features
If features and groups of features of the same form and configuration
exist several times on your workpiece, you do not need to define each
individual feature.
When using the Keep Position function, you define a feature occurring
several times only once, duplicate it and reposition it.
Playing a video
4-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Keep Position
By assigning a new alignment to a feature and ticking the Keep Position box, the nominal values do not change, i.e. the feature is transferred
to the new alignment.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-9
Defining features
In the case of manually probed features, this means that for each probed
feature you have to go back and forth between the CMM and the CALYPSO PC, in order to change the coordinate system.
The preassignments for new features allow you to determine the coordinate system on the CALYPSO PC and probe the features one after the
other. Use the RETURN key of the control console to close the automatically
detected features. The desired coordinate system is already entered in the
feature.
Defining preassignments
1 Select Resources Preassignment for New Features.
- or Select CAD Preassignment for New Features.
4-10
Pasting via the Features menu or the toolbox (except for GEAR PRO,
HOLOS and turbine blade)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The preassignment of the projection plane applies to the following features: point, circle, 2D line, ellipse, slot and rectangle. The preassignment
will only be made if it is possible and useful.
NOTICE
The type of projection Projection to nominal is only valid for the Circle feature. If Projection to nominal is set in the preassignment, then
no projection plane will be entered for newly created features that are
not a circle.
Min. probings:
Point
2D line
Plane
Symmetry point
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Symmetry plane
Ellipse
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-11
Defining features
Settings
Element
Min. probings:
Rectangle
Slot
In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used (Defining the automatic feature recognition [ 413]).
You can exclude error codes or define only certain features, for example,
in optical measurements of bores where bores are just to be identified as
circles.
Procedure
If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric element on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see Defining features
using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
The definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
Procedure
4-12
In the default settings, you can specify the number of probings. The default setting is as follows:
Element
Max. probings
Point
2D line
Plane
Sphere
Torus
Symmetry plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
12
Ellipse
Rectangle
Slot
During probing, CALYPSO must know the feature you want to measure.
Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan, then open the
definition template and take probings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The CMM will stop the measurements automatically when the specified
number of measuring points for a particular feature have been taken.
3 Untick the check box for each feature that you want to exclude from
the automatic feature recognition.
4 Press OK to confirm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-13
Defining features
4-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The CAD file must have one of the following file name extensions:
Creating program
Extension
ACIS
.sat
.dxf
CATIA
.exp
CATIA
.model
CATIA V
.CATPart
IGES
.igs
Inventor
.ipt
.jt
Parasolid
.x_t
Pro-E / Unigraphics
.prtxx, .prt
Pro-E
.asm
Solid-Works
.sldprt
STEP
.stp
VDAFS
.vda
NOTICE
When you load an .asm file, the individual parts must also be in the
same directory. CALYPSO assembles the individual parts automatically to
form a CAD model.
With CAD files of the following programs, CALYPSO allows you to transfer also the dimension, form and position data together with the features
to the measurement plan:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-15
Defining features
Creating program
Extension
CATIA V
.CATPart
Pro-E / Unigraphics
.prtxx, .prt
Pro-E
.asm
NOTICE
The structure of the CAD data determines whether CALYPSO can transfer
the dimension, form and position data to the measurement plan. Manual
changes may especially be required for constructions.
Procedure
NOTICE
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. in IGES, VDA or DXF format), you will
have to define the third coordinate manually either by entering an offset
in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by changing
the nominal geometry.
NOTICE
(Only for CALYPSO older than version 3.8:) If you have a ProE or Unigraphics license, you are not permitted to change the host name and server
code of the computer, as otherwise your license becomes invalid. If the
license is lost, the interface no longer functions.
4-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
NOTICE
The background conversion may impair the performance of other applications.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-17
Defining features
3 Tick the check box of the desired feature and click Settings.
The strategy dialog box opens:
4 Double-click the list entry for which you want to make strategy settings.
The definition dialog box opens.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
As soon as you extract a solid geometry from the CAD model or extract
a feature via the filter (using CAD Filter ...), CALYPSO assigns the
predefined strategies to these features.
4-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
2 Select Edit Select All or highlight the individual features you want
to insert into your measurement plan.
CALYPSO
4-19
Defining features
You must define the probing points with the CMM or the CAD window
if there are none defined in the strategy list of the feature. You will find
more information in the Online Help under Defining probing points in
the CAD window [ 211].
CALYPSO assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign a
more suitable stylus for some features, i.e. one with which the CMM can
probe the features in question (see Editing a measurement
plan [ 68]).
4-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Click a point on the line you want to define and use the mouse to
drag the line.
6 To define a rectangle:
Select the Define Rectangle icon.
Click a point of the rectangle you want to define.
7 To define two mutually opposite space points:
Select the Distance check icon.
Click a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are shown
at the selected position. With the aid of these two points, you can
check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in question.
8 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
Select the Extract Features icon.
Click the desired feature in the CAD model.
CALYPSO supports regular and free pattern types. The available regular
pattern types are linear and circular patterns:
Linear patterns
Circular patterns
Free patterns
1D Linear Pattern
2D Linear Pattern
In the case of polar pattern offset, the local feature alignment keeps
its orientation with respect to the workpiece coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-21
Defining features
With free patterns, the additional positions of the feature can be freely
defined. To do so, complete a position list in CALYPSO.
Pattern types
If you require a certain pattern type not only on one individual feature,
define this pattern type with its parameters and save it.
You can use this pattern type for other features.
NOTICE
If you edit a pattern type, all patterns that are based on this type will also
be changed.
Switching a pattern on
and off
Similar to the definition of features, you can use the Keep Position
function. When you change the alignment while the Keep Position
check box is active, the pattern including the center, projection plane and
direction of rotation will be moved to the same position, relative to the
new alignment, as that in the old alignment.
The pattern for a group can be defined and activated via the context menu
or via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
If the results of only certain pattern features are unusable, it is not necessary to repeat the entire measurement. In the context menu of the features, you can call the Delete Actuals window and delete the actual
values of the features in question.
4-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Formulas in patterns
You can also use formulas in features that are multiplied by means of a
pattern: for example in the case of a circle for the determination of the
center. When using formulas in a pattern, different procedures for the
determination of the pattern features are possible:
Algorithm
Meaning
(general default)
First pattern then formula
(default for getActual and
LOOP in formulas)
Default setting
Default setting
For
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-23
Defining features
Defining a pattern
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
3 To use a new pattern, click New, select the desired pattern type and
click OK. Enter the parameters in the corresponding window.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
By using a pattern, this will be entered automatically in the list of patterns with the name Patternx (x = 1, 2, ...). You can rename the
feature via the context menu.
4 To use an existing pattern type, click Selection of Pattern, select
the desired pattern type and click OK.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
5 Click Edit to change the pattern type settings.
You will be informed if formulas were used in the feature and the
selection does not comply with your default setting.
4-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Relative measurement
Applications for relative measurement
During relative measurement, the determined measured points are not
evaluated where they were recorded. That could be for various reasons.
Relative measurement is useful in the following cases:
Deformations
Larger components made of sheet metal with a thickness of a few
millimeters may slightly bend when they are clamped on the CMM.
This deformation must be taken into account when measuring with
the CMM. In this case, it may not be possible to directly approach the
actual positions of circles in the surface.
Immersion depth
In drawings for workpieces made of thin sheet metal, the thickness
of the workpiece is specified as a number and not as a third dimension. Bores are shown as circles. If a bore is measured with a certain
immersion depth, the measuring location deviates from the nominal
position of the circle.
Bent surface
Measuring lines or circles on bent surfaces (cylinder, cone, torus) normally generates contours deviating from the regular form. To enhance
the form results, you can project the points rotationally on a plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-25
Defining features
Edge measurement
A point of an edge or the run of a circular bore in a surface is to be
determined. However, an edge cannot be probed correctly with a
stylus. Instead, CALYPSO measures, for example, auxiliary points on
a working plane and calculates the edge location.
Offset
The features to be measured are all equally offset from the nominal
position. The actual position of a feature can be determined. Enter
the determined deviation, as a result of which the features will be
measured offset by this vector.
Missing bore
Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the workpiece. By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings
and collisions.
You must define a Working Plane if you want to measure the feature not
at the nominal location but with a vertical offset. Use the working plane
to indicate in CALYPSO the location of measurement.
In general:
4-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Select for the measured plane the plane on which the feature lies. During
the CNC run this plane is measured in order to obtain actual values. Under
Measurement you have two options for determining the measuring
location:
Calculate d1: The distance between the actual plane and the nominal position of the working plane determined during the CNC run is
used as an offset in order to determine the actual probing location on
the feature.
Distance d1: The distance entered is used as the offset from the
working plane. Positive values mean an offset counter to the normal
vector into the material, negative values mean an offset in the direction of the normal vector out of the material.
Distance d3: By selecting this option and entering 0 for the distance,
the measured actual values are projected onto the actual working
plane.
You can enter a separate immersion depth for the evaluation. A positive entry means an offset counter to the normal vector into the material. A negative value means an offset in the direction of the normal
vector out of the material.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-27
Defining features
NOTICE
You do not require an additional working plane feature for these
methods and you will have the result faster. Disadvantage: These methods are not as accurate as the working plane method.
Edge measurement
The Edge Measurement method enables the measurement of an individual edge point via auxiliary points. Define the distances between the auxiliary points and the edge point to be measured. It is possible to easily
move the edge point to be measured by means of a formula or a loop;
the auxiliary points are always at the correct position.
d2
d1
d3
4-28
The Three Points method enables the measurement of a circle. The working plane is determined by the circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Probing points
d2
Here you must also enter the location parameters for the auxiliary points.
The actual value of the plane is determined by means of three or more
auxiliary points which lie at regular angle distances on an arc around the
circle to be measured.
The radius offset defines the difference between the radius of the points
and the radius of the circle to be measured. The distance d1 is the measuring depth of the circle to be measured counter to the normal vector of
the working plane. The height in which the actual value for the evaluation
is used is determined by the distance d3.
d2
d1
d3
CAD support
You can define an edge point via the CAD window:
Select the Define Edge Point icon in the Switch to Feature
Menu selection list. Each time you click the CAD model, CALYPSO creates an edge point on the edge located closest to the selected point.
Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of
the new feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-29
Defining features
Projection
to nominal
Measured
points
NOTICE
The Projection to nominal function is only available for the Circle
feature.
Rotational projection
For certain measuring jobs, the projection of the measured actual points
along a cylinder surface is useful. This projection method requires the
definition of a projection plane and a rotation axis.
The rotational projection produces enhanced form results for circles
measured on a torus or sphere and for 2d lines measured on the surface
4-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Point 1
Rotation axis
Projection plane
This can be useful if the features to be measured are all equally offset
from the nominal position (e.g. small punched circles around a larger circle).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-31
Defining features
You can easily determine the actual position of the larger circle but not
the actual positions of the smaller circles (risk of collision!). In this case,
you measure with measuring reference and specify the larger circle as
reference feature. CALYPSO probes the features offset by the deviation
determined on the larger circle.
Two methods
Element
CALYPSO determines the actual position of the selected feature. The
difference vector between the actual and nominal value represents
the offset.
Main orientation
You enter the offset in the coordinate axes of the base alignment.
Select a reference feature as offset for each coordinate axis.
Own Geometry
CALYPSO determines the offset during a separate search run for
which you indicate a search distance and a measuring height.
4-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The search distance indicates for outside features the distance around
the feature at which the actual position is searched for. The stylus
moves around the feature by observing the distance defined by you
to the predefined nominal contour.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
Search path
The search distance is not important for inside features. The search
run starts in the center of the nominal position and is carried out in
all four directions.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
NOTICE
After the search run, CALYPSO knows the actual position of the feature
and carries out the actual measurement on the shifted position with correspondingly large deviations of the position. The nominal data of the
feature are not affected.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-33
Defining features
The Bore Missing function is set for each individual feature. You have
two options:
Select Probing Missing Hole (Search Distance) in the Features Settings Editor.
Activate the function and set the Search Distance. The search distance
specifies the depth of the first probing position in the material.
4-34
If the CMM does not reach any material during the search process,
the measurement of the bore is continued in the usual way.
If the CMM reaches material during the search process, the current
feature is omitted. The CMM moves back to the 1st CMM POS of the
feature and from there to the next feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
NOTICE
This is only possible as long as no intermediate position is programmed
for reaching the next feature.
CALYPSO can only compensate missing bores correctly if the travel paths
between the features and within the features are independent of each
other.
NOTICE
Observe that missing measured values may cause the output of incomplete plot images. Position deviations may be caused.
PCM commands
The Bore Missing function can also be activated via the setMissingBore PCM command. Thus, the function and the search distance are parameterized. The PCM function overwrites the corresponding setting for
the feature.
The getActual("feature_name").boreIsMissing command supplies a
Boolean value.
Coordinate system
Keep position
Clearance group
Stylus system
Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the feature)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-35
Defining features
Clearance distance
Retract distance
Pattern
RT position
Parameter: Presettings
Parameter: Postsettings
Evaluation settings
Characteristics
Features are referred to as similar features if they are of the same type
(e.g. circle, cylinder) and their nominal values have been defined in the
same way (e.g. via recall).
Note: When copying properties into a construction, the Keep Position check box is not taken into account.
4 Select the features to which you want to copy the properties (multiple
selection with the Ctrl key).
5 Click OK.
4-36
You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then click OK.
You can restart the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then repeat probing.
If the CAD model of the part's features is not fully on the screen or is
not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted in
the CAD window. Click Fit to resize the model to fit into the CAD
window.
If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have
clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
If you want to change the order of the details, drag the feature to the
new location.
If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by clicking
the Undo icon (or pressing F3 on the standard control console).
If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the past,
proceed as described in the section entitled Using the context menu
of the strategy list [ 4163].
To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The point
is added automatically.
If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check that
the original stylus is activated.
Move the stylus to the appropriate position, then press the button
on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click the Position CMM without probing icon in the strategy dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-37
Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time within
which you want the CNC run to complete). This is particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a workpiece.
In most instances, CALYPSO can identify the feature as an inside or outside feature from the probing direction.
You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside
feature. However, bear in mind that this affects the combination of the
travel paths and the calculation of the tangential features.
You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition template by clicking on the Inside/Outside Feature icon.
Correction of stylus radius
The measured value sent to the CMM is always the center coordinates of
the stylus. The measured value, therefore, differs from the contact point
- the measured value you want - by the radius of the stylus.
probing
direction
probing
radius
desired
measured value
4-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
measured
value
CALYPSO corrects the measured values, so you always receive the coordinates of the contact point. However, there may be a residual error, but
you can usually prevent this.
Tolerance For ...
In the Tolerance For: group, you enter a tolerance for the corresponding nominal value. CALYPSO adds a characteristic to the measurement
plan that checks the tolerance.
If you tick the A (for angle) check box, you can freely select the reference
axis and the orientation for specification of the angle.
With the Reference to Projection angle icon, you select one of the
six axes of the coordinate system as reference axis for the projected angles. The space axis of the feature is changed automatically.
NOTICE
The direction and orientation of the feature does not change.
By selecting another axis in the Space Axis field, the reference of the
projected angles is changed but not their values. Therefore, the reference
axis of the feature and thus its direction and orientation are changed.
By reversing the space axis, the direction and orientation of the feature
are also changed.
Click the Mirrors geometry and strategy icon. The whole feature
including the strategies at the coordinate plane that is perpendicular to
the set space axis is mirrored.
The angle symbols indicate the axis and orientation of the start angle and
other angles.
To change the type of representation of the angle, click the angle symbol
and select the desired orientation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-39
The Special Geometries submenu contains the features for complex geometries such as torus and stepped cylinder.
Default features
Menu: Features
Feature
Description
Point
Circle
Plane
2D Line
3D Line
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Curve
3D Curve
Special Geometries
Menu: Features Special Geometries
4-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Description
Ellipse
Slot
Rectangle
Torus
Offset Plane
Symmetry Point
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
Radius Point
Sphere Point
Angle Point
Circle on Cone
General Surface
General Curve
Additional Features
Menu: Features Additional Features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-41
Feature
Description
HOLOS
Gear
Turbine Blade
Profile Elements
Point Set
Station Point
Point feature
Basics of the Point feature
Menu: Features Point
Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual points
on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy
probing direction
measured
value
correction
4-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is possible to
switch to the space point procedure by clicking Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
Evaluation
Mode
Type of correction/conversion
Touch Point
Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis corresponding to the probing direction. Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate axis which is closest to the probing direction.
(Default setting)
Plane Point
Space Point
Net Point
Midpoint
(only with the Free Form Surface option) Several probings are possible! The stylus radius correction is performed for all measured points
in direction of the (corresponding) perpendicular on the CAD surface.
The actual coordinates of the point are determined from the center
of gravity of all measured points corrected by the stylus radius.
The corrections that are made for the respective point type are shown in
the diagram.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-43
Probe direction
z
Nominal contour
Nominal
normal
Actual
normal
4
3
Actual contour
5
1
Nominal point
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Touch Point
Plane-Point
Space Point
Net Point
Midpoint
CAD Face Point
NOTICE
The contact point on the surface must always be entered as the nominal
position for a point, regardless of the desired Space Point Mode.
Working Plane
Measurement of Normal
Normal measurement (CNC and Manual) is not possible for the CAD surface point. As for the touch point and the center point, the button is not
visible in the definition template.
With the Space Point Distance characteristic, the distance between the
actual point corrected by the stylus radius and the nominal point is determined for the space point and net point evaluations.
However, with the CAD surface point, the distance between the center
of gravity and the perpendicular base point of the center of gravity is
checked with the Space Point Distance characteristic.
Form error
4-44
CALYPSO
numbers for the maximum and minimum deviation are output accordingly. If only one probing point is used for the calculation, no form is
possible.
If only point features are used for the 3D best fit, the features are fitted
according to the nominal plane. Usually, the plane normal according to
which the fit is to be carried out is taken from the nominal geometry. The
plane normal of a CAD surface point is determined via the perpendicular
of the actual coordinate on the CAD model. The nominal point for the
best fit represents the perpendicular base point of the actual point on the
CAD model in the base alignment.
Circle feature
Menu: Features Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle A and the partial angle PA (for an arc) are specified in the
definition template.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 3 points. The probing points should be on a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is advisable to
probe at least 4 points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-45
Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cylinder. You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Plane feature
Menu: Features Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the position or inclination of which you want to determine.
CALYPSO computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template, the computed length and width of the plane are displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as possible
over the plane.
If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), CALYPSO will
compute a line. You can reconstruct a plane manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
4-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The origin of the local feature alignment depends on the position of the
plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-47
2D Line feature
Menu: Features 2D Line
The 2D Line feature is for probing lines and straight lines on any plane on
the surface of the workpiece. CALYPSO computes a mean-value line
through the points you probe.
You can restrict the degrees of freedom in X, Y and Z as well as with
regard to the normal direction for the determination of the mean-value
line.
Types of display
with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,
with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the projected angles A1 and A2.
You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
Probing strategy
Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise, CALYPSO will compute a plane. You can open the Geometry menu and
regenerate the feature as a line.
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is at the first point on
the line which defines the line fully when first registered in these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.
4-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
or
6
1
or
3
Result output
Meaning
X, Y, Z
A1 (Z/X)
A2 (Y/X)
In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.
In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal (the 2D line corresponds
to a reduced plane).
In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.
In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal.
Sigma
Min/Max
Form
Difference between minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-49
axis with which the projected angles are both less than 45 in this case
the X axis.
Y
spatial view
Z
A1
example line
A2=0
X
3D Line feature
Menu: Features 3D Line
A 3D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least two
features. You can, for example, employ a 3D line to represent the axis of
a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of definition.
Open the Nominal Definition selection list and select Recall and the
desired features.
The resulting 3D line is placed through the center point of the selected
features.
Cylinder feature
Menu: Features Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts.
Probing strategy
4-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section perpendicular to the cylinder axis.
The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis.
2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to
the axis of the first section.
CALYPSO computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections
at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
Automatic feature recognition
Result output
This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
Z
spatial view
Z
X
Y
A1
example cylinder
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
X
Y
A2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-51
The origin of the local feature alignment is on the plane with the lowest
probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Cone feature
Menu: Features Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and
outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone's taper angle.
The cone has the following defining aspects:
Probing strategy
4-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO computes the data of the cone from the circular sections at
the different heights. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
Automatic feature recognition
Result output
This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
Z
spatial view
A1
Y
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
example cone
Y
A2
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the circle of
smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the smaller toward the
larger circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-53
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
Measuring speed
4-54
For the helix strategy, you can select between the Standard (scanning according to nominal data) and Fast measuring methods. Select
the Fast method only if measuring times have been predefined and you
are sure that the stylus does not loose contact with the material.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Sphere feature
Menu: Features Sphere
Use the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
Probing strategy
Result output
Curve feature
Menu: Features Curve
Use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies and lift curves
(planar curves on the surface of a cylinder). This feature is extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section (see in the
operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
3D Curve feature
Menu: Features 3D Curve
Use the 3D Curve feature to measure free form surfaces. This feature is
extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section
(see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software
option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-55
by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2)
and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating whether this is the larger diameter).
You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
In the definition template, the angles A1 and A2 indicate the position of
the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY plane, Y in YZ plane
and Z in ZX plane).
If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to 0 and the ellipse
is no longer shown.
Probing strategy
Result output
D2
4-56
M (X, Y, Z)
Dsmall
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the ellipse. It
is not projected onto a plane of the coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can use two different probing strategies to measure the slot. In both
cases, you must probe at least five points (in any order).
NOTICE
If there are several points on a segment, make sure that they are distributed as evenly as possible.
How to distribute the probing points according to the first strategy:
2
5
4
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the slots center of gravity,
i.e. its center point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-57
Probe at least 5 points. Distribute all points as evenly as possible over the
sides. Probe at least two points for each side of the rectangle. You must
enter the value for the depth of the rectangular hollow or the height of
the cube manually in the Depth field.
Rectangular path
The Rectangular Path path generation method allows you to probe the
sides of the cube and evade the corners. You can enter different distances
to the corners for each individual side and for each individual corner.
In the Strategy defaults, you can enter absolute distances, distances
in percent or as a multitude of the stylus radius. In the Rectangular
Path technology window, these specifications are converted into absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the nominal
values of the rectangle.
4-58
Normal vector
R1, D1
R2, D2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
D1
N (nx, ny, nz)
D2
R2
R1
CALYPSO can measure a torus only with certain dimensions and radius
ratios. The following radius ratios are possible:
0 R2 R1
If the main radius is larger than the subsidiary radius, the subsidiary
radius may be as small as necessary. There are no restrictions for the
location of the measuring points.
0 < R1 R2
If the main radius is smaller than or equal to the subsidiary radius, the
main radius may be larger than zero.
Probing strategy
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-59
n
P1
P3
P2
P5
P4
R
X0
3 Check the P4 and P5 points at any radial, but maintain unequal axial
angles relative to the P1, P2 and P3 points.
4 Probe two additional points.
Best-fit method
For the torus, the best-fit method according to Gauss can only be used.
Size Characteristics
X, Y, Z value
The following form and location characteristics can be used for the torus
(MMC/LMC not possible):
Constructions
4-60
Form
True Position
Coaxiality
Concentricity
The Intersection construction is not possible for the torus. The other constructions are possible, with the exception of defined constructions.
When defining the position of the Cone Addition, a torus can be used as
reference. However, the main diameter of the torus must be used for the
diameter definition.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Special features
You cannot define any strategy default for the torus as the automatic
feature recognition does not function.
Both, the large and the small circle paths cannot be scanned by self-centering probing.
The torus must also be probed perpendicular to the surface like the sphere
and cone features. The navigation paths from one path to the next path
always run on a curved helix path.
Z0
Xp
X0
Yp
Unlike spheres and cones, the measuring height can be entered as length
as the path is not clearly defined. Therefore, the position of the circle path
is defined by an angle.
The center of the secondary circle (xP, yP, zP) serves as the vertex of the
angle. The start axis (angle = 0) is formed from the center to the outside
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-61
by means of a vector (perpendicular to the normal of the torus). The direction of rotation is downward in relation to this axis.
The start angle and the angle range are defined at the smaller radius. The
reference axis and the direction of rotation of the angles are the same as
those used for the measuring height definition of the large circle path
(see above).
The measuring height of the small circle path is also defined by an angle.
The angle is referenced to the uv plane or the surface area of the torus.
Probe no more and no less than three points and then enter the offsets:
1 Click Evaluation.
2 In the Point Modification group, click the Edit button.
The Points offset dialog box appears on the screen.
4-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Enter an offset for each point. The points are offset along the probing
direction.
4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
Automatic feature recognition
Result output
CALYPSO computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing points.
You must probe no more and no less than four points in order to compute
a symmetry plane.
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Probe the first three points on one side.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-63
3 Probe the other points either on this side or the other side.
4 Close the definition template.
Display in CAD window
Only the center plane is displayed in the CAD window for the symmetry
plane. The side planes remain hidden.
Result output
CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the symmetrical plane and displays the distance between the two initial planes.
Characteristics
By activating Distance in the definition template, CALYPSO adds a Distance_Symmetry characteristic to the measurement plan.
Feature recognition
This is where you define the number of probings after which the definition
template is closed automatically. Enter the number in the default settings
under Extras Settings Measurement on the Features notebook page.
Restrictions
For the intersection of a symmetry plane with another feature, you can
select whether the symmetry plane or one of the side planes should be
intersected. Activate Wall for the intersection with the side planes.
Table file
The idSymbol column in the table file shows the keyname MidPlane.
The actual distance between the side faces of the symmetry plane is
shown in the distance column. The distance from the nominal geometry is shown in the nom_distance column.
Use
The stepped cylinder can be used, for example, to check the dimensional
accuracy of a bearing block. The bearings for the shaft must meet certain
tolerances regarding the position of the axes and their diameters to ensure that the shaft diameter fits the bearings.
Similarly to a mechanical gage, it is possible to check the dimensional
accuracy and the eccentricity of each step.
Measurement strategy /
nominal definition
4-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
As of the second step, it is possible to recall other features instead of
cylinders. CALYPSO evaluates the points of these features as points of
cylinders.
Pattern
The stepped cylinder can be defined with pattern. If you select Add loop
to all marked Features for a feature with pattern in the context menu
in the Recall Feature Points dialog box, CALYPSO recalls all points of
the feature with pattern in one individual step of the stepped cylinder and
handles them in the same way as points of one individual cylinder.
If you select Delete loop from all selected Features for a feature
with pattern in the context menu in the Recall Feature Points dialog
box, CALYPSO recalls the individual pattern features of the feature as
individual steps of a stepped cylinder with pattern. This is only useful if
the same pattern is used for all steps and you select this option for all
steps. CALYPSO creates as many pattern features as possible in the stepped cylinder with pattern: The number of pattern features represents the
minimum number of features of individual pattern for all steps.
Each step has its own feature reference point the nominal position of
which must lie on the axis of the stepped cylinder. The position of the
first step becomes the feature reference point of the stepped cylinder.
The axis of the stepped cylinder is determined by best-fit alignment. The
total length of the stepped cylinder results from the difference between
the highest end point and the lowest start point of the individual steps
on the common axis.
NOTICE
In case of subsequent changes of the individual steps, the total length of
the stepped cylinder is not changed any more.
Total length
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-65
Result output
Characteristics
If the corresponding check boxes are activated, CALYPSO can automatically add the corresponding characteristics to the measurement plan.
CALYPSO adds an individual characteristic to the measurement plan for
the diameter (or the radius).
You must define in the definition template for the stepped cylinder which
steps are to be checked and whether the step is to be handled as an inside
or an outside feature. This does not depend on the corresponding original
cylinder.
Special features
4-66
Certain particular aspects must be taken into account when using the
stepped cylinder in characteristics:
For output to file, the chr.txt and fet.txt table files are written in a separate
result line for each step.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measuring plane
Cylinder axis
Probing strategy
Result output
The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read out
in the definition template.
A radius point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-67
Result output
The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center point
to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point are read
out in the definition template.
Example of application
Using the Sphere Point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere with
a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.
A sphere point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.
4-68
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result output
The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the probing
point are read out in the definition template.
Example of application
Using the Angle Point feature, you can compute the angle between two
planes, for example, by probing. Specify one plane first. CALYPSO computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of the specified
plane.
An angle point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then perform
the probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-69
Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cone instead of a circle on cone. If this
happens, you can reconstruct a circle on cone manually in the Geometry menu.
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circular section (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Defined Height
4-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-71
Each point of a general surface is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or strategy is
selected, clicking the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general surface.
You can add a nominal point to the general surface by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
You can add a point to the general surface by probing with the CMM.
Strategy
Each point of a general curve is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
4-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general curve.
You can add a nominal point to the general curve by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
The Free Form Surface feature is limited by the CAD model and has
no infinite expansion.
A coordinate system can be created with the best fit of the free form
surface.
The accuracy of the best fit of the free form surface can be controlled.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-73
4-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Examples
Each row shows the values for the X, Y and Z coordinates and optionally also the components of the corresponding Nx, Ny and Nz normal vectors.
The comma or point can be used as decimal marker. Only one type
of decimal marker can be used in a file.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-75
3 Click the feature in the CAD window which you want to transfer as a
free form surface.
The name of the feature saved in the CAD model is displayed in the
uppermost line in the window.
4 Select Free Form Surface to define a free form surface.
5 Define the path generation type.
6 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated under
Settings.
7 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
8 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.
4-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9 Under Points, click Create and check the result by means of the CAD
model.
10Transfer the displayed strategy to the feature by means of Create
Feature or click Delete and repeat the process by starting with step
5.
11Close the window.
The settings are defined in the Evaluation Free Form Surface window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-77
You can also predefine the A value for the entire measurement plan or
for each free form surface in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Best fit accuracy (free form surface).
NOTICE
The A value is composed of the translational and rotational elements of
the transformation matrix.
4-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-79
Strategy
Comment
Makro Call
Selection
OK
Reset
4-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The Turbine Blade feature is used to transfer nominal data and measured data for turbine blades to the BLADE PRO program for evaluation.
It creates several XML files.
The import of nominal data, the definition of the measurement strategy
as well as the measurement itself are carried out in CALYPSO. Use the
Curve feature for this. The BLADE PRO program is used for evaluation
only.
Together with the nominal data and the measuring results, all printout
header variables belonging to the measurement plan are also transferred
to BLADE PRO. The variables of the SYS data group are assigned the
type=static in the XML file, all other variables receive the type=dynamic.
Example in an XML file:
<Property operid="Master" type="static" />
<Property creationswi="3.8.00" type="dynamic" />
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-81
Entries
Group
Entries
Specification file
Results
Features
4-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prior to the CNC run, export the nominal data to BLADE PRO if necessary.
For this purpose, you open the definition template for the Turbine Blade
feature, mark the desired intersections and click Export Nominals.
The nominal data for each of the selected intersections is written in an
XML file named Section_xxx_nominal.xml. The printout header variables
are also transferred.
The files are saved in the directory that is defined as BladeNomPath in the
<user directory>\curveParameter.txt file.
After starting the CNC run, the following files are created and transferred
to BLADE PRO:
Section_xxx_actual.xml: Measured data files corresponding to Section_xxx_nominal.xml. After each measurement of a curve selected in
the definition template, the corresponding data is written in the
measured value file. The files are saved in the directory that is defined
as BladeActPath in the <user directory>\curveParameter.txt file. The
printout header variables are also transferred.
Finish.xml: End code of the measurement. BLADE PRO will only start
evaluation if this file is available. The data for the result output in
BLADE PRO is transferred to this file. Once the evaluation has been
completed, this will be deleted by BLADE PRO.
Once the Finish.xml file has been created, the BLADE PRO program starts
the calculation and evaluation.
The results are created in the formats specified in the definition template.
Once Blade has deleted the Finish.xml file, CALYPSO continues the CNC
run.
CALYPSO
4-83
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Measuring in intersection planes.
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Nominal-actual comparison on a CT dataset.
Origin of the measuring
values
4-84
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-85
4-86
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
4-87
4-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8 Enter the desired properties of the graphic in the Graphics Settings window:
Plot The view of the CAD window is shown as a plot.
Transparency: The CAD model is shown transparently.
Hide: The CAD model is hidden; only the point set is displayed.
9 Click the Save icon to save the actual values of the point set in a TXT
or STL file.
10Click the Save with nominal values icon to save the point set
with nominal values in a TXT or STL file.
11Click OK to close the window.
The Station Point additional feature enables an extended base alignment match with an alternative best fit algorithm. In this case, the station
point corresponds to a position of the laser tracker device.
Use the definition template to define the station point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-89
Entries
The nominal values of the station point should specify the expected position of the laser tracker but do not need to be entered.
The actual values of the station point are calculated later and represent
the exact position of the laser tracker.
4-90
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You enter here the points that are measured from several stations and
are thus suitable for the conversion. You define also whether the station
point is a base station or a follow-on station.
NOTICE
A base station is not absolutely necessary. If no station is a base station,
the calculation takes place via a free net adjustment (freier Netzausgleich).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-91
4-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-93
4-94
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Specially constructed elements of a workpiece that cannot be probed directly, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of two features. These
features can be calculated using features that can be probed.
With CALYPSO, you can mathematically construct regular geometric elements and, in this way, define the feature you require. You can also
parameterize the features to be constructed, i.e. by using formulas.
You can use either the actual or nominal geometry for the construction.
NOTICE
As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not
available here.
In the measurement plan, constructions are indicated by the letter T
next to the icon because these are theoretical features. Apart from Recall, CALYPSO supports 15 different constructions.
Overview of constructions
Recall is a special construction. It is called from within the definition template of the feature.
Name
Call
Description
Recall
Construction
Description
Perpendicular
Intersection
GDT Symmetry
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-95
Construction
Description
Edge Point
Projection
Tangent
Minimum Point
Maximum Point
Minimum Feature
Maximum Feature
Average-Feature
Cone Addition
Circle in contour
fit
Kink Point
Step Point
4-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining constructions
The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for defining a feature.
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by selecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click the construction icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
3 Select the features required for the construction using one of the following methods:
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
Click Feature and select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
Enter the name of the feature in the input field and confirm with
.
Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the input field.
Enter a formula for the name of the feature (Result: Text).
The value of the formula is calculated during run time and the construction defined accordingly.
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
Certain special aspects have to be borne in mind with the following constructions:
Cone Addition (Cone Addition construction [ 4146])
Circle in contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148])
Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle on which the center points of the measured circles are
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-97
located. To this end, define a new circle from the recalled center points
of the four measured circles.
Playing a video
Recall: Returns the reference point(s) (the origin of the local feature
alignment) of one or more features.
Playing a video
During recall and recall feature points, you can parameterize the features
to be recalled by means of the formula input. In this case, the features
are only determined during run time.
NOTICE
Proceed very carefully when defining a feature by recalling. Theoretically,
you could recall any number of features but this would not make any
sense.
4-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If a potential feature for the points recall has a pattern, this can be shown
in the selection window in two ways:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-99
If the new feature does not yet possess any pattern, the following applies:
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points or the specified points of all pattern features of the feature are
recalled.
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, you are
prompted whether a pattern is to be assigned to the new feature. A
pattern with the minimum actual number of all marked features with
the with index transfer pattern is offered as default.
By confirming this, the reference points or the specified points of the
original feature of the patterns are recalled and the proposed pattern
is assigned.
If you reject this, a pattern with only one pattern feature is created.
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
If a pattern has been assigned to the new feature beforehand, the following applies:
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, the reference points or the specified points of the original features are recalled and the pattern of the new feature is assigned.
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points of all pattern features of the feature or the specified points of
all pattern features of the feature are recalled.
If then the assigned pattern of the new feature contains more actual
pattern features than the minimum of all actual numbers of patterns
(of all marked features), you are prompted whether the pattern with
the smallest actual number is to be used for the feature.
By confirming this, the new feature will receive the corresponding
pattern.
4-100
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-101
3 Open in the tree the features with loop to recall individual pattern
features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification of
the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2*.
4 If you want to define the recall by means of the formula input, do not
select anything here and select Formula in the context menu. Enter
a formula which will furnish a list of names. To do this, use the list
PCM function.
Example: list("Plane1","Plane2")
Proceed with step 7.
4-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-103
Only those features are displayed that are of the same type as the
feature to be defined.
4 Open in the tree the features in loops to recall individual pattern features.
You can then access individual features of a pattern.
5 Select the corresponding feature and confirm with OK.
The feature is accepted and determines the new feature.
Playing a video
To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate system,
click 012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm.
Once you have accepted a feature with a pattern, the new feature will
also receive this pattern, regardless of whether you have assigned a pattern to this new feature beforehand or not.
4-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature and you have accepted an individual pattern feature, this becomes the original feature of
the assigned pattern.
You can import point coordinates from a file and use the nominal
value definition [ 4112].
NOTICE
Use the Recall Feature Points window to define the point recall. The
feature will be recomputed with the respective current actual values
when closing. If this is not necessary since you only want to check entries,
untick the Re-calculate Nominal Geometry check box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-105
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.
At the same time, two new icons appear in the top right corner: Show
selection of Actual points and Select Actual-points via
Mouse cursor.
All the potential features for the point recall are listed in the Recall
Feature Points window.
3 Activate Show all Features in Patterns or Loops to recall individual pattern features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification
of the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2<*>.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
4-106
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-107
4-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-109
Base alignment
Box with
recalled points
Coordinate system
4-110
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click one of the icons to copy a point, an area, a box, a circle path, an
angle range or a cylinder into the feature list.
3 Enter the corresponding parameters in the lower part of the window.
4 Click OK.
The defined points are included in the new feature. In the list of features, the ranges appear behind the name of the feature.
Range specification syntax
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-111
Input
Meaning
point(1)
Point 1
points(1,5)
Point 1 to point 5
box(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2),"coord_system", box_distance)
path(2)
angles(10,90)
cylinder(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2,diameter)
The points within a cylinder with the center of the base area (x1,y1,z1), the center
of the top surface (x2,y2,z2) and the diameter.
When loading, the resulting geometry is calculated from the points. The
stylus radius that may be defined is considered relative to the normal
vector of the geometry.
Line
Circle on Plane
Radial circle
4-112
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Path type
Helix
Universal type
By selecting additional features in the list for Point recall from file, these
features will be measured first before the files will be loaded.
In this way, it is possible to create the file to be loaded for the point recall
only when the selected features are measured. If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the same way. If you use
the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you can export the files directly (see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
Software option under Output of curve points and tolerances in text files).
If the selected features cannot be measured or if an error occurs during
the measurement, the point recall will not be carried out.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-113
4-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Line
Line
Circle On Plane
Circle on Plane
Circle
Circle
Helix
Helix
Any
General path
NOTICE
CALYPSO can only evaluate the points correctly if they are sorted and (in
case of several paths) assigned to the correct path. Otherwise, filtering,
outlier elimination and overlapping may lead to incorrect results.
Format description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Perpendicular construction
Menu: Construct Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, CALYPSO computes the shortest
distance between two features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-115
Feature 1
With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from which
the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature as Feature 1.
The table below shows which coordinates are used:
Feature 1 ...
Point (probing)
With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the perpendicular. The perpendicular is vertical on feature 2. Therefore, feature
2 must be a spatially defined element.
Interpretation of results
The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the specification of two projection angles.
Intersection construction
Basics of the intersection construction
Menu: Construct Intersection
With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines,
planes, symmetry planes, free form surfaces, circles, cylinders, stepped
cylinders, spheres and cones with each other and have tangents computed.
Two features
To do this, you enter the two features and obtain one or more results.
Depending on which feature you entered first, not all options are available
to you for the second one.
Three features
With the Intersection construction, you can also intersect three features,
i.e. planes and symmetry planes. Once two features of the Plane or Symmetry Plane type have been entered, it is possible to enter a third feature.
4-116
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Free form surfaces can only be intersected with axes.
Depending on the intersection, one to eight results are shown in the
Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the
intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction
Interpretation of results
Individual topics describe the special features and results of different intersections.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-117
If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you obtain
as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between the two
straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.
If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
4-118
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 intersection points
No intersection found
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-119
Line
Circle
P2
P1
Projection line
4-120
2 intersection points
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
No intersection found
CALYPSO
4-121
CALYPSO computes as the result the piercing point of the straight line
through the plane.
the piercing points of the line through the cylinder section if the
Wall check box is activated
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cylinder.
4-122
the piercing points of the line through the wall of the cone if the
Wall check box is activated
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cone.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the circular line with
the plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-123
z, k
K
E
Geometry type
There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
4-124
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
of the cylinder axis with the section plane and which intersects the
cylinder vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.
Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse as the profile element.
Geometry type
There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-125
the axis of the cone with the section plane and which intersects the
cone vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.
Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse - if it exists - as the profile element.
If the angle between the plane and the axis of the cone is not larger
than the cone's taper angle and, therefore, no intersection ellipse exists, no intersection is calculated.
The axes of the following features can be intersected with the free form
surface:
4-126
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stepped cylinder
Torus
3D line
When defining the intersection, you can specify the free form surface as
first or second feature.
The distance between the actual center point of the sphere and the cylinder axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
The distance between the actual sphere center point and the cone axis
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-127
4-128
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-129
4-130
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Results
2D line
One 3D point: the piercing point of the straight line through the
symmetry plane
3D line
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the straight line through the
side planes (wall)
Plane
One 3D line: the intersection line of the plane with the symmetry
plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the plane with the side planes
(wall)
Symmetry Plane
One 3D line: the intersection line of the symmetry plane with the
symmetry plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the symmetry plane with the
side planes (wall)
Four 3D lines: the intersection lines of the side planes (wall) with the
side planes (wall)
Two planes / symmetry One to eight 3D points, depending on whether the wall is intersected
planes
Circle
Cylinder
One 3D point: the piercing point of the cylinder axis through the
symmetry plane
(axis)
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cylinder axis through the
side planes (wall)
Cylinder
(wall)
One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cylinder axis with the symmetry plane
Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cylinder axis with the side planes (wall)
Step Cylinder
One 3D point: the piercing point of the axis of the stepped cylinder
through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the axis of the stepped cylinder through the side planes (wall)
Cone
(axis)
One 3D point: the piercing point of the cone axis through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cone axis through the side
planes (wall)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-131
Results
Cone
One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cone axis with the symmetry plane
(wall)
Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cone axis with the side planes (wall)
Sphere
One circle: the intersection circle of the sphere with the symmetry
plane
One or two circles: the intersection circles of the sphere with the side
planes (wall)
Symmetry construction
Basics of the Symmetry construction
Menu: Construct Symmetry
You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry feature
between Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can use the symmetry feature
in other constructions.
Features
You can select any feature as Feature 1 and Feature 2, except for the
curve, free form surface, general curve and general surface.
If two planes or lines are not parallel, two different symmetry results are
delivered. In this case, you can choose the desired result.
If you wish to know which feature 1 can be combined with which feature
2 to form a symmetry and the result of such a combination, please refer
to the following topics:
1 [ 4137]
Interpretation of results
4-132
CALYPSO
Examples:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-133
Line 1
Line 2
Symmetry axis 1
Symmetry axis 2
Result 1: Coordinates of the symmetry axis on which the symmetry
point from the two start points of the two lines is located.
Result 2: Coordinates of the perpendicular symmetry axis.
Result
Description
2D line
2D line
3D line
3D line
Plane
Plane
Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane
Cylinder
3D line
Cone
3D line
3D line
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
4-134
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
3D line
Symmetry line
Cylinder
3D line
Cone
3D line
3D line
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Result
Description
2D line
Plane
Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane
Plane
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-135
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
3D line
Point
Plane
Point
Circle
Point
Ellipse
Point
Cylinder
Point
Cone
Point
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the sphere center point
Point
Point
3D point
Point
Torus
Point
Result
Description
2D line
Point
3D line
Point
Plane
Point
Circle
Point
Ellipse
Point
Cylinder
Point
Cone
Point
4-136
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Sphere
Point
Point
Point
3D point
Point
Torus
Point
Result
Description
3D line
Cylinder
3D line
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the cone axis
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Result
Description
3D line
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-137
Feature 2
Result
Description
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis
Stepped Cylinder
3D line
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Result
Description
3D line
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the cone axis and the cylinder axis
Cone
3D line
3D line
Symmetry line between the cone axis and the torus axis
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Result
Description
2D line
Point
3D line
Point
4-138
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Plane
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the circle
center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the elliptical center
Cylinder
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the point
3D point
Point
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the torus
center point
Result
Description
2D line
Point
3D line
Point
Plane
Point
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the point and the sphere center point
Point
Point
3D point
Point
Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone
Torus
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-139
Result
Description
2D line
Point
3D line
Point
Plane
Point
Circle
Point
Ellipse
Point
Cylinder
Point
Cone
Point
Sphere
Point
Point
Point
3D point
Point
Torus
Point
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the line
3D line
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the line
Plane
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the circle
center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the elliptical center
4-140
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Cylinder
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the sphere
center point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the point
3D point
Point
Torus
Point
Point (generally a space point) is the feature you can use as feature 1
and feature 2. Each space axis of the points determines a plane. The
planes must intersect each other. The edge point lies on the intersection
line of the planes.
Feature 3
Use a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point, this also defines
a plane via the normal. The edge point is computed as the intersection of
this plane with the intersection of plane 1 and plane 2.
Interpretation of results
element 1
contour point
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered between Feature 1 and Feature 2 (Feature 1 and Feature 2 usually differ at
least slightly in height).
Projection construction
Menu: Construct Projection
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-141
Result output depends on the feature that results from the projection.
Examples:
Tangent construction
Menu: Construct Tangent
The Tangent construction offers two options:
You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangents connecting the two features. Circle, Circle on Cone, Point and
3D Point are suitable features.
You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangential circles with predefined diameter. Two 2D lines or two features
of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone type are suitable
characteristics.
Enter the two features in the definition template and select the desired
result.
4-142
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Point
Circle
3D point
One result
Two results
One result
Two results
One result
The results are shown in the Result Selection group of the definition
template. Select here the result you want to proceed with.
Automatic corrections
If the features do not lie exactly in one plane, CALYPSO computes the
corresponding tangents in a projection plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-143
R1
Automatic correction
R2
Use the button in the definition template to select the plane sector in
which the tangential circle should lie.
Interpretation of results
4-144
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.
Interpretation of results
Nominal
You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the minimum computed.
Interpretation of results
CALYPSO computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
smallest diameter.
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the maximum computed.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-145
Interpretation of results
CALYPSO computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
largest diameter.
Average-Feature construction
Menu: Construct Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you calculate a new feature from
certain averages of several features.
Select existing features
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features for
whose measured values you want to compute the average.
Selection list
In the selection list, define the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for which
you want the average computed. Values for characteristics that are not
indicated here will be adopted from the first feature in the list.
Position Definition: The position of the cone axis which corresponds to a defined diameter.
Feature
Diameter Definition
If you have selected the Diameter Definition option, you can either
enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another feature.
CALYPSO requires the following specifications:
4-146
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection point
of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone center).
The coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will be computed. The diameter will be output on the point of the cone axis for
which the coordinate on this axis is equal to L.
Position Definition
Or at: Feature that (if necessary, via the intersection point with the
cone axis) defines the height of the required diameter. Only the Point,
2D Line and Plane features are suitable.
If you have selected the Position Definition option, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required position indirectly using another feature. CALYPSO requires the following entries:
Or at: Feature at the height of which the position should be determined (the height above the cone origin). Only the Circle, Circle on
Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone, Torus and Ellipse features are suitable.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-147
Interpretation of results
The only feature you can select is a plane. The plane is the reference plane.
Offset
Interpretation of results
CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the plane with offset as the result.
Please note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does not really
exist and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.
The graphic element allows you to define a plot for the circle in contour
best fit. (Plot for circle in contour construction [ 858]).
4-148
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Gothic shape
Sphere
Sphere
Angle
Angle
Gap
Contact points
NOTICE
You cannot change the filter, outlier and evaluation settings in the selection window for the curve. You can change filters and outliers only in
the feature itself.
Diameter
You enter the diameter of the circle for the best fit process under Diameter. You can also calculate the diameter with a formula.
The Offset in Touch Point allows you to simulate the pressing of the
circle against the curve. The center point of the circle and the contact
points change. The contact between circle and contour is no longer lim-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-149
ited to one point; now, they contact along an arc. CALYPSO then computes the contact point from the center of gravity of this arc.
Circle
Circle with
offset
Contour
Contact point
Contact curve
NOTICE
The offset is added to the radius of the fitted circle and not to the diameter.
Wavelength for filter
For a better fit, enter a wave separation length (WTL) for filtering the
profile (no filtering if you enter 0). Filtering can avoid excessive deviations between the determined and actual contact points.
Consideration of the wave separation length differs from the filtering of
measured values otherwise used. It is a special method for the circle in
contour best fit.
You can also specify a Minimum contact angle. This can exclude
ambiguities during the best fit process (in case of real, distorted data records). Contact points that are no further apart than by this angle are
regarded as a single contact point.
If one of the following error messages appears at the bottom of the window, you can attempt to achieve an unambiguous result by increasing
the minimum contact angle.
There are several possible positions for the circle with the
contact angle greater than the minimum angle
NOTICE
The minimum contact angle is not taken into consideration if the curve
contains points from measurements performed with different stylus radii.
Result Selection
4-150
You can choose from different result types and receive a circle or a space
point depending on your selection:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result
Icon
For the Bend Circle result, a section of the curve is interpolated via
polynomials of the fourth degree. Therefore, CALYPSO requires for the
calculation the points located on the left and right of the contact point.
You also predefine the determination of these points:
R2
R1
Even if the best fit has been completed successfully, it is not possible to
calculate the bend circle in the following cases:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-151
Each time a value is changed, CALYPSO performs the best fit and calculates the results.
If the initial data is insufficient for the best fit or is conflicting, an error
message will appear at the bottom edge of the window.
Further information about the circle in contour best fit and about the error
messages is available under Details on circle in contour best
fit [ 4152].
Prior to the best fit process, CALYPSO uses the points of the specified
curve to calculate a compensating plane and then projects the curve onto
this plane.
The greater the form deviation, the less precise the result of the best fit
will be. So that you can estimate the accuracy of the best fit, the following
results from the calculation of the compensating plane are displayed on
the right side of the window:
Number of points
These results are also output in the default printout and compact printout.
Characteristics from the
definition template
Added characteristic
4-152
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Added characteristic
You can subsequently edit the definition templates of these characteristics. However, the results will make sense only in combination with the
Circle in contour best fit.
Alignment line
Contact angle 2
Alignment line
Contact point 2
Contact point 1
Contact angle 1
Two types of error can occur with the circle in contour best fit:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-153
Primary errors are errors that prevent results from being calculated.
Examples of these errors include contours with fewer than three
points or an incompletely defined nominal geometry.
If CALYPSO is able to calculate the actual geometry but not the nominal
geometry, 0 will be entered for Vector, Diameter/Radius, Normal Vector, Gap and Start Angle and 360 will be entered for the
angle range for a circle.
Actual to Nominal
In the case of constructions, the nominal values calculated from the nominal values of the linked features may excessively differ from the actual
values.
In this case, you can enter nominal values instead of actual values. The
value is entered as a formula with a constant value; the input field is
highlighted in yellow.
By clicking the Actual -> Nominal button, you enter the corresponding
actual value as a formula for each nominal value (x, y, z, w1, w2...). The
actual value is rounded beforehand using the set rounding factor.
Result
4-154
You select any combination of 2D lines and circles (or circles on cones)
as nominal features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Start point
line
End point
line
End point
circle
Nominal feature 1
Nominal
feature 2
Start point
circle
Features
It must be possible to measure the feature according to the Unknown
Contour method.
If you have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you must use
a 2D curve.
If you do not have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you
can also use a 2D line or a circle.
NOTICE
If you use the 2D line or the circle as a nominal feature, you must neither
filter this contour nor eliminate its outliers. Otherwise, certain points in
the kink area may be eliminated and the result might be incorrect.
Outliers
Mean-value line
Measured contour
Nominal features
Select 2D lines or circles (or circle on cone) as a first and second nominal
feature. Make sure that the nominal features are defined exactly:
For a circle, make sure that the start angle and the angle range as well
as the inside/outside are defined in addition to the center point, alignment and radius.
The sequence of the start and end points of the nominal features must
correspond to the recorded measuring points.
NOTICE
Only the definitions in the definition template of the feature are important; the strategy definitions (paths, technologies) are not evaluated by
CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-155
Result calculation
The result of the Kink Point construction is a 3D point at the transition
from one feature to the other.
Direct input
You can also enter this point directly. The entered coordinates of the
nominal point are interpreted as formulas with the corresponding numerical value.
No result
If feature and both nominal features are defined, but the nominal kink
point cannot be calculated, a zero vector is output as nominal value.
100:1
4-156
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this case, however, the searched step point is not probed. CALYPSO
can calculate this point from the probing data, the reference and the
entered step angle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-157
Step Point
Feature
Datum
Remark
in a bore
2D Line
Cylinder
3D Line 2D Line
Plane
2D Line
on a plane
2D Line
NOTICE
Filtering and outlier elimination are disabled for the feature.
Recalled line as reference
You can also use a line as reference which has been generated via point
recall from the measured points of the lines used as feature.
NOTICE
Make sure that only those points are recalled that lie on the same level.
Otherwise, an inclined computed feature is calculated and the result is
thus falsified.
Step Angle
For the calculation of the step point, you also define the step angle, which
is, for example, the angle at the cutting edge of the reamer. CALYPSO
will then calculate based on the upper step point the lower step point
using a trigonometric function.
The unit of measure of the step angle is predefined in the system settings.
Entries from 10 to 90 are allowed; the entry 90, i.e. a vertical edge, is
preset.
You can also enter a formula in the input field. The result of the formula
is always interpreted in radian measure.
4-158
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result calculation
The result of the Step Point construction is a 3D point. You can select
between two results: the upper and the lower step point. The lower step
point is output by default.
Measurement strategy
The following prerequisites are important for the precise calculation of
the step point:
Sufficient start-up time at the beginning and run-out time at the end
of the path
Scanning direction from the higher to the lower step (side of the
bore towards the reaming side).
When scanning in the opposite direction, the stylus could bounce off
the step and lead to an inaccurate measurement.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-159
Which measurement
strategy is used?
Depending on the available strategies in the measurement plan, CALYPSO behaves differently at the CNC start.
4-160
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The context menu of the index cards offers the following options:
Delete Strategy Name: Deletes the current strategy for the entire
measurement plan.
Edit Strategy Name: Opens the window for editing the strategy
name.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-161
New Strategy with Pre- Adds a new index card with the entered name and the strategy defined in the Settings - Strategy for this feature.
settings
Copy Existing Strategy
3 Then, define the strategy lists of the new strategy for all features in
question.
If not, the index card with the strategy remains empty.
Performing a strategy
During measurement, the tasks in the current strategy list are executed
one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is assigned will be
skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
If the current strategy has not yet been defined for a feature, CALYPSO
uses the defined evasion strategy.
Selecting Utilities and inserting them in the strategy list (Stop, Position
CMM without probing, Stylus System Change, Clearance Data, etc.)
4-162
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Edit strategy
Strategy tab
Strategy macro
Strategy list
You will find more information on this window under Strategy in the
CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-163
Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. First
make sure that the CMM can move freely.
Cut, Copy and Paste are standard Windows functions.
Edit: Opens a window with the input parameters (also with a double click).
Sort Nominal Directions: Corrects all normal vectors matching
the normal direction of the first point.
Single Points => Point Set: Converts the selected single points
into a point set.
Point Set => Single Points: Converts the selected point set into
single points.
Reverse Order: Reverses the order of the marked features in the
strategy list.
Condition: Opens a window in which you can assign a condition
to the current task. The task is not executed unless the condition is
fulfilled.
List: (Only for curves) Opens the point list containing the measured
values (coordinates, normal vector, deviation) of the segment.
Invert: (Only for curves) Reverses the start and end point of the
segment and thus the measuring direction.
Evaluation range
Basics about the evaluation range
If during scanning you notice that certain ranges are not suitable for the
desired evaluation, you can exclude these ranges from the evaluation: To
do so, you define an evaluation range for the corresponding strategy.
The reasons why the ranges are not suitable may be rounded edges or
deviating geometries.
4-164
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The measured points of the evaluation range are exclusively used for the
calculation of the computed feature. However, the excluded points are
included in the plot.
Paths with evaluation
range
You can set an evaluation range for the following path generation methods:
Features
Circle Path
Torus
Torus
Circle on Plane
Plane
Linear paths
Cylinder
2D Line
NOTICE
The definition of an evaluation range does not make any sense if the
angle range of the path exceeds 360.
by specifying the start and end length or start and end angle referenced to the total length or the total angle of the contour.
All measuring points are evaluated of which the appropriate length
or angle lies within the specified range.
When making entries, the specifications for the dialog elements of the
other definition method are calculated and displayed automatically.
Specification with formula
You can enter a formula in each input field for the evaluation range.
However, the input fields of the other definition method are disabled. If,
for example, you enter a formula for the start length, you can no longer
enter the coordinates of the start point.
NOTICE
When entering the formula, you must also enter the PCM reference system for the start and end coordinates. This reference system applies to
all positions in the current feature that are specified in formulas.
CALYPSO
4-165
You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for lines
and form lines using length units. The feature reference point of the geometry is used as the origin (zero point) of the lengths. By way of confirmation, the total length is indicated.
The start and end points can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified points is always used as the evaluation range.
CALYPSO checks the plausibility of the entered points. If both the start
and end point of the evaluation range are out of the defined path, a
warning message appears: Start and end point of evaluation range are
outside the strategy. \Do you still want to continue?
4-166
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Under certain circumstances, the correct points are selected: If, for example, you used formulas of which the variables have not yet been specified. In this case, you can confirm the question and accept the values.
Angle units
You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for circle
paths, large (radial) circle paths and circles on a plane using angles. These
refer to the surface area of the geometry. In the case of the Sphere feature
with inclined strategy axis, the surface area and the axis are also inclined.
The start and end angles can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified angles is always used as the evaluation range.
You can enter angles between 0 and 360. All other entries are converted to modulo 360.
The intersection of the u axis of the element system of the geometry with
the plane of the geometry represents the origin for the angle units. By
way of confirmation, the total angle of the strategy is indicated.
An exception to this procedure is the small (axial) circle path (scanned on
the small radius) at the torus. With this strategy, the angle specifications
are not applied to the surface area but to the intersecting surface at the
point of the first axial section. If the small (axial) circle path contains several sections, the start and end points around the axis of the torus are
turned in relation to the corresponding sections.
When closing the input page with OK , the program checks whether the
start and the end point of the evaluation range are in the center of the
circle. In this case, it is not possible to determine any angle range for the
evaluation range.
Coordinate system (the coordinates are shown in the coordinate system of the geometry)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-167
NOTICE
The coordinate system is switched over at the same time for all path generations of the feature.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Base Alignment or Workpiece Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are not offset with the feature
if the nominal position of the geometry is changed.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Feature Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are offset if the nominal position of the geometry is
changed. This behavior is the same as the strategies of single points, intermediate points, etc.
When closing the definition template for the feature, the program automatically switches back to Feature System. During the CNC run, the
points of the evaluation range are calculated back to the base alignment
and compared with the determined points (these are stored in the base
alignment).
In the case of features with pattern, the points of the evaluation range
are offset and/or turned with the geometry. Therefore it is not necessary
to define a separate evaluation range for each index of the pattern.
Use the formula and the LOOPx loop index if you require a separate evaluation range for the individual pattern features.
Prior to evaluating a geometry and its determined points, all points which
are outside the evaluation range are removed during the calculation.
In contrast to other evaluation settings (procedure, filter, outliers, restrictions), a feature is always calculated with its defined evaluation range
whether for a characteristic or for a getActual formula.
The number of points included in the printout represents the number of
points which lie within the evaluation range (minus outliers).
4-168
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying a feature
with the evaluation
range manually
The evaluation is inactive if you measure the feature manually (e.g. in the
case of manual base or start alignment).
If you access the determined points via the recall feature points function,
the points which are outside the evaluation range are also recalled. The
recalled points retain their mark.
The evaluation range can also be restricted with regard to features which
are determined by recalling points. This is the only way of evaluating a
feature which was once measured with various evaluation ranges.
When the feature is open, you can display the determined points in the
CAD window if you select Show Actual Points in the context menu
of the CAD window. Each actual point is shown as a red arrow.
Only the points that are outside the evaluation range are shown in pink
color.
The positions of the start and end points of the evaluation range can be
shown in the CAD window when the feature is open. To do so, you must
tick the Display position of evaluation range check box on the
Strategy index card in the CAD settings (menu: CAD View Settings...). If a feature contains one (or more) paths with evaluation ranges, the positions of the start and end points are drawn as pink squares.
The direction of the square depends on the nominal geometry. The start
and end points are projected perpendicular to the nominal geometry. The
tangent direction at this projection point forms the normal of the square.
If the start and end points are located in the center or on the axis of the
circle, the plane normal of the nominal circle forms the normal of the
square.
The appropriate positions of the evaluation range and the path in the
CAD window are marked.
Representation on the
plot
Point list
Basics about the point list
The point list contains the coordinates for all the points together with the
normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You can edit
these coordinates and, for example, define optimum probing points.
Additionally, the styli to be used are included in the list of points (under
Stylus).
The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window with
a cylinder measured at 8 points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-169
Note: Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each
point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Click the point list icon.
3 To change a coordinate, overwrite the value.
4 Click OK.
4-170
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this example, self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates cancelation of the lock in the X axis in order to avoid faulty probing.
Then the stylus can slowly approach with less movement the bottom
of the V-groove in the X axis.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-171
Special features
Control
Rotary table
Tangential probing
Path form
For self-centering measurement, the TL3 type shows the most suitable
properties whereas the TL2 type shows the most unfavorable properties. It might not be possible to use the XDT type for self-centering
measurement on certain CMMs, e.g. large machines.
The recommended stylus lengths for the TL1, TL3 and XDT types range
between 30 mm and 80 mm. For the TL2 type, 150 mm should not
be exceeded.
Workpiece-specific influences such as the centering angle and material-related influences such as roughness require the stylus to be qualified. This is usually done by means of repeat measurements.
4-172
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Call
To call the Probe Self Centering window, you have three options:
1 Tick the Probe Self Centering check box and set the parameters.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-173
Measuring point
Contact points
Nominal point
used
Desired
nominal point
After the stylus radius correction, a minimal difference remains uncalculated. Depending on the characteristic used, this difference has no permanent effect because its results cancel each other out or the difference
is of a negligible amount.
Circle of a surface area
4-174
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Contact point
Measuring point
Desired
nominal point
Pitch
CALYPSO
4-175
and the same stylus because the probing direction is different for each
feature.
Example: 8 bores
For a cylindrical or circular feature, CALYPSO uses the axis of the feature.
CALYPSO uses the stylus with the smallest angle between stylus shaft and
axis or normal to perform the measurement. In order to make the result
unambiguous, you have to specify how this angle is to be measured i.e.
whether the axis or normal is to be oriented nearly in the direction of the
shaft or in the opposite direction of the shaft.
Angle at
shaft against normal
Angle at
shaft along normal
NOTICE
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point to
the tip of the stylus.
CALYPSO minimizes either the angle between the stylus shaft and the
axis or normal, or the angle in the opposite direction of the axis or normal.
The direction you have to choose depends on the geometry of your workpiece.
4-176
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Maximum angle
To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
If there is no stylus in the permitted angle range, CALYPSO is unable to
probe. The CNC run is halted, and you receive a corresponding message.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-177
or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a CMM
with trigger probe (pseudo scanning).
Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See Defining
features [ 42].
4-178
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Strategy list
To change the setting, click the displayed icon. (You have chosen path
generation if the points are displayed connected.)
3 Click the button for the path generation method you want.
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the same
time, CALYPSO immediately generates the path from the single points if
you choose this in step 3.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-179
If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this section.
CALYPSO calculates the parameters according to the narrowest tolerance
which you entered for testing the feature and the point density for the
characteristics group (see Basics about characteristics [ 52]).
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width (step distance).
Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
A description of the parameters for each path generation method can be
found in:
4-180
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Various features
Icon
Line
Line Measurement
Plane, Cylinder,
Cone, Sphere
Plane/Offset
Plane
Grid measuring
The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch.
Polyline Measurement
A polyline is measured on the plane.
Circle path on plane
A circle path is measured on the plane.
Multi Polyline
Several polylines at a distance from the edge.
Circle, Cylinder,
Cone
Circle, Sphere,
Slot, Curve, 3D
Curve
Circle
CALYPSO
4-181
Feature
Icon
Sphere
Cone
Rectangle
Rectangular Path
Measures an inside or outside rectangle by evading the corners.
Torus
4-182
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Curve
Icon
If you define three points, they represent start point, end point
and direction of curvature (direction around circumference) of the
curve segment, in that order.
If you define more than three points, they represent a full circle;
the first point defines the start point and the direction around
circumference is clockwise (from the top or outside).
Unknown Cut
3D Curve
3D Curve
Measures 3 paths beside one another to compute the transverse curvature of the curve.
3D Grid
Measures several paths positioned next to each other in a meandering
style.
Stroke curve
Measures a radial or axial lift curve on the cylinder section.
Cam Groove
Measures a cam groove on the cylinder section.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-183
6 Enter the values for the path generation method. For more details,
please refer to Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
7 Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for this
feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from Features you can
measure with path generation [ 4180].
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be executed once a CNC run is initiated.
Circle
Ellipse
Slot
Rectangle
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Curve
For the curve, the Unknown Contour method is activated in the strategy window:
For all other given features, you can insert a path in the strategy list using
the Unknown Contour icon.
4-184
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Enter the start point and end point of the travel path in the strategy window for the unknown contour.
CALYPSO executes the measurement using the shortest path while,
of course, observing the feature and keeping in contact with the workpiece.
Immersion depth
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-185
You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
model. When you use this method, the system returns a series of either
start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account: Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generate different
paths. (At this time, the function is implemented only for the circle and
circle path.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the path data, CALYPSO
does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal
of latitude in defining paths.
If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with a single
stylus (e.g. in the case of a full circle on a camshaft), split the circle path
into circle sections to scan each section with an appropriate stylus.
The individual arcs can be combined in a circle path by means of the
Group Circle Paths function.
After the measurement, the circle path is assembled from the selected
circle sections and evaluated.
4-186
The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the fields. You can use the variables
that are defined in the measurement plan to make formulas and enter
PCM commands if you use the PCM Technology option.
The following entries can be parameterized.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Parameterizing single
points and intermediate
positions
Scanning speed
Step width
Number of points
Stylus
Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the reference system. To do so,
click PCM-Ref in the Point List window.
The term measuring height and the resulting measuring range are explained by the following illustration:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-187
Origin of feature's
local
Coordinate System
min. measuring
height
Measuring range
max. measuring
height
Evaluation range
If certain start and end points are not suitable for the evaluation, you can
define an evaluation range.
Cylinder
Cone
Circle
Circle on Cone
To scan a circle path using several styli, you must define which circle path
is to be scanned with which stylus. Bear in mind that no circle path may
contain single points.
To group circle paths, select these in the strategy window and click the
Group Circle Paths icon.
The circle paths are assigned to a group. You can identify this by the
annotation to the name (group n) in the strategy list. The group is
treated and evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned with a stylus.
If one of the selected circle paths is already included in a group, this will
be removed from the group and added to the new group. Under certain
circumstances, the original group might thus be deleted.
4-188
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Start, end and direction of rotation of the assembled circle path result
according to the following rules:
The assembled circle path begins after the largest gap between two
adjacent circle sections.
(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Removing a group
To remove a group, select one of the appropriate circle paths and choose
Select Group in the context menu.
Click the Group Circle Paths icon. The group is removed.
To remove individual circle paths from a group, highlight the desired circle
paths and select Remove From Group in the context menu.
Measuring thread
Conditions:
To measure cylindrical tapped holes, you must define a feature of
the Circle type for the tapped hole. The circle macro is used for the
thread measurement.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template for the circle.
2 Click the icon for the Circle Macro path generation method.
3 Tick the Thread check box and enter the desired number of probings,
pattern and orientation of the thread.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-189
4 Press OK to confirm.
You are prompted whether the stylus is in the center of the circle.
5 Position the stylus with the shaft parallel to the axis of the circle in the
center of the tapped hole and confirm with Yes.
Starting at the current height, CALYPSO performs 4 probings at a distance of 90 each by considering the pattern and orientation of the
thread. The center of the circle is computed from the 4 points gained.
Then CALYPSO carries out the actual thread measurements. They are
entered as individual points in the strategy list.
The further procedure is the same as for the circle measurement.
Note: You can also use the circle macro for the thread measurement
several times in succession, e.g. at different heights of the thread.
4-190
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Coordinates list
Marking frame
Creating a polyline
1 Probe the points on the plane from which you want to create the
polyline. You can do this with the CMM or the CAD window (you will
find more information in the Online Help under Defining probing
points in the CAD window [ 211]).
Each entered measuring point is displayed in the coordinates list (from
bottom to top). CALYPSO connects these points with lines by default.
You can select the coordinate system for the display of the points. The
points are saved in the local feature alignment.
2 You always need the start point, direction point and end point if you
want to create an arc or full circle. The three points have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the arrow buttons next to the
Number field to do so.
3 Click the arc or full circle icon.
The green border now encloses the three points from which the arc
or full circle was calculated. You see the new connection in the CAD
window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at any
time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-191
Make sure that you have entered a value for the rounding-off of corners
in the default settings. Check this value by clicking Basic Settings and
then the SCAN Limits tab.
4-192
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To scan a circle path using the rotary table, tick the Scan circle path
with rotary table check box.
Prerequisite:
The space axis of the plane points in the direction of the rotary table
axis.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-193
Travel path
4-194
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Any definitions already saved in the strategy defaults for the rectangular
path will be predefined here.
Entries
Enter here the Measuring Height and the distances of the probing
paths to the corners.
With Independent Lines, you can define different edge distances for
each side and each corner.
By means of Move to Safety Position, you initiate the stylus to move
to the safety position after each individual path. If the check box is unticked, the stylus moves around the corners on the measuring height level.
Strategy defaults
The strategy defaults for the rectangular path allow you to predefine the
input fields included in the Rectangular Path strategy.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-195
As a special feature you can enter here the edge distances as absolute
values, as a multitude of the stylus radius or as a percentage. In the Rectangular Path technology window, the specifications are converted into
absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the
nominal values of the rectangle.
4-196
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Defining characteristics
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-1
For defined features, you can set the characteristics for measuring the
size (dimensions), form, position, and so on. In this way, you ascertain
whether the features are within the limits you specified.
The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To evaluate these characteristics, different point densities are required for each
group, depending on which best-fit method is used (see Best-fit methods [ 53]). See the Online Help under Changing the measurement
parameters of the CMM [ 1014] to check the settings.
Group
Point density
Comment
Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of measuring points.
Recommendation: Use more points than required to get
a statement about the standard deviation (Sigma).
For a function-oriented evaluation (pairing-dimension
evaluation), a higher number of points is required.
These characteristics require a higher point density, because the position deviation overlaps the form deviation
of the features.
Form Characteristics
High
5-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Best-fit methods
Overview of best-fit methods
This topic shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of the
mathematical best-fit methods. This means that for each measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a measuring strategy you
can now select the best-fit method which is best suited to your individual
requirements.
CALYPSO uses the following best-fit methods:
L1 feature
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-3
The following diagram shows the actual shape of a scanned circle with
the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the different bestfit methods.
outlier
Gauss element
Minimum element (Chebyshov)
Circumscribed element
Inscribed element
Actual outline
5-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
5-5
element inside which all probing points of the element are situated (circumscribed feature).
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, because
the tangential element can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme
points.
Gauss (LSQ
feature)
Minimum
L1 feature
2D Line
3D Line
Plane
Circle
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Symmetry Plane
Ellipse
Rectangle
Torus
Slot
Point
5-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Circumscribed/inscribed
Tangential
element
X
X
Defining characteristics
Defining characteristics
Options for defining characteristics
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is necessary to define the characteristics.
Characteristics, features and the links between them are assigned to a
measurement plan.
CALYPSO
You add a characteristic [ 59] via the menu bar or from the
toolbox to the list of characteristics and specify it in the definition
template.
In the definition template, you assign the features to the characteristic
(Connecting characteristics to features [ 518]).
Options
You load a CAD file (SAT, ProE or UniGraphics) and extract form and
location data from it. The features are added to the measurement plan
together with the characteristics. For more details, please refer to
Extracting characteristics from CAD files [ 59].
Import of CAD files from ProE and UG (by means of the Characteristic
IN option)
You import features together with the characteristics from the ProE
and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given
format (STEP file in the AP 203 or AP 214 format and ASCII data in
the Q-DAS format, specification of WEPROM) (see the operating instructions for Characteristic IN (option)).
You can find more detailed information regarding the different characteristics in Overview of characteristics [ 563].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-7
Defining characteristics
The context menu of the list of characteristics offers the following options:
Menu command
Function
Rename
Check use of feature se- Displays the characteristics and utilities in which the characteristic is
used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this characteristic in the References winFeatures
dow.
Characteristic attributes
Edit functions
Loop
Condition
Parameter
Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.
Open
Delete
Delete Characteristic
and Feature actuals
Delete Characteristic
actuals
Masked
Masks the characteristic and adds a small mask to the icon. Masked
characteristics are not measured or calculated during the CNC run.
Execute Now!
5-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Color
Meaning
Light gray The characteristic has not yet been defined fully.
With
The characteristic has been masked in the Measurement Plan Edimask icon tor Characteristics. It is not checked during the CNC run and it is not
evaluated in printouts.
Dark gray
Green
Yellow
Red
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-9
Defining characteristics
You can also use the desk structure contained in the CAD data and
edit it in CALYPSO (Dimension, form and position from a CAD file
with desks [ 512]).
Once the transfer in the measurement plan has been completed, the
characteristics can be edited, e.g. a feature can be assigned to an
empty characteristic or a characteristic can be replaced by another
characteristic (Editing the dimension, form and position [ 515]).
If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
The settings on the Filter / Layer tab serve to visualize the features
for form and location. You can switch between both views of the tab
by means of the Layer or Filter button. The Filter view is enabled
by default.
5-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
2 Restrict the characteristics to those characteristic types that interest you, e.g. to all characteristics of the Dimension and Location type.
Characteristics that have not yet been extracted are identified by
white banners in the CAD window.
If the Display option under Accepted Characteristics on the
Creation tab is activated, characteristics that have already been
extracted are identified by blue banners.
3 To get more information on the characteristics in the CAD window:
Click the banner of a characteristic. The characteristic and all associated reference features are highlighted in color in the CAD model.
Click the banner of a reference feature. The reference feature is
highlighted in color.
4 If necessary, change the scope of the displayed information (Display group) and the representation of the banners in the CAD window (Presentation and Scale Factor groups) on the View tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-11
Defining characteristics
5 If required, you can move the banners in the CAD window with the
mouse.
If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
The settings on the Filter / Layer index card serve to visualize the
features for form and location. You can switch between both views
of the tab by means of the Layer or Filter button.
5-12
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
If the CATIA file does not contain any structure, CALYPSO creates a
structure using the TOLERANCES, DATUMS and TEXT desks.
3 Use the commands of the context menu in the structure tree:
Select Delete to delete an entire desk.
Select Edit to rename a desk.
Select Clipping Plane to display a section plane contained in the
CAD data.
Select Remove From Group to remove the marked feature from
the desk.
4 To create a new desk, highlight the desired features in the CAD window and click New layer from screen.
The features marked by a flag in the CAD window are summarized in
a new desk and the current view of the CAD window is saved at the
same time.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-13
Defining characteristics
The Dimension, Form & Position from CAD dialog box makes it
possible to extract characteristics from a CAD file in different ways:
5-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO
proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position
from CAD dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-15
Defining characteristics
5-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-17
Defining characteristics
The definition template contains fields for tolerance and actual value. The
buttons for the required references of this characteristic will still be shown
as empty.
Playing a video
5-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Direct input
Enter the name of an existing feature in the input field.
After the entry, two icons are displayed on the right-hand side. The name
is accepted by clicking the checkmark. The name is not accepted by clicking the cross, pressing Esc or by changing to another dialog box.
If the entered name does not exist, the first name in the list of features
that contains the entered character string is shown.
Input field
List of features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-19
Defining characteristics
You enter the formula for the feature or reference feature and transfer it
to the input field by selecting OK. The input field will be highlighted in
yellow.
NOTICE
The result of the formula input must be a text. CALYPSO transfers only
the entries to the input field which can be selected in the list of features.
CALYPSO checks whether the defined feature exists and whether is may
be used as a feature or reference feature. This means that it is also not
possible to specify a plane as feature for a roundness by means of a formula.
If a feature does not exist or may not be used, the evaluation of the tolerance does not produce any result. This applies to both the parameterized features and the parameterized reference features.
5-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
the other, Circle1 has already been entered for the first feature of each
characteristic.
Checking use
You can check for which characteristics a feature is used. Use the Check
use of selected Features command which you can find in the context
menu in the list of features.
You can assign indexes to characteristics. Thus, you define with one definition template several characteristics of the same type. For details, please
refer to Characteristics with indexes [ 528].
Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
4 Set the desired filter, outlier elimination and best-fit method.
You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section
entitled Setting and activating a filter [ 547].
You will find more information on outlier elimination in the section
entitled Eliminating outliers [ 549].
5 Click OK.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
CALYPSO
5-21
Defining characteristics
Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
5 Click Edit.
This opens the definition template of the assigned feature.
6 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
7 Press OK to confirm.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
5-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-23
Defining characteristics
You must assign one or two features in its definition template. The characteristic is determined on these features and the compliance with the
tolerance is checked.
Datums
Selection of datums
Datums are selected on the basis of the following criteria:
two rotational degrees of freedom for the calculation of the geometrical feature
one or two translational degrees of freedom
The secondary datum constrains usually the remaining rotational degree of freedom.
The secondary datum must be set by the following features: a plane,
a 2D line or a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
A single additional feature provides the remaining one or two translational degrees of freedom.
NOTICE
The designations primary, secondary and tertiary datum do not refer to
the order in which they were entered in the definition template as primary, secondary and tertiary datum. For example, you can also enter the
tertiary datum as primary datum.
5-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Both methods produce a datum reference frame with the same orientation. However, the systems have different origins.
CALYPSO standard
0,1 A B
0,1 B A
ISO 5459
The ISO 5459 requires that the origin of the datum reference frame is
defined as intersection point of perpendicular planes. Consequently, the
secondary datum cannot be calculated as a computed feature from the
defined feature. It is created as the outer tangential element with restriction of constraints whereas the direction of the coordinate plane is preset
by the required perpendicularity relative to the first coordinate plane.
Proceed in the same way for the tertiary datum.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-25
Defining characteristics
0,1 A B
0,1 B A
90
5-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Shape Of Zone
Geometrical feature
Primary Datum
Standard
Plane
Plane
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
2D Line
2D Line
Secondary Datum
[Nothing]
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
3D Line
Plane
Step Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Cone
Step Cylinder
2D Line
[Nothing]
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
[Nothing]
Cone
Cartesian
3D Line
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-27
Defining characteristics
Shape Of Zone
Geometrical feature
Primary Datum
Standard
Plane
3D Line
Symmetry Plane
Cylinder
2D Line
Step Cylinder
Secondary Datum
[Nothing]
Cone
Plane
Plane
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
2D Line
2D Line
3D Line
Cylinder
3D Line
3D Line
Step Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cone
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
[Nothing]
Cone
Cone
Plane
Symmetry Plane
[Nothing]
2D Line
Cartesian
3D Line
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]
5-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Feature
Roundness1(1)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(2)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(3)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(4)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(5)
Circle1(2)
Roundness1(6)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(7)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(8)
Circle1(4)
You define for the Circle1 feature an index exchange with three
groups:
Start index
End index
Step width
-2
-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-29
Defining characteristics
NOTICE
The example shows that the relation between the characteristic and the
feature may not be clear after the index exchange: The Circle1(4) feature
is not only measured in the Roundness1(1) characteristic but also in the
Roundness1(4) characteristic.
Only the first use found is recorded in the compact printout.
5-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Job
Calculation of the following distances:
Solution
Index exchange between the current loop index of the characteristic and
the Circle2(*) feature.
1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 In the context menu of the Circle2(*) feature, select Index exchange....
3 Enter the parameters in the Loop window: Start = 2, End = 8, Step =
1.
The distance is calculated as shown above.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-31
Defining characteristics
Note: The tolerances determine the calculation of the scanning speed for
the measuring strategy. See Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Enter the desired nominal values in the Nominal input field (or
Nominal Position input field).
3 Enter the tolerance values:
Direct input
Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance input fields
Selection list for the tolerance group
Enter the appropriate values in the Upper Tolerance and Lower
Tolerance fields. The Last input list entry allows you to enter the
most recently selected tolerance.
None check box
This box allows you to define the maximum and minimum tolerances.
4 Click OK.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described under Definition template (Characteristic) 1 in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green, yellow or red bar, depending on whether it is inside or
outside of the warning limits and tolerance.
If a completely defined feature has not been measured yet, the icon is
displayed with a dark gray bar.
5-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Tolerance type
Tolerances
General Tolerances
General tolerances
group GTA
General tolerances
group GTB
Linear measures
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-33
Defining characteristics
Tolerance type
Tolerances
Pressure die Linear DIN 1687 GD L / T h.melt GTA 15 to GTA 13/5
measures / thickm. / not m.
ness measures for
high-melting alloys
DIN 16901 Plastic tolerances General Tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B to 130 A / 130
B
Tolerances for values with directly
entered tolerances
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables (Defining custom tolerance tables [ 537]).
There are two modes for the calculation of admissible tolerance extension:
Mode
Tolerance extension
As mechanical
gauge
Restriction to di- Difference between actual dimension and minimum dimension restricted to the complete dimenmension tolersion tolerance
ance
As mechanical gauge is preset by default.
5-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Settings
for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, MMC/LMC tab)
Selection list
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the entry:
The Nominals button appears beside the selection list.
MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
LMC to apply the least-material condition.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the feature,
click Nominals.
CALYPSO opens the definition template of the characteristic:
Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Define reference features if necessary.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-35
Defining characteristics
The tolerance addition (for MMC) of a cylinder is calculated from the following formulas:
As mechanical gauge
Inside feature
Outside feature
Inside feature
Outside feature
Stepped cylinder
dNom
Nominal diameter
dAct
tupper
tlower
In general, there are several diameters for the stepped cylinder. For the
calculation of the tolerance addition, first the tolerance additions for all
pitch cylinders are calculated for which the Diameter characteristic is activated. The smallest of these values applies to the tolerance addition for
the stepped cylinder. If the smallest calculated value is negative, the tolerance addition will be zero.
If the stepped cylinder is used as reference for a True Position or Best
Fit of Bore Pattern with MMC/LMC characteristic, no tolerance addition
will be calculated but the 2D best fit function is used instead.
5-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
CALYPSO
5-37
Defining characteristics
group=3
Defines the sequence of the user-defined tolerances in the selection
list
description=Feinmessraum1
Name of the list entry
range stop=18
Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive
5-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Position tolerances
Direction tolerances
Position
Perpendicularity
Symmetry
Parallelism
Coaxiality
Angularity
CALYPSO
5-39
Defining characteristics
Axial features or 2D line: a reference feature plus offset and reference length
Theoretical or linked plane: two reference features
Position tolerance (position, symmetry or coaxiality): an offset and
a reference length for each available feature
You can also enter 0 for the reference length, which, for example,
corresponds to a circle.
Direction tolerance: a reference length not equal to 0
Instead of a feature as reference, you can also select a coordinate system with one of its planes. If a reference feature suitable for the definition of the projected tolerance zone has already been defined for
the characteristic, this reference feature will also be shown in the selection list.
To deselect the coordinate system, select the Nominal position of
Feature entry.
Note: The default value for the offset is 0. The default reference length
corresponds to the nominal length (and nominal width) of the feature.
Note: As long as a feature is already selected as reference in another
characteristic, you cannot change its settings for filter, outlier, method,
etc.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The projected tolerance zone is now defined. The measured results are
evaluated and displayed depending on the compliance with the tolerance
in the projected tolerance zone.
5-40
Nominal
Tolerance Class
ISO286
Upper Tolerance
Lower Tolerance
Shape Of Zone
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining characteristics
Graphic
Parameter: Presettings
Parameter: Postsettings
5 Tick the check boxes of the properties you want to copy to other characteristics.
6 Select the characteristics to which you want to copy properties.
7 Click OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-41
Degrees of freedom
CALYPSO first defines the default settings that are taken from the general
measurement plan settings or the feature. It is also possible that the settings for filtering and outlier elimination were imported from a file.
Changes of the settings defined in this way are performed in the Evaluation window. To do so, open the definition template of the characteristic and select Evaluation parameters in the context menu of the
feature.
5-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The window shows a summary of the current settings. Changes are performed on the other tabs.
Playing a video
ViSCAN
For the manual optical measurement in the camera image, you define the
parameters of filtering and outlier elimination after the measurement
(Filtering and outlier elimination for ViScan [ 551]).
For more information about filtering and outliers, please refer to Basics
about filtering and outliers [ 543] and Defining filters and outlier
elimination [ 545].
The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points, i.e.
only for scanned features.
The current standard calls for at least seven points (earlier standards: five
points) as the prerequisite for using filters. This value is set as the default
value for measurement plans in version 3.8 and higher. You can toggle
the minimum number of points between 7 and 5 for the current measurement plan in the compatibility settings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-43
NOTICE
Once the minimum number of points has been changed to 7, filtering
might no longer be possible for certain features in measurement plans
created with older versions of CALYPSO because the number of points is
no longer sufficient. The No result message appears in the default
printout.
Filtering with a low-pass filter (low frequencies pass the filter, high frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and other longwave profile components are present, while the effects of surface roughness are eliminated.
The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within equal
sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are analyzed
with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in this way is
compensated and serves as the basis for calculating parameters of waviness.
High-pass
Filtering with a high-pass filter (high frequencies pass the filter, low frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is suppressed,
while the effects of the surface roughness are still present.
1/2
Blockage
Passage
Low-pass
Band-pass
High-pass
s/100
s/2
100
UPR
Band-pass
Blockage
A band-pass filter results from the combined use of a low-pass and a highpass filter. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave
(surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively
specified limit.
Eliminating outliers
Outliers are measured points that differ significantly from the geometric
form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce
a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this
nature would easily propagate through the actual-value determination of
the characteristic.
Repeated outlier elimination
Outlier elimination runs iteratively. You can predefine the number of iterations. Outlier recognition becomes more precise with each iteration step.
5-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
If the selected number of iterations is too high, the number of remaining
points may decrease to the minimum number of points.
Prefilter
Prior to the outlier recognition, the measured points are filtered through
a band-pass. Thus, measured values that are otherwise not detectable as
outliers can likewise be eliminated.
A measured (prefiltered) point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than
a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the computed Gaussian element (LSQ feature).
For measurement plans version 4.0 and higher, you define the characteristic of the band-pass (Eliminating outliers [ 549]). In previous
versions of CALYPSO measurement plans, the prefilter is not variable. To
activate prefilter setting, you must set the outlier elimination to version
4.0 in the compatibility settings.
As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and alignment features of the coordinate systems
For a characteristic
For a feature
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-45
5-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Activate the desired filter or the desired outlier elimination and click
Settings.
Make the required settings.
5 Click OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-47
5-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Tick the Connect Segments check box if the segments of an interrupted contour are to be connected to form a continuous contour
during filtering, with as many points as possible being taken into account.
This means that you can select a stronger filter.
5 Press OK to confirm.
Eliminating outliers
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom right,
you can see whether or not outlier elimination is activated.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-49
5-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Include
Adjacent
Points
Include
Adjacent
Points
Outliers
+3s
Computed Feature
-3s
Permitted value range
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-51
Use the slider or the direct input option to set the outlier elimination and
the filtering continuously as a percentage of the nominal point number.
It is possible to enter the number of iterations for outlier elimination: In
this case, the algorithm of the outlier elimination is used again for the
points which have already been eliminated.
The effects of your setting are immediately shown in the camera image:
The points to be applied are displayed in green, the measuring points to
be eliminated are shown in red.
In addition, the number of all points and all applied points is shown in
the dialog box.
Select OK to transfer the measuring points to the new segment.
NOTICE
When performing a CNC run at a later stage, the settings made are saved
for the corresponding segment.
5-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Representation in the
plot
In the plot representation, the manually masked points are treated in the
same way as automatically masked outliers. They can be shown either
with dashed lines or hidden.
Defining ranges
1 Click Evaluation in the definition template of the corresponding
Line Auto Path or Circle feature.
2 Click in the Evaluation window the Manual button under Point
Masking.
The Manual Point Masking dialog box appears on the screen. At
the same time, the CAD window is changed: The view is centered with
regard to the selected feature and rotated accordingly. If a measurement has already taken place, the actual points will be shown with the
selected magnification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-53
3 Click the corresponding icon and enter the ranges to be excluded from
the evaluation in the Masked Areas list.
For a circle you must enter angle ranges with start and end angle, for
a line you must enter line segments with start and end value.
Your entries are immediately shown in the CAD window; the ranges
are marked with read (start) and blue (end) lines.
You can remove a superfluous line from the list using DEL or Delete
in the context menu.
5-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: All angle and coordinate definitions refer to the local alignment
of the feature. Thus the defined ranges are stable with regard to position changes.
4 If required, you can change the size and location of the displayed range
in the CAD window with the mouse.
5 Select the behavior during the CNC run:
Accept areas automatically: In the CNC run, your defined
ranges are excluded from the evaluation.
Manual Input: During the CNC run, you can define ranges by
means of the displayed measuring results immediately after the
measurement of the feature. The representation of the measuring
points is defined by clicking Properties in the Meas. Point Display window.
Note: You may also define the same setting for each feature in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Manual Point Masking.
6 Click Apply to display in the case of existing measuring points the
current evaluation according to the set evaluation ranges.
Afterwards you can make additional changes.
7 If the ranges are correct, confirm your entries with OK.
Plane
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-55
Feature type
5-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can set user-defined attributes with different value ranges for characteristics.
Example: You set the quality class attribute with the three values
low, medium and high. You can assign one of these quality
classes to each characteristic.
NOTICE
There is no default presetting for user-defined characteristic attributes. If
no value is assigned to an attribute, the corresponding field will remain
empty.
Outputting attributes
The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in
the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.
NOTICE
If the corresponding setting in the configuration file of the Q-DAS converter was made, these values are transferred to the Q-DAS statistics
program.
You can set the printout output for each attribute in the configuration
file. The characteristic attribute is output if a value is assigned to it.
To do so, you must change the setting of the value from protocolOutput to true. If the entry is missing or it is set to false, the attribute
is not shown in the printout.
The characteristic attributes are only output with the characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-57
5-58
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The file is a table file. It contains lines and columns separated by tabulator.
The first line contains the column headings (1st column: identifier,
2nd to nth column: keyword of the respective characteristic attribute).
Any further line contains the characteristic name in the first column
and the values of the corresponding attributes in the other columns.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-59
NOTICE
Save in simple ASCII format a file that has been edited in a spreadsheet
program and use tabulators as separators.
NOTICE
If you also want to edit the imported characteristic attributes in CALYPSO,
the userattributes.ini configuration file must contain the corresponding entries with the same keywords.
You must create the INI file as a text file and store it in the <user directory>
\data\config directory.
The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values for
one option are separated by commas. If a value itself contains one or
more commas, this value must be placed in quotes ("). Example:
<option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values <option>="X,Y,Z"
means one value
5-60
For the userattributes.ini file, the following has been agreed for the section and option names:
The [Fieldnames] section contains the names of the sections that can
represent an attribute. Deviating from the usual format, this section
consist of lines of the form <option>.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
<option>
name
<value>
= <fname>
Meaning
selectiveList
= true
false
protocolOutput
= true
false
= <aname>
The name of the section with the entries of the combo box
or selection list
editable
= true
Combo box
false
Selection list
For each attribute with a selection list or combo box, the file contains
an additional section with the list of entries of the selection list or
combo box.
Each line in this section has the form <value>=<display>. The entries
under <display> are offered for selection; however, the entries under
<value> are only entered as attributes.
CALYPSO
5-61
list)
REM Now defining the second userfield named u_k2001number
[u_k2001number]
name=K2001 Number
selectiveList=false ; it is not a list, so it must be an input
field
editable=false
protocolOutput=true ; output in protocol
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield with the name
"Part"
[u_k2005class_valueList]
0=0 unimportant
1=1 little important
2=2 important
3=3 significant
4=4 critical
5-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Standards
Angle
Distance
Curve Dimensions
More
The tables below list the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:
Location in
toolbox
X Value
Y Value
Y Value
Diameter
Radius
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
5-63
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Radius Measurement
Size Characteris- Determines the radius and the angle (specified in the
tics
local feature alignment) of each individual probing
point in a specified sector. In this way the results for
a small arc segment can be enhanced (Radius Measurement characteristic [ 573]).
Note: The angles are only output, if Additional Position Result is activated in the Measurement Plan
Editor Characteristics.
2 Point Diameter
Length of perpendicular
Polar position
Radius
Polar position
Angle
Polar position
Height
5-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Projection Angle
One
Projection Angle
Two
Description
Feature axis
Angle 1
Y/X
Z/Y
X/Z
Angle 2
Z/X
X/Y
Y/Z
Cone Angle
Inclination Angle
Rotation Angle
Feature Angle
Size Characteris- Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of a featics
ture assumes with the part alignment.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-65
Location in
toolbox
Description
2D Polar Distance
Location Characteristics
3D Polar Distance
Location Characteristics
Determines the direct three-dimensional distance between the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is generally used for two points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the centers of
spheres).
Cartesian Distance
Location Characteristics
Determines the distance between two features in Cartesian coordinates (along the X, Y and Z axes).
Simple distance
5-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Curve Slope
Curve Stroke
Curve Distance
Curve Expansion
Curve length
Surface Area
Location in
toolbox
Focus 1
Focus 1
Focus 1
Focus 2
Focus 2
Focus 2
Focus 1
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
5-67
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the first focal point of an eltics
lipse.
Focus 1
Focus 2
Focus 2
Focus 2
Diameter Two
Radius Two
Slot Length
Slot width
Circular Pitch
Linear Pitch
Minimum
Maximum Result
Average
5-68
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Result Element
Special Program
Pipe Evaluation
Location in
toolbox
Description
Roundness
Roundness Ref
Waviness
Flatness
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-69
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Flatness with
reference length
Form Character- Defines for a flat feature the flatness within given recistics
tangular zones.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).
Straightness
Straightness
with reference
length
Form Character- Defines for a 2D line the straightness of the line within
istics
given sections.
Cylindricity
Profile
Form Character- Defines the deviation of a plane from its nominal geistics
ometry. Its value depends on the selected shape of
zone (see Profile [ 576]).
Line Profile
Form Character- Defines the form deviation of a curve from its nominal
istics
geometry analogous to the Profile (see Defining the
Line Profile characteristic in the operating instructions
for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option).
Form
Curve Form
5-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
True Position
Location Characteristics
Concentricity
Location Characteristics
Location Characteristics
Perpendicularity
Location Characteristics
Determines the perpendicularity of a planar, cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or
two reference features.
Parallelism
Location Characteristics
GDT Symmetry
Location Characteristics
Angularity
Location Characteristics
Determines the deviation of a feature from a reference feature and a defined angle.
Radial
Location Characteristics
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-71
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Location Characteristics
Axial
Location Characteristics
Location Characteristics
Angle between
Features
Location Characteristics
Generated characteristics
CALYPSO generates the following characteristics automatically:
Characteristic
From construction
Description
X Value
Y Value
Z Value
Radius
Gap
5-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
From construction
Description
Feature Angle
Angle Range
End angle
Degrees of freedom
If there is no full circle but a circle section, you can improve the stability
of Size Characteristics by specifying the center point of the circle and
checking only the radius.
Printout
All of the evaluation range remaining from the filtering and outlier elimination are output with name and actual-nominal comparison in the
printout. The name is composed of the name of the characteristic and
the point number, e.g. Radius Measurement1^417. The points of an
evaluation range keep their original numbers and are not renumbered.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-73
NOTICE
The Perpendicular construction is only useful as geometrical feature
for this characteristic.
This characteristic cannot be used to check the length of a measured
rotationally symmetrical feature, e.g. a cylinder or cone. The length of
such a feature is always the same as the nominal value.
For this reason, it cannot be used to check the distance between two
bores by means of a 3D line. You must use the Distance characteristic
to check the distance between two points.
Circles and cylinders must be measured with scanning paths whereas only
circle paths are permitted as scanning paths. Each scanning path must
cover an angle of at least 180.
Tolerances
Calculation modes
You have the following options for calculation:
a = min
b = max
Gaussian element
5-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The size definition according to ISO 8015 allows you to check whether
both the tangential element and all two point distances comply with
the tolerance.
With an outside feature, the circumscribed feature is evaluated and
with an inside feature the inscribed feature. For each point of each
scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined.
The two point distances are used to determine the smallest distance
(A) for a circumscribed feature and the largest distance (B) for an inscribed feature. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
Circumscribed feature
Inscribed feature
The smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
For the angle and angle range you may enter formulas.
Calculation of point facing each other
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-75
The angle positions for the evaluation range and the result definition refer
to the u axis of the feature's local feature alignment. The axis vector of
the feature determines the direction of the w axis.
The local feature alignment is displayed in the CAD window when opening the feature.
Result output
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines up to two results which
are distinguished by min. and max. designations. Each individual result is
output as an individual characteristic and contains the following definitions:
the feature
the mode used to calculate the 2 point diameter (not required in the
compact printout)
Enter the name of the characteristic without the ^Min or ^Max suffix. You can access results with indexes by means of the loop index.
Profile characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Profile
Features
5-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Stepped Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
General Surface
Point
NOTICE
The Profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.
Direction of deviations
The deviations between the actual surface and the nominal surface are
required for the determination of the Profile characteristic. It is assumed that the values increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in inward direction. Depending on whether you use
an inside or an outside feature, the calculated result may be vice versa for
CALYPSO. Therefore, CALYPSO first calculates the difference between
the actual and nominal points and reverses the sign, if necessary.
Further considerations are based on the assumption that the deviations
increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in
inward direction (towards the material).
Shapes of zone
When defining the Profile, you can choose from eight shapes of zone:
Shape Of Zone
Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution one result
Unilateral (nominal contour
inside)
Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution two results
Outwards into infinity
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-77
For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input field
is activated for the Tolerance (one side) where you additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies using the Inside / Outside
Switch icon.
Result of profile
Shape Of Zone
Will be output:
Example
Bilateral with unequal distri- The largest deviation inside (minibution two results
mum) and the largest deviation
outside (maximum) the workpiece
Outwards into infinity
Calculation of deviations
for the general surface
The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its associated
nominal point. The stylus touch point is calculated based on the stylus
center, stylus radius and the normal vector of the nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and actual
point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point.
5-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result calculation
You can enter a coordinate system instead of reference features. The
procedure is the same as for the True Position characteristic.
A temporary coordinate system is formed from the reference features.
The primary, secondary and tertiary constraints of the coordinate system
are defined according to the sequence, direction and feature type of the
references.
CALYPSO determines the datum reference frame (from reference features or as a coordinate system). The distance to the characteristic is
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-79
You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
pattern.
Evaluation characteristics
5-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Pitch error
Definition
Pitch Error fu
Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).
The result is an angle or an arc length. The arc length is calculated
based on the distance between the first nominal geometry and the
pitch center point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-81
Evaluation characteristic
Definition
Fr Rad.Runout
Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle corresponds to the center
of the pattern. The radius is the distance between the center and the
first actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
The n-th result is always 0.
Fre Roundness
Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle is calculated based on the
actual features of the pattern. The pitch circle is calculated via the
best-fit method according to Gauss (LSQ feature). The radius is the
distance between the calculated pitch circle center point and the first
actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
If the pattern comprises less than 3 features, there will be no result
for the roundness. The n-th result of this evaluation characteristic is
0.
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp), radial runout (Fr), roundness (Fre) and pitch error (fu) are shown
in the printout. Furthermore, the deviations are compared with the
upper and lower tolerance.
With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the values for Fp and Fr
are shown as difference between the maximum and minimum value.
The range between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band without reference to a nominal value. All single values
of the pitch error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.
5-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
-0,2000
12
Pkt.
10
11
-0,2000
0,2 mm
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
0,2 mm
50 : 1
50 : 1
mm
1,0000
mm
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
12
Pkt.
-1,0000
10
11
-1,0000
1 mm
1 mm
10 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
10
11
0,1 mm
0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000
100 : 1
50 : 1
10
11
12
Pkt.
10
11
12
Pkt.
mm
0,0000
mm
0,0000
1
10
11
-0,5000
-1,0000
-1,0000
0,5 mm
1 mm
-2,0000
20 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,0200
0,0000
1
10
11
12
Pkt.
0,0000
-0,0100
10
11
-0,0200
-0,0200
10 m
20 m
1000 : 1
500 : 1
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Circular pitch1(3)^Fp).
In the case of individual pitch error, pitch error and cumulative pitch error,
pitch spread and table, the name of the characteristic type is followed by
the unit of measure (arc length or angle) for the results.
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for the result (example: Cylinder1(3)-(4)).
The standardized reference sizes for individual and cumulative pitch errors
are shown in the errors of those results. The nominal and actual values
correspond to the angular pitch p or cumulative angular pitch pk.
After the individual results of the circular pitch, all results of the selected evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default printout.
The compact printout shows the results of the circular pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness specification factors are highlighted in color in the table.
In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-83
Evaluation characteristics
You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
1D linear pattern.
Pitch error
Definition
Pitch distance p
Cumulative pitch distance pk Distance between the first feature of the pitch measurement and the
second feature of the corresponding pitch step.
Individual pitch error fp
5-84
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Evaluation characteristic
Definition
Pitch error fu
Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp) and pitch error (fu) are shown in the printout. Furthermore, the
deviations are compared with the upper and lower tolerance.
With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the value for Fp is shown
as difference between the maximum and minimum value. The range
between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band
without reference to a nominal value. All single values of the pitch
error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
-0,2000
12
Pkt.
10
11
-0,2000
0,2 mm
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
0,2 mm
50 : 1
50 : 1
mm
1,0000
mm
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
12
Pkt.
-1,0000
10
11
-1,0000
1 mm
1 mm
10 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
0,1 mm
10
11
0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000
100 : 1
1
10
11
50 : 1
12
Pkt.
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Linear pitch1(3)^Fp).
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for this result (example: Point1(3)-(4)).
The nominal and actual values correspond to the pitch distance p or cumulative pitch distance pk.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-85
After the individual results of the linear pitch, all results of the selected
evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default
printout. A comment can be output together with the table.
The compact printout shows the results of the linear pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error and pitch error specification factors are highlighted in color in the table. A comment can be output together with
the table.
In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
5-86
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the case of display with banner, the arrow points to the feature with
the maximum or minimum in the graphic window (in contrast, the arrow
at the Average characteristic points to the first characteristic in the list).
Overlapping 0%
1
...
Overlapping 25%
1
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-87
The measured values received from the roundness check of the part segments can be evaluated in different ways:
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang can only be evaluated according to Gauss (LSQ feature) or Minimum. The standard evaluation method is Minimum.
The Circumscribed and Inscribed and Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range could
be too small for this.
This provides you with a measure for the roundness of each part segment.
For output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
all roundnesses.
5-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted part
plane of the rectangle is specified.
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted overall
plane is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the flatness of each rectangle. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
all flatnesses
A flatness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional flatness. Minimum and maximum of the rectangle with the greatest flatness
are shown in the plot with *.
Overlapping 0%
1
...
Overlapping 25%
1
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-89
The measured values received from the straightness check of the sections
can be evaluated in different ways:
This provides you with a measure for the straightness of each section. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
all straightnesses.
NOTICE
In contrast to Straightness of a 2D line, the shape of zone of the Straightness Ref cannot be switched over. The deviation is calculated in the probing direction this corresponds to the normal shape of zone in the
case of Straightness.
A straightness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional
Straightness. Minimum and maximum of the tolerance zone with the
greatest straightness are shown in the plot with *.
Formula calculation
Formula calculation
For example, you can enter a PCM expression with getActual commands
and PCM variables for the formula. If a result element accesses the actual
value of a feature that has not yet been measured during the CNC run,
the missing measurement is automatically processed with priority and the
result element is determined.
Result input
A window showing the name of the result element and the dialog text
appears for the entry of a value during the CNC run. You can enter a
number.
5-90
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The CNC run will only continue after entering a number and confirming
with OK. When clicking Cancel, the CNC run is interrupted and the stop
light will turn red.
Tolerances
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-91
To do so, select the desired special program, transfer in the list the required features and the associated coordinate system.
Creating an alignment
5-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Characteristic
Special program
characteristic
Data of the
features
Special program
Results
Characteristic
During the measurement plan run, the selected special program is executed based on the entries made and the results are returned to CALYPSO.
CALYPSO checks the waviness and offers two evaluation types: the Fourier analysis and the roundness evaluation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-93
Feature
Defaults
In the roundness evaluation, the maximum deviations from the roundness of different, linearly ascending sector sizes are determined and
checked. In this case, the sectors are arranged with a predefined
overlap in the circle and the corresponding deviation from the roundness is determined for each defined sector size.
Circle
Circle on Cone
Specifying tolerances
Tolerance function
Four options are available for the specification of the tolerance function:
Tolerance steps:
You can enter different tolerances for certain blocks of frequency
ranges/angle ranges. At the limit of both frequency ranges/angle
ranges, the higher tolerance applies.
5-94
Tolerance polynomial:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RTA Curve:
The roundness deviation R and the construction form parameters n0
and k saved in a file allow you to define the limit curve for the amplitude.
Results
the amplitude which belongs to the frequency with the highest difference between the amplitude and tolerance as well as the frequency
itself
the maximum deviation from the roundness for all sector sizes as well
as this sector size itself.
In the default printout and the compact printout, the amplitude, tolerance and deviation are specified in m or 1/1000 inch as well as the appropriate frequency and the information whether the frequency is specified as number of harmonics (number of harmonic waves) or oscillation
length.
The appropriate frequency is not specified in addition in the custom printout.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-95
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the permissible lower limit value of the range to be checked.
8 Define the tolerance steps in the table.
5-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO makes sure that the limit values in the table are arranged in
a monotonically ascending order (or in the case of oscillation length in
a monotonically descending order).
Note: You can also determine the tolerance value with a formula. The
numeric result of the formula calculation is assigned to the m or
1/1000 inch unit and evaluated.
Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order.
Add new ranges with Add.
Enter the upper limit of the range and the tolerance which is
valid from the previous limit to the current limit.
9 Press OK to confirm.
Note: If you want to define tolerance steps in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-97
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
The default setting for Evaluation type is Fourier.
5 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
6 Enter the path and the file name of the tolerance file under Download tolerance curve from file. You can also enter a formula
here.
- or -
5-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Click the Select file for tolerance curve import icon and select
the file in the file selection dialog.
The imported values are displayed as table in the definition template
but cannot be modified.
Note: If you do not enter any path, CALYPSO searches for the file in
the measurement plan directory.
7 If you want to change the data after importing, go to Tolerance
Curve and select the Tolerance steps tab.
The table containing the imported data can be edited. You can modify
the values. Please note that this change does not modify the values in
the file.
After editing the file, the single values in the CNC are no longer imported from the specified file.
8 Press OK to confirm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-99
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
The displayed formula is adjusted. If the ai and bi coefficient sequences
are identical, the corresponding formula computes the number of
harmonics and once the oscillation length.
5-100
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order for the limit values.
8 Define the tolerance polynomial in the table.
Note: If you want to define a tolerance polynomial in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-101
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-
5-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-103
The file contains several lines showing the upper limit values in UPR of
the tolerated range and the corresponding tolerance in m, separated by
tabs.
Example
The first line may have any column header. If the first character of the
file is not a number, the entire first line is ignored.
The first column shows the limit values [UPR] of the tolerated range
as consecutive natural numbers. Missing or double values in the first
column lead to an error.
The second column shows a tolerance in m for each value in the first
column. The decimal separator is the point.
Other units are not allowed; if a different unit is defined in the default
settings, the values will be converted.
5-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The structure of the form plot is similar to the structure of the Fourier
analysis of the roundness. It consists of the graphic with the amplitudes
per frequency and the appropriate value tables.
The unit of the X axis and the left column in the value table depends on
the setting in the characteristic: scale in harmonic waves (without unit) or
in oscillation length (angular unit of the measurement plan).
The tolerance steps or the tolerance polynomial is drawn in the graphic (in blue by default). Only those frequencies that lie within the frequency range will be shown. The X axis is also scaled to this width.
Frequencies that are outside of the tolerance are shown in red by
default; frequencies that are inside of the tolerance are shown in
green.
The frequency with the largest deviation is set in boldface in the value
table. The values in the table are also highlighted in color.
Usually, there is not enough space in the table of the frequencies with
amplitudes to show all values. Therefore, only a selection of the largest
amplitudes will be output.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-105
If then there is still enough space in the table, all frequencies which
are inside of the tolerance are listed weighted according to the deviation values.
The nominal points and the appropriate actual points can lie in one or
more parallel planes. For the best fit, the nominal points are moved by
means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit
condition is fulfilled.
Results
As the result of this operation, CALYPSO computes the rotation and offset
of the bore pattern. Additionally, the best fit data is used to generate
another coordinate system. You can access the origin of this coordinate
system using formulas.
Best-fit methods
The following best-fit methods are available for the best fit of bore pattern:
5-106
Gauss Best Fit (LSQ feature). With this method, outliers have only a
minimal influence. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values into
tolerance. Possible movement and rotation ranges are limited due to
the reference features. This corresponds to a good/bad evaluation of
a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of the single deviations.
Best fit according to least absolute value feature (L1 feature). Outliers
have less effect with this method than is the case with the Gauss (LSQ
feature) method. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Evaluation method
The evaluation method for the features used to calculate the best fit of
bore pattern can be changed in the multiple selection dialog box for features.
The Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is set by default.
Some results may not be reproducible, because this method is very susceptible to outliers. Better reproducibility can be achieved using the LSQ
feature evaluation method.
In addition to the evaluation method, you can select filtering and outlier
elimination for the selected features.
Shape Of Zone
For the shape of zone, you can select between rectangular and circular
tolerance zone.
If you do not cancel the pattern, only one line is generated, e.g. Circle1(1-x). The number of features depends on the variable.
CALYPSO
5-107
If there are no references for the True Position, the result of the best fit
of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z translation) is added
to the nominal datum reference frame of the best fit of bore pattern.
returns:
5-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This generates the coordinate system with the name of the Best Fit of
Bore Pattern it is initially identical to the base alignment.
4 Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum, Secondary Datum and
Tertiary Datum to specify the reference features so that the bore
pattern can be computed later.
This defines the coordinate system with the name of the best fit of
bore pattern.
If you do not enter a reference, the base alignment is used by default.
5 Click Bore Pattern to call the settings for evaluating the bore pattern.
6 Click the features you need for best fit of bore pattern (Select Features).
- and/or Use the Select Bore Pattern selection list to include bore patterns
(i.e. feature groups) defined beforehand.
7 Select the Shape Of Zone and enter the tolerances.
8 In the case of a parameterized pattern, define here whether you want
to cancel the pattern or whether you want to include it together with
the parameter in the best fit of bore pattern.
In the first case, you will receive several lines with the individual pattern
features, in the other case, you will receive one line with one parameterized pattern.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-109
Note: In the multiple selection window for features, you can change
the evaluation method for the features (default: Outer Tangential
Element) and set filtering and outlier elimination.
Note: All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the references selected
beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian or
polar form.
Note: You can parameterize the tolerances. You can enter formulas
and nominal values via the context menu.
9 Select a best-fit method from the Best Fit Method group:
Select the best-fit method of your choice from the selection list.
Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting.
10Click Calculate now to start the calculation.
When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the Best
fit result group.
Note: The coordinate system with the name of the best fit of bore
pattern [ 5107] is automatically corrected by the result of fit.
To see a graphic representation of the best fit bore pattern, tick the
Graphic check box (see Outputting form and location plots for
characteristics [ 872]).
11Click OK.
5-110
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the Distance check menu item from the selection list for selection and definition shown in the CAD toolbar.
3 Click the position on the model at which you wish to check the wall
thickness.
The two space points that are opposite to each other and the connection between them are shown at the selected position.
Two new features of the Space Point type appear in the list of features.
With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or the
material deviation at the place in question.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-111
Utilities
Utilities
Overview of the utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and under Resources Utilities in the menu, you can find some special elements that are not characteristics. However, they are required for the measurement plan run:
Utilities
Description
Alignment
RPS Alignment
P6 Alignment
Alignment from Sever- In the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
al Curves
Software option under Coordinate system from best fit alignment of several curves
Probing system qualifi- Probing System Qualification utility [ 5114]
cation
Qualification of stylus
system holders
Gauge Correction
Qualification
Text element
5-112
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Utilities
Description
Graphics Element
Save Alignment
Load Alignment
Delete Alignment
CALYPSO
5-113
Utilities
Degrees of freedom
You can use the following features for the geometry best fit:
Planes
2D lines
Points
Cylinders
Circles
Tori
You can restrict the degrees of freedom of the best fit. Click the Evaluation Constraints button and activate the check box for the movements which are to be blocked during the best fit.
5-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Here you can define the stylus system holder qualification settings.
CALYPSO automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the
measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, the correct stylus
system is automatically used. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert
the stylus system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-115
Utilities
The erosion module provides a file with translation and rotation values
for two related alignments which is suitable for erosion machines.
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being used
along with the name and directory of the file that will be created.
NOTICE
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
These alignments refer to the clamping device on the one hand and to
the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the alignment of the workpiece
or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined on the basis of
the alignment of the clamping device (X, Y, Z).
5-116
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
NOTICE
Here you cannot select alignments with index that are based on references with pattern.
NOTICE
If you specify the alignments in an order that is the wrong way around,
you receive other compensation values.
When measuring the feature, the alignments will be formed and the parameter file of the erosion module will be saved.
Procedure
Result
Once the erosion module has been executed, an ASCII file will be available
that can be used with the erosion machine.
For each erosion machine type, two lines in the following form are saved
in the file:
;MachName<serial_number> = <machine_name>
<machine-specific_switch>
The details for the coordinate transformation are in the machine-specific
switches, an 8-digit binary number.
Example:
;MachName01 = Erode de luxe
11110000
The 8 digits of the switch (counted from the left) have the following
functions:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-117
Utilities
Digit
Function
1 changes sign of X
1 changes sign of Y
1 changes sign of Z
1 changes sign of C
Manufacturer-dependent
Not used
A 1 in the 5th digit thus has the same effect as swapping the alignments
of the clamping device and the erosion electrode.
5-118
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Text output
In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be output
in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the custom printout
and the compact printout).
Only the text itself is output in the default printout and compact printout.
The custom printout also includes the name of the feature (e.g. Textelement7).
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and not
when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the case
of characteristics).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-119
Utilities
Use the icons to define whether the graphic is to be displayed and output
to the printer during the CNC run.
Saving an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the file
name and select the alignment to be saved. If the alignment has a pattern,
you must determine the desired index.
5-120
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment (calculated from the actual values) is saved in the <user directory>\workarea
\basesystems directory. A subdirectory is created with the name that was
entered in the definition template. Use backslashes \ to create further
subdirectories.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be calculated
during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for the
utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Loading an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the file
name for the alignment to be loaded. If the alignment has a pattern, you
must determine the desired index.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (e.g. because
a feature refers to this alignment), the alignment is loaded from the <user
directory>\workarea\basesystems directory.
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it will
be treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file name)
appears in the geometry datum reference frame lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values when
loading.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Special aspects
The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the file
name.
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded (because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this will appear
in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls such as the nominal alignment for the nominal geometry.
Deleting an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems
directory.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-121
Utilities
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectory.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the CNC
run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file is
write-protected, an error message will appear. The CNC run is resumed.
Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
The Base Alignment Match utility makes it possible to obtain again a valid
coordinate system after changing the position of the measuring system.
Use Resources Utilities Base Alignment Match to add it to
the measurement plan.
Principle
5-122
After changing the position, CALYPSO does not recognize the locations of the features. Therefore, you must probe these features manually. This corresponds to the manual probing of the base alignment
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
at the beginning of the CNC run with unknown position of the workpiece in the CMM measuring range.
NOTICE
For the base alignment match, it is irrelevant whether the position of the
measuring system or workpiece has been changed, the procedure is the
same for both applications.
CALYPSO uses the coordinates of the feature datum targets to carry out
an internal 3D best fit. The resulting coordinate system becomes the new
internal base alignment in the CNC run.
The new base alignment is saved under the name of the base alignment
match in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems directory. During
the automatic run, the file name is assigned the (CNC) extension.
Bundle Alignment
It is possible to change the position of the mobile measuring system several times and use an additional base alignment match for this. This will
enable you to measure also larger workpieces with the corresponding
precision.
Warning limit
You can enter and define a warning limit for the standard deviation so
that CALYPSO stops as soon as the limit is exceeded during the measurement. It is possible to repeat the measurement or to cancel the run.
Printout
The results of the manually measured features in the new base alignment
are saved in the default printout. The base alignment match is output in
the printout in much the same way as a 3D best fit.
Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
1 Open the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-123
Utilities
Comment
Bundle Alignment
Select Features
Feature
Execute
Automatic Measurement
Manual Run
Now
OK
Reset
5 Click Select Features and add the features for the base alignment
match.
Alternatively, It is also possible to select the features in the CAD view,
extract them or probe them on the machine while the definition tem-
5-124
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Circle1
Circle2
Base Alignment
Circle3
Circle4
CALYPSO
5-125
Utilities
Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
1 Start the measurement plan with the base alignment match.
After execution of the characteristics that can be measured at the first
position, CALYPSO measures the features that you defined in the Base
Alignment Match utility in the CNC run.
A remark window is displayed showing the name of the alignment
feature and the text Features for aligning the base alignment have to
be measured manually.
CALYPSO switches to manual control of the CMM.
2 Change the position of the mobile measuring system and click OK.
CALYPSO instructs you which features must now be measured manually at the new position.
3 When prompted, measure all features that are required for the calculation of the alignment.
CALYPSO calculates a new base alignment and uses it internally for
the rest of the run for the following characteristics.
If the standard deviation check is activated, an information window
opens once the warning limit has been exceeded in which you can
define the rest of the procedure: Cancel or repeat the last measurement.
If the alignment was not successful, the CNC run will be interrupted
and the stop light will turn red. The message CNC canceled: Base
Alignment cannot be computed appears on the status monitor.
The reason for the failed alignment may be, for example, that a feature
could not be calculated due to insufficient number of points or incorrect probing strategy.
5-126
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-127
Utilities
The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.
5-128
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-1
6-2
You can enter formulas and define the run control [ 637].
You can add multimedia user information [ 675] to the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can edit the compatibility of the measurement plan with certain program versions of CALYPSO [ 65].
The stylus system names and stylus names used [ 67] in the
measurement plan can be replaced.
You can define the names which CALYPSO then assigns to features,
You can also mirror the entire measurement plan on a selected axis [ 624] (not with Calypso Light).
NOTICE
You can use the Windows Explorer to save or to delete measurement
plans.
Measurement plan in the
file system
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-3
6-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
System Set Up
File
Menus
Paths
Language
Dual arm
Optics
Font
Switch off AutoSave for this measurement plan
Dynalog
Printer
Dialogs
Export DMIS
Default Name
Strategies
No. of Versions
Save
PCM
Current Status
OFF
Switch ON quick save
OK
Cancel
Apply
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-5
1 To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings for this Measurement Plan and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plan window.
2 To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings for several measurement plans and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plans window.
3 Select the corresponding measurement plans.
4 The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to
set the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement
plans to a certain version of CALYPSO.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode
6-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-7
2 Select the stylus names to be exchanged in the list and assign the desired new name in the to selection field.
3 Click Execute Now! to apply the exchange.
the measurement plan editor for features (called via Resources Features Settings Editor or the icon in the measurement
plan area on the Measurement Plan tab)
the measurement plan editor for characteristics (called via Resources Characteristics Settings Editor)
The measurement plan editors provide you with a quick and easy way of
checking and changing measurement plan settings and values for the
entire measurement plan or for selected features.
NOTICE
Once you have selected features in the corresponding list of measurement plan features, these are also highlighted after opening the measurement plan editor.
The structure of both editors is identical. This illustration shows an example of the measurement plan editor for features.
Measurement Plan Editor Features
** = from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)
Clearance Group
List of settings
Accept for:
selected features
Measurement Plan
Probing
Stylus system
Units
Selection list
of defaults
Set To
Type
Cylinder
Value
CP +Z
Setup Mode
Plane
CP -Y
Printer
Point
CP +Z
Plane
CP +Z
CMM Parameters
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)
Evaluation...
Outlier Elimination
Warning Limits
Filter
Optical Settings
CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi
CylFroCe
Pattern
Export Points
Best fit accuracy (free form surface)
Features
CylFroRiDow
Cylinder
CP -Y
CylRiCe
Cylinder
CP +X
Feature types
CircRi
Circle
CP +X
CircRiTop
Circle
CP +X
CylFroRe
Currently valid
settings
2-D LineBack
2D Line
CP +X
PlaFroTop
Plane
CP +Z
ConeTopCe
Cone
CP +Z
Cone Addition1
Circle
OK
Cancel
Help
NOTICE
With settings that cannot be referenced to the feature, the list of features
is empty.
6-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Procedure
The menu items of the context menu allow you to copy, check individual
columns or the entire measurement plan editor, highlight all or set all to
default.
You can open and close the view of the tree structure completely or partially.
The menu items of the table menu allow you to modify the sorting of the
measurement plan features, browse the table columns and add additional
columns with nominal data to the list of measurement plan features. Depending on the setting, the additional columns are displayed only when
selecting nominal data or always.
Tabular editor
CALYPSO opens a tabular editor for setting the evaluation, filter and
outliers. Here, you can check and change the individual attributes without having to open each individual definition template (Working with
the tabular editor [ 611]).
Further information
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-9
Menu item
Function
Original order
Alphabetic order
Search
Customize
Opens the Customize view dialog box. In this window, you can
define the displayed columns with
nominal data for the editor.
Customize view
You extend the table of a measurement plan editor by additional columns. These columns are only used for displaying the value and not for
editing.
Use Customize in the table menu to open the Customize view dialog
box.
Customize view
Edit
Displayed columns
Comment
Inside/Outside
Alignment
X
Y
Z
NX
NY
NZ
W1
W2
Inclination Angle
Display always
OK
Cancel
Here you select the additional columns to be displayed in the table. The
order of the additional columns is preset.
6-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the window of the measurement plan editor becomes too small to display all additional columns, the preset columns Name, Type and Value will be fixed and a scrollbar displayed.
Selected line
Edit modes
List of settings
There are two edit modes available for the table. To switch between the
two modes, use F2 or select/deselect the Edit line entry in the context
menu.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-11
Individual mode
Carry out the changes directly in the individual lines.
6-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Show formulas
Set To
Type
Value
Cylinder
Setup Mode
Plane
Point
Printer
Plane
CMM Parameters
Plane
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)
Cylinder
Inside/Outside
Warning Limits
Alignment
Plane
Optical Settings
Circle
Circle
CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi
CylFroCe
NX
CylFroRiDow
NY
CylFroRe
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
CylRiCe
NZ
Cylinder
CircRi
W1
Circle
CircRiTop
W2
Circle
2-D LineBack
Inclination Angle
PlaFroTop
Rotation Angle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
ConeTopCe
Start Angle
Cone Addition1
Angle Range
PlaRe
Diameter
PlaBack
Circle
Plane
Plane
Diameter Two
Length
Width
Cancel
Help
This is where you can modify each individual value, but you cannot make
any modifications that are effective throughout the measurement plan.
If you select Show formulas, no numerical values will be displayed but
only the formulas defined in the features. You can modify the formulas.
When using a laser tracker together with a reflector tool for the measurement, the result of the measurement always refers to the center point
of the reflector sphere. The surface of the workpiece shows a tool-dependent distance in two possible directions between this point and the
point to be measured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-13
Reflector
diameter
Workpiece
Offset 1
Offset 2
Reference plane
CALYPSO has to use the valid offset in the correct direction for the evaluation of the measuring results.
CALYPSO handles the reflector tools as a special stylus. Therefore, CALYPSO does not perform any stylus radius correction but adds a tooldependent offset, the reflector tool offset, or the reflector radius to
the measured coordinates.
The Offset 1 and Offset 2 applying to the corresponding reflector tool
must be entered in the stylus system management when creating the
stylus.
The offset to be used for the feature type is set by default in CALYPSO.
You can display this setting in the Measurement Plan Editor Features. This is where you can set the desired offset for feature types as
well as for individual features of the measurement plan:
Value
Meaning
Standard
No Offset
6-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Value
Meaning
Offset 1
Offset 2
Involved strategies
Settings
During scanning, oscillations of the CMM may occur which have an effect
on the measuring results. This applies mainly to the acceleration phase at
the beginning and, to a lesser extent, to the deceleration phase at the
end of the scanning process. The inaccurately measured points can be
removed from the evaluation.
With open scanning paths (and curves), you compensate the effect
by masking a certain area at the beginning and the end of the scanning path. This setting is used for each individual scanning path in the
feature.
The point masking applies to the following scanning paths (not in the
case of discrete-point measurement):
Large and small circle paths with a torus if the scanned angle range
is less than or equal to 360
Polyline on planes
Line of 2D lines
You can carry out masking of the points at two points at the beginning
and at the end of the scanning path:
for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, Point masking tab)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-15
You have two options for point masking which may also be combined:
Point masking after time interval: You define the travel time
in seconds at the beginning and the end of the scanning process. The
points measured during this period are masked. In the default settings, you can transfer the values 0.25 sec and 0 sec to the input fields
using the Default button. These are values which are generally used
in practice.
NOTICE
If you combine both masking options, all points which fulfill at least one
of the two conditions are masked.
Example
The following table shows the result of the point masking when both
options are combined:
Masked
Points
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
05
06
07
08
09
points used
Effect
The masked points are treated in the same way as points which are outside the evaluation range. They can be displayed in the form plot and in
the CAD window, but are not used for the evaluation of the feature. The
masked points are also not counted in the number of points (printout).
The settings for the display in the complete system are defined in the
default settings (Environment) on the Language index card. You can
enter between 0 and 6 decimals.
This setting applies to the values in all features and characteristics, i.e. for
actual and nominal values as well as for tolerances.
Output of results
For the output of results you can define the number of decimal places
which is different from the setting for the display of values.
You can define this setting for the entire measurement plan or for an
individual characteristic in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. This setting has an influence on the representation of the
nominal and actual values and the tolerances in the following outputs:
6-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Default printout
Table files for characteristics (furthermore, the table file contains the
decimalplaces column showing the number of decimal places of
the corresponding characteristic)
Possible inputs
Input
Effect
** Proposal
Accept for measurement plan: Number of decimal places in the default settings
Accept for selected features: Number of decimal places in the higher-order
element (group or measurement plan)
0 to 6
-1
Automatic mode 1: the tolerance width (the difference between the upper and
lower tolerance) determines the number of decimal places:
Tolerance width > 1 results in 1 decimal place
Tolerance width < 1 results in 2 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.1 results in 3 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.01 results in 4 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.001 results in 5 decimal places
-2
Automatic mode 2: the effective decimal places of the tolerances and the nominal
value determine the number of decimal places of the output:
The highest value of the effective decimal places (decimal places without filled
zeros) of the tolerances and the nominal value increased by 1 determines the
number of decimal places for the output of the characteristic.
Example 1: Nominal value = 235.0500
Upper tolerance = 0.1000
Lower tolerance = -0.1000
Number of decimal places = max (2,1,1) + 1 = 3
Example 2:
Nominal value = 21.4500
Maximum dimension = 21.455
Minimum dimension = 21.445
Number of decimal places = max (2,3,3) + 1 = 4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-17
Derived features
CALYPSO also assigns a derived name to the characteristics saved automatically by specifying tolerances in a feature. The name consists of the
name of the characteristic, a blank and the name of the feature.
Examples: X value Circle3, Z value Perpendicular1, etc.
Changing element
names
You can define your own defaults for element names in the measurement plan.
Follow the following steps to enable own defaults for the element names:
You define own default names for the desired features, characteristics, utilities and form and location plots (see File with default name:
Internal feature names [ 620] in the CALYPSO Online Help).
Save these names in a text file with special format (Format of the
file with default names (reference) [ 619] and Creating and editing the file with default names [ 619]).
Activate the default names and load the prepared file (Loading a
file with default names [ 624]).
6-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The file consists of several similarly structured lines. Each line is composed
of eight entries that are each separated by a tab.
Header line
The first line of the file, the header line, contains the following entries
(divided by a tab):
Symbol Comment Name1 Name2 Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn
Name lines
The lines with the default names follow thereafter. A separate line is created for each element type that is supposed to receive an individual default name.
A default name can be composed of up to five partial names. One of the
partial names must contain the start value for the sequential index. Which
partial name that is, is defined extra for each line in the IndexColumn
(column 8) by input of the column number.
Example:
Icon Comment Name1
Name2
Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn
circle Bore Table_ Bore_ 1
5
line2d Edge
Table_ Edge_ 1
5
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-19
All features of the Circle type receive the names Table_Bore_x where
x is assigned a sequential number beginning with 1.
The columns have the following meanings:
Column
Meaning
Icon
Comment
Name1
...
One of these columns must contain the start value for the index.
Name5
IndexColumn
The number of the column that contains the start value for the index.
Value range from 3 (Name1) to 7 (Name5).
When the first character in the specified column is not a number, the
start value 0 is used.
If still other characters follow in the specified column of a number,
they will be ignored.
Example: 42_Circle_2 designates 42 as start value, Circle designates 0 as start value.
Internal name
2 Point Diameter
2-Point-Diameter
twoPtDistance
2D Line
Line2D
line2d
Curve
Curve
d2Curve
3D Best Fit
Best Fit 3D
bestfit3d
3D Line
Line3D
line3d
3D Curve
Curve
d3Curve
General Curve
General Curve
gCurve
General Surface
General Surface
gSurf
Adjust Basesystem
adjustBS
Width
Width
width
6-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Internal name
Flatness
Flatness
gdtFlat
Flatness Ref
gdtFlatRef
Profile
Profile
gdtProfile
Straightness
Straightness
gdtStraightCart
Straightness Ref
gdtStraightCartRec
Coaxiality
Coaxiality
gdtCoa
Concentricity
Concentricity
gdtCon
Line Profile
Line Profile
gdtProfileofALine
Angularity
Angularity
gdtAngle
Parallelism
Parallelism
gdtPar
Axial Runout
Run flat
gdtRunFlat
Position
Position
gdtPosPol2d
Perpendicularity
Perpendicularity
gdtPerp
Roundness
Roundness
gdtRound
Roundness Ang
gdtRoundRef
Radial Runout
Run round
gdtRunRound
GDT Symmetry
Symmetry
gdtSym
Cylindricity
Cylinder form
gdtCyl
Distance
Distance 2d
distance2d
Cartesian Distance
Distance cartesian
distanceCart
2D Polar Distance
Distance polar 2d
distancePol2d
3D Polar Distance
Distance polar 3d
distancePol3d
distance
Rotation Angle
Rotation angle
rotationAngle
Diameter
Diameter
diameter
Diameter Two
Diameter 2
diameter2id
Plane
plane
planeOffset
Probe Calibration
probeCalib
Feature Angle
Element angle
elementAngle
Ellipse
Ellipse
ellipse
Elliptical Cylinder
Ellipse
ellipticalCylinder
Erosion Module
Eroding Module
erodingModule
Surface Area
Surface Area
area
Form
Form
form
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-21
Internal name
Gear
GEAR PRO
GEAR PRO
bestfit3dToNominalGeometry
Graphics Element
Graphics element
graphicElement
Group
Group
setOfTasks
apexAngleHalf
HOLOS
HOLOS
HOLOS
Cone
Cone
cone
Cone Angle
Apex angle
apexAngle
Cone Addition
ConeAddition
coneAddition
Inclination Angle
Inclination angle
inclinationAngle
Kink Point
Kink
kink
Alignment
Coordinate System
coordsys
Load Alignment
recallPCS
Delete Alignment
deletePCS
Save Alignment
savePCS
Circle
Circle
circle
Circle on Cone
Circle On Cone
circleOnCone
circleInContour
Sphere
Sphere
sphere
Sphere Point
Sphere Point
spherePoint
Curve Form
Curve form
ESCurveCurveForm
Length
Length
len
Slot
Slot
slot
Gauge Calibration
gaugeCalibration
Linear Pitch
Linear Pitch
linearPitch
Perpendicular
Perpendicularity
perp
Length of perpendicular
Length of perpendicular
lengthOfAxis
Maximum
Maximum
maximum
Maximum Point
MaxPoint
maxPoint
Maximum Feature
Maximum Element
maximumGeo
Minimum
Minimum
minimum
Minimum Point
MinPoint
minPoint
Minimum Feature
Minimum Element
minimumGeo
Average
Average
average
6-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Internal name
Average-Feature
Average Element
averageGeo
Offset Plane
Offset Plane
offsetPlane
P6 Alignment
P6 Alignment
p6Alignment
coordPolHeight
coordPolRadius
coordPolAngle
Projection
Projection
projection
Projected angle 1
a1id
Projected angle 2
a2id
Point
Point
point
Space point
gdtSpacePoint
Radius Measurement
Radians measurement
radiusMeasurement
Radius
Radius
radius
Radius Two
Radius 2
radius2id
Radius Point
Radius Point
radiusPoint
Rectangle
Rectangle
rectangle
Result Element
Result Element
resultElement
RPS Alignment
RPS Alignment
rpsAlignment
Circular Pitch
Circular Pitch
circularPitch
Intersection
Intersection
intersection
Step Point
Step Point
stepPoint
Stepped Cylinder
Stepped Cylinder
steppedCylinder
GDT Symmetry
Symmetry
symmetry
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
symmetryPlane
Symmetry Point
Symmetry Point
symmetryPoint
Tangent
Tangent
tangent
Text element
Text element
textelement
Torus
Torus
torus
Turbine Blade
Curve Blade
CurveBlade
Edge Point
EdgePoint
edgePoint
Maximum Waviness
Waveness
waveness
anglebF
Angle Point
Angle Point
anglePoint
X Value
X-Value
xValue
Y Value
Y-Value
yValue
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-23
Internal name
Z Value
Z-Value
zValue
Gear
GEAR PRO
GEAR PRO
Cylinder
Cylinder
cylinder
Note: When a file with default names is loaded in which not all possible
default names are defined, only those names contained in the file replace
the names already defined.
1 Select Extras Settings Environment and open the Default
Name notebook page..
2 Tick the Activate name allocation check box.
3 Select the file with the default names and click Open.
6-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
About mirroring
No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior to
mirroring.
After mirroring, the nominal values of the characteristics that mirroring can change (these include distances and X values, for example)
are updated.
The DSE angles are saved in the machine system in CALYPSO. If you
want to mirror also DSE angles, you must specify this separately. A
valid base alignment is needed for this purpose.
NOTICE
Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contained parameters or patterns, they would have to be re-entered after
mirroring.
Formulas can also not be adapted automatically. If you mirror a measurement plan with formulas, you must check the formulas in the mirrored
measurement plan with regard to correctness and correct them if necessary.
CALYPSO
6-25
In this case, you can interrupt the process and see in the Features
with Formulas window which features contain formulas in order
to check and adapt them if necessary. To access the function again,
select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
3 Use Yes to proceed with the mirroring of the measurement plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
6-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-27
All nominal values, actual values and tolerances are imported into the
master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within a single measurement plan incorporated into the
master: In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a feature
or characteristic is preceded by the name of the original measurement
plan, with a point as separator.
Example: Two features of the same name, Cylinder1, from the
measurement plans Testblock1 and Base are named Testblock1.Cylinder1 and Base.Cylinder1 in the master measurement
plan.
5 Edit the master measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics
and add constructions of features across individual measurement
plans.
6 Save the master measurement plan.
Note: When saved in the file system, the $ will be removed from
the name. To make it easier to distinguish the master measurement
plans from regular ones, you should save them in a separate directory.
6-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
copying features together with characteristics and datums [ 631] (copying with details)
cles. [ 636]
NOTICE
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement plan
open on the Calypso user desk.
The features and characteristics are located in the measurement plan area
on different tabs. However, you can add characteristics and features ir61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-29
respective of which tab is on top. CALYPSO automatically adds new features or characteristics to the corresponding tab.
The icons on the tabs are a toggle for switching from one tab to the other.
Operation
one feature
several features
Click the first feature, press and hold down the SHIFT KEY and click the
last feature
The selected measurement plan features have a dark gray background.
When you select a characteristic, its features in the CAD window are displayed in color.
Open the corresponding measurement plan editor and edit the values
and settings (nominal data) of the measurement plan feature.
For features, you edit here the values for inside/outside, inclination
angle, rotation angle, start angle, angle range, diameter, diameter 2,
length and width.
For characteristics, you edit here the nominal value, upper and lower
tolerance, geometrical features and datums.
6-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
A copy does not contain the measured data of the original feature only
the properties, nominal data and tolerances.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.
4 Click the desired position in the list.
5 Press CTRL+V or click the Paste icon.
The features or characteristics will be pasted into the list at the position
you selected.
You copy Cone1 and Cone Addition1(Cone1). This delivers Cone2 and
Cone Addition2(Cone1). However, if you want to obtain Cone2 and Cone
Addition2(Cone2), you must copy the Cone Addition1 together with its
references.
To copy characteristics and references with a feature, use the Copy with
details [ 631] function.
The Copy with details function creates a new feature with the properties, nominal values and tolerances of the original feature. The measured values are not copied. Furthermore, copies of the corresponding
characteristics and datums of the original are created and connected to
the copy of the feature.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy with details.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-31
4 Click the new position in the list and then select Paste Contents in
the context menu.
The Paste Contents... window is opened.
5 Tick the check box for the desired details and confirm with OK.
The new features will be pasted into the list at the position you selected. The copies of the corresponding characteristics and datums are
pasted to the corresponding tab.
6-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining mini-plans
CALYPSO
6-33
If you copy with references, you can use features and entire parts of
your measurement plan in another measurement plan without losing the
connections and references of the features.
1 Highlight in the corresponding measurement plan list the features you
want to copy with references.
2 Select Copy with References in the context menu.
3 Open the measurement plan into which you want to paste the features, open the desired list of features or characteristics and select
Paste with References in the context menu.
You will see the list of selected features which are currently to be
pasted.
4 Define the type of pasting into the measurement plan using OK just
in case names are identical.
The features will be pasted into the measurement plan with a new
name if necessary.
The copied features and references are then stored in the measurement
plan lists:
Once you have selected a feature, the copied features will be pasted. The
corresponding characteristics and alignments will be added to the end of
the measurement plan page.
Once you have selected a characteristic, the copied characteristics and
alignments will then be pasted. The corresponding features will be added
to the end of the feature page.
6-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If no feature has been selected, the copied features will be added to the
end of their corresponding list.
Styli and travel path settings (e.g. retract distance, clearance distance and
speed) are generally transferred from the original measurement plan.
However, if this data in the initial measurement plan originated from the
measurement plan-specific predefinitions, the values will adopt new values after pasting according to the predefinitions of the measurement plan
in which the feature has been pasted.
Note: You should name features before you define them (probe them, in
other words).
You have the following options:
1 Changing the name in the definition template
2 Changing the name in the measurement plan area
In the context menu, use the F2 key or the Rename entry to enter a
name and a comment.
The comment is output in each printout for this characteristic.
Note: All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was
saved will be lost.
1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
2 Reopen the measurement plan.
The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when last
saved.
To limit the loss of routine procedures, you can use the AutoSave function (see Saving measurement plan versions [ 64]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-35
Note: CALYPSO always checks in the currently displayed list, i.e. either in
the list of characteristics or list of features.
1 Click the Search icon.
2 Select the name of the feature you need in the Find/Replace window.
You can specify the search:
Differentiate between cases
Search for whole words only
Search in comments and text elements only
CALYPSO checks in the current list and highlights the next entry found.
3 Activate the Replace tab to replace names.
Note: By selecting all cylinders for conversion, all cylinders will be converted - with the exception of the cylinders that are used as primary or
secondary reference in the base alignment.
1 Select Plan Measurement Plan Functions Convert cylinder to circles.
The Selected cylinders will be converted to circles window
shows a list of all cylinders of the measurement plan with the exception
of the cylinders that are used as primary or secondary reference in the
base alignment.
By default, all cylinders that you selected in the list of features are also
selected in this list.
2 Highlight the desired cylinders.
3 Enter the desired relative height at which the circles should be created.
6-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can conveniently adopt functions and parameters from the function and parameter list.
You can have the features and characteristics which contain formulas displayed on the screen [ 639].
With the aid of external batch files with Windows system commands,
you can start external programs and execute other commands during the CNC run [ 648].
Formula input
By entering formulas you can
NOTICE
The decimal separator in formulas is the point. The comma is used exclusively as separator.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-37
If the expression does not produce a radian measure but a value in degrees, you must therefore add *pi/180 to it or use the rad function for
it: rad(value in degrees). Thus, the radian measure is calculated by the
formula and the input field for the angle shows the exact calculated numerical value in degrees.
Formula input
Calculation
90
5156,6202
-63,3798
90*pi/180
90,0000
90,0000
rad(90)
90,0000
90,0000
1.570796
90,0000
90,0000
Entering formulas
Various input fields allow you to enter formulas instead of absolute values
and to make the value used dependent on other values or measuring
results.
Defining formulas
1 Select Formula in the context menu of the input field.
2 Enter the formula in the Formula window:
CALYPSO helps you when viewing the syntaxes for formulas:
Function opens a list of all operators, functions and commands
as well as of all available parameters.
Double-click a feature to transfer it to the formula input field.
Loop inserts a loop variable in the formula.
Double-click an attribute to insert the return value of the characteristic or feature into the formula.
Compute shows the formula's return value for test purposes.
3 Press OK to confirm.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which
you called the formula input. Note that the color of this field has changed
to yellow.
6-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Element
Name
Internal
name
Clearance plane
CP +X
SP +X
Clearance group
CG +X
GRP +X
RT clearance plane
RTCP +x
RTSP +X
RT clearance group
RTG +X
RTG +X
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-39
2 Use the buttons to open and close the branches that interest you.
Under the feature, the formulas used in it are shown.
Setting conditions
Processing conditions
You can link the computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
CALYPSO to execute a jump in the CNC run in accordance with the
measuring results and not to measure the corresponding characteristic.
NOTICE
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you understand
the following.
You can choose whether to have the condition queried before or after
the characteristic is computed. CALYPSO ascertains whether the condition is fulfilled or not.
If the condition is queried before computation, CALYPSO either computes
the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to
6-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the following:
continue.
2 Select Formula in the context menu of the yellow input field and
enter the condition (see Entering formulas [ 638]).
Note: The only possible return values for the condition are true and
false. Use the comparison operators.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-41
Inserting loops
Processing loops
NOTICE
This section is intended for advanced users who are familiar with the
basics of programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you configure the
base alignment.
If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement plan,
the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several times in succession.
NOTICE
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output parameters.
Loops for characteristics and features are realized in different ways:
6-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
itive increment: greater than the end index; with negative increment:
smaller than the end index), the loop will not be repeated any more.
Nest Level
LOOP1
()
round
LOOP2
[]
square
LOOP3
<>
angle
LOOP4
{}
brace
CALYPSO
6-43
Note: The PCM Technology option allows you to define input and
output parameters for the loop. To do so, click Settings.
4 If necessary, enter an abortion condition.
Note: You can define only one abortion condition per loop.
The loop will be executed in the next CNC run.
To ensure that something happens each time the loop is run, you have
to use the LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) loop variable in the characteristic and/or in
the features to vary the measurement run.
For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant offset
in order to increase an X value step by step.
6-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-45
5 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value for Real
number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting from the
loop placed around the characteristic.
6 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
7 Click OK to close the feature template.
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measuring run
(see Running a measurement plan [ 72]).
6-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If, for example, coordinate system A uses the feature called 3-D Line1
and coordinate system B also uses a feature of this name, 3-D Line1 is
not measured again when coordinate system B is measured if you used
the same type of brackets when you defined the two iterations in the
Loop window. CALYPSO assumes that the line has already been measured and that it does not have to be measured again.
You have to use brackets of a different type to ensure that the 3-D
Line1 is measured again when coordinate system B is aligned. You could
do this, for example, by selecting round brackets ( and ) for loop 1
and angle brackets < and > for loop 2.
CALYPSO
6-47
The external batch file must have a certain name and must be stored in
a certain directory. Then, it is executed in a certain CNC run situation.
You do not need to call up the file in the measurement plan.
If several batch files with the same name exist, the files are processed in
the following order:
Batch file in the current actual values directory (if this deviates from
the measurement plan directory)
Batch file in the current actual values directory (if this deviates from
the general directory for measurement plans)
NOTICE
By saving external batch files with the corresponding names in the general directory for measurement plans, you change the run of all measurement plans on the system without having changed the measurement
plans.
NOTICE
If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the
same way. For more information, please refer to Run control with external
PCM files in the operating instructions for the PCM Technology option.
6-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
File name
Inspection_pre_start_dialog.bat
inspection_post_load.bat
inspection_start.bat
After the end of the measurement; during the run after measurement_end.bat
features prior to the computation of characteristics
After the end of the computation, but prior to the report/ calculation_end.bat
file output (not during the run with a selection of features)
After the end of the run and the report output
inspection_end.bat
61212-2011002
inspection_pre_save.bat
CALYPSO
6-49
Advantages of macros
Recurring measuring
jobs
Macros make it easier for you to create and handle recurring measuring
jobs:
You can measure multiple features, i.e. features with recurring but
varying fundamental quantities (e.g. stepped cylinders, stepped pyramids, rows of holes with increasing radius).
You can program measuring jobs that are repeated on different workpieces.
Distributed preparation
of measurement plans
Information
In an info file, you can include for each macro information about its function or parameters or also a technical drawing.
6-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The name of the macro is formed from the name of the macro measurement plan and a running counter. Example: If the macro measurement
plan is named Deep Hole, the (first such a) macro in the current measurement plan is named Deep Hole_1.
You can treat the macro the same way as any other elements in the
measurement plan, i.e. you can move and rename it.
Permissible coordinate
systems
The selection of coordinate systems for the macro depends on the macro.
The following coordinate systems are excluded:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-51
the PCM parameters (presettings) that you assigned to the macro (as
a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan (only with the
PCM Technology option).
the presettings of the macro measurement plan (only with the PCM
Technology option).
the postsettings of the macro measurement plan (only with the PCM
Technology option).
the PCM parameters (output settings) that you assigned to the macro
(as a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan (only with
the PCM Technology option).
The order thus results from the nesting of the individual units.
Separate parameters
The transfer parameters and PCM parameters of the macro are logically
separated from the parameters of the measurement plan. This permits
parameters with the same name to exist in both the measurement plan
and in the macro without this leading to misinterpretations.
CALYPSO treats them as two different parameters: Parameter a of the
macro named Test is known as Test.a parameter in the measurement plan. This allows CALYPSO to access the PCM parameters of the
macro by reading them from the measurement plan.
6-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-53
Creating a macro
To create a macro, first create a normal measurement plan and then
save it as a macro.
If the measurement plan contains variable values, these must be assigned
initial values.
1 Open the measurement plan you wish to use as a macro.
2 Select File Macro Define Macro Parameters and edit the
list of macro parameters:
Create a list of all variable values in the measurement plan. To do
so, click Automatic.
Enter a default value for each parameter.
3 Save the measurement plan as a macro.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro to save the macro with the name of the open measurement plan.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro
as... to save the macro under any name.
Note: The macro is not integrated as a reference. Instead, it is permanently integrated as a copy of the selected macro. This means that
changes in the original macro measurement plan are not automatically
made in the integrated macro.
1 Open the measurement plan into which you want to integrate the
macro.
2 Highlight the element behind which you want to add the macro in the
list of characteristics or features.
3 Select File Macro Integrate Macro and open the desired
macro.
4 Enter the desired values in the definition template of the macro:
A different coordinate system if you want to move the entire macro
with all its features.
Valid values for all transfer parameters (also as formula).
Note: You can no longer change the names of the transfer parameters
and the comments.
5 Press OK to confirm.
6-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
6-55
NOTICE
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed.
Updating a macro
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed. If you have made
changes to a macro and want these changes to work in a measurement
plan in which the macro has already been integrated, you will therefore
have to update the macro.
What happens during the macro update?
Note: Only if you have ticked the Rename macros during update
with separators check box in the Settings for macros, the feature
names will also be changed in the macros according to the current
definition.
6-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
Toolboxes
What are toolboxes?
A toolbox contains icons for certain measurement plan features and thus
simplifies the structure of a measurement plan: You can easily insert icons
into a measurement plan.
You create custom toolboxes. To do so, select those measurement plan
features that you require most frequently.
The master toolbox includes all features, characteristics and utilities
as well as the super characteristics added and selected by you.
NOTICE
You cannot change a toolbox subsequently. You can only delete it and
start it again from scratch.
Creating toolboxes
You create a toolbox in the master toolbox.
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and select the master toolbox in
the Tool Box Selector window.
The Tool Box Builder window appears on the screen.
CALYPSO
6-57
Toolboxes
3 Now you can assemble your elements: Click and hold the left mouse
button on the desired toolbox button and drag it over to the right
column.
You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox.
4 To delete an item, select Delete from the context menu of the item.
5 Select File Save to save the toolbox.
Deleting a toolbox
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and open the Tool Box Builder
window.
2 Select File Delete.
3 In the list of custom toolboxes, click the toolbox you wish to highlight,
then click OK.
Super characteristics
What are super characteristics?
Super characteristics are elements in the toolbox which are created from
existing measurement plan macros. You can then drag these super characteristics to the measurement plan area in the same way as the other
toolbox elements to create an executable measurement plan.
A special aspect of this is that the actual measurement plan is created by
programming at the same time when you drag the macro to the measurement plan area. You are guided from one probing to another and the
nominals in the features are determined by the probings.
6-58
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
NOTICE
It is not possible to measure super characteristics on horizontal-arm
CMMs (HAM). This function is also not suitable for measurements with
optical sensors.
Purpose of the function
Super characteristics allow you to measure workpieces or parts of workpieces of a certain shape. CALYPSO recognizes the dimensions and other
parameters via probing and thus determines the nominals in the features.
Any existing nominals in the macro are ignored.
The nominal geometry of the new feature is derived from the computed
feature and rounded with the rounding measure defined in the default
settings.
It is thus possible to use a generally defined feature for measurements on
objects with different dimensions.
Example
For example, you have prepared a measurement plan macro which is intended for the measurement of the distance between two circles. You
define a super characteristic from this macro. By dragging this super
characteristic to the measurement plan area, the measurement plan starts
immediately and probings are performed. Then the nominals are determined in the measurement plan via the probings and from the dimensions
of the probed workpiece.
Next time, the dimensions can be completely different.
What is applied?
The characteristics, the features and the alignments are adopted from the
macro. Constructions and recalls are computed from the measured construction elements.
Compared with the simple automatic feature recognition, it is possible to
predefine general characteristics for features that still have to be measured.
The measurement strategies and all strategies are not applied. A strategy
point is created for each probing performed in the manual run.
The currently selected stylus represents the stylus entered in the newly
created feature.
If you change the stylus configuration during the measurement and use
it for probing, a new clearance group is added of which the stylus configuration corresponds to the selected stylus.
Characteristics which contain nominals are recomputed once the necessary features have been measured.
Unsuitable features
Free form surface - CAD models are not adopted from the macro.
Points with the Space Point or Net Point space point mode the
determined point must be projected on the nominal for the computation of the computed feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-59
Toolboxes
6-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
2 Select the super characteristics you wish to remove from the Tool Box
Builder and click OK.
The super characteristics are removed.
NOTICE
By removing a super characteristic from the Tool Box Builder, only the
link to the macro is removed. The macro itself remains unchanged.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-61
Toolboxes
Run sequence
During probing, the list of features is processed in succession. If an alignment is necessary, it will be determined according to the definition in the
list of characteristics. Then the run for the features will continue.
Feature
Special feature
Circle on Cone
If the feature does not contain any alignment, CALYPSO cannot determine the correct space axis automatically.
Angle Point
Radius Point
Sphere Point.
General Curve
Patterns
If the macro contains features with pattern, CALYPSO measures the first
feature of the pattern and applies the pattern as defined. You must check
whether the pattern of the macro fits the new measurement plan.
Projection planes
Theoretical features
Theoretical features must be checked as these features are directly adopted from the macro.
Formulas
6-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
Clearance groups
Once the feature has been generated, the clearance group will be computed. Since CALYPSO cannot compute the correct clearance group in
individual cases, you must check the clearance groups of the new features
subsequently.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-63
You may be able to optimize the travel paths, depending on the geometry
of the workpiece and the resulting positions of the features.
You have the following options for checking and optimizing travel paths:
Terms related with this concept include clearance plane, clearance group,
retract plane, clearance distance and retract distance these terms are
explained below.
6-64
Settings for the clearance group (retract plane defined or not, etc.)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Automatic navigation
check
When the navigation check is activated, the end positions, the outer
clearance planes and the rack with the stylus systems are included in the
calculation of the travel paths between the features, each according to
the settings.
You can find more details under Defining additional travel paths and
positions [ 672].
The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance planes are defined (see Defining the clearance planes [ 356]). The normals of
the clearance planes bear designations corresponding to the direc-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-65
Retract planes
Certain geometric conditions require a retract plane for the clearance
group. The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
CP+Z
Retract plane
SCP+Z2
6-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-67
Check the clearance planes, the clearance distance and the retract
distance in the definition template of the feature (more information
can be found in the Online Help under Clearance data).
The criterion for the correct clearance plane is the position of the
probe relative to the clearance planes (on the approach to the first
intermediate position of the feature in question).
NOTICE
Other travel paths might be generated, depending on the characteristics
selected or if the run takes place without a result reset.
If routing turns out to be poor, click Help in the Start Measurement window and proceed in accordance with the instructions.
6-68
Minimizing travel paths in feature group (see in the Online Help under
Selecting feature group for sorting).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
6-69
3 Type in the height of the retract plane relative to the datum of the
base alignment (perpendicular to the higher-order clearance plane).
4 Press OK to confirm.
6-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Z
Y
Measuring
volume
Outer
clearance
planes
Clearance
planes
Changing the point list [ 4170]. This will help you, for example,
to define optimum probing points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-71
6-72
In certain cases, e.g. when the end positions are reached, you can also
define the swivel position.
You can define additional travel paths in clearance groups for special
feature positions.
You can define a park position for the end of the CNC run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
All additional paths and positions can be defined and edited in a similar
way using the strategy window for paths. Call up the strategy window,
select the strategies as features of the strategy list and edit the strategies.
List of path features
CALYPSO manages these paths in a separate list. To display this list, select
Plan Navigation... Navigation Paths List.
Double-click a path in the list to open the corresponding strategy window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-73
Specifications
Remarks
Clearance Plane
Pos. MPrb. MC
1 000 000 / 1 000 000 / -20 The stylus system moves to -20 in the Z
axis of the machine coordinate system.
Pos. MPrb. MC
6-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-75
6-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-1
The CMM must be initialized (you will find more information in the
Online Help under Initializing the CMM [ 1015]).
7-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measuring mini-plans
Masking characteristics
Measuring mini-plans
If you want to repeat certain characteristics and you prefer not to create
a measurement plan group (for example because you do not want a
group named in the default printout), you can create a mini-plan.
Masking characteristics
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-3
Edit Form group combines all marked measurement plan features in a group.
A double click on the icon of the group displays or hides the features
of the group.
Creating mini-plans
There are three ways of creating mini-plans:
7-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-5
Global printout header data refers to the measurement plan and has
to be entered only once for each measurement plan.
The global printout header data includes, for example, the name of
the operator and the name of the measurement plan.
You decide which data to include in the printout header. For more details,
see Preparing printout header data [ 827] and INI file for printout
header data [ 830].
7-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting a measurement
Starting a measurement
CNC run and manual run
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process
modes:
CNC run
The CMM is under the fully automatic control of CALYPSO. A prerequisite is that the CMM installed is CNC-capable. If you have activated the setup mode for a feature, the CNC run will be interrupted
before the feature and you can define further parameters in the strategy of the feature. This is particularly suitable for optical measurements where light and camera settings have to be adjusted.
Manual run
In a manual run, CALYPSO only manages the measurement plan and
tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many probings
to take. As well as probing the features, you also control the CMM.
Both modes of measurement are started from the Start Measurement dialog box. This is where you set the options for the measurement
plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains the parameters
you use to
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-7
Starting a measurement
NOTICE
If you have activated the Setup Mode for certain features in the Measurement Plan Editor Features, the CNC run will be interrupted at
these positions. The feature's strategy opens and you can make settings.
The CNC run will only be continued after you have confirmed the settings.
This is particularly suitable for optical measurements where light and
camera settings have to be adjusted.
Settings
Selection
Base Alignment
Current Alignment
Current Selection
Print plots
Result
CMM
Manual run
Starting a manual run
In a manual run, CALYPSO guides you through the measurement process,
but you have to perform the probing manually. This will be the case, for
example, if you work with a manual CMM.
1 Click the Run Measurement Plan icon.
2 Select Manual from the CMM group under Run Mode.
3 If you want to measure the coordinate system manually as well, go to
the Selection group and select Manual Run for the coordinate
system.
4 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.
You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start
Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Online Help.
7-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting a measurement
5 Tick the Custom printout check box if you want the system to
generate a custom printout.
6 Click OK to start the measurement plan.
CALYPSO steps you through the process: This is done via the Manual
Alignment dialog box.
You can declare the manual run as an automatic run at any time.
You can change the number of nominal probing points if, for example, some points are not accessible, or additional points are to be
probed.
You will find more information under Manual alignment in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-9
Starting a measurement
It is possible to delete the measured values and to repeat the measurement, to continue the measurement or to cancel the run.
Scattering via the control
console
7-10
You can also answer the dialog via the control console:
Answer
Control console
Remeasure
Correction
F3
Continue
OK
Return
CNC Cancel
ESC
ESC
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Continue at missing
probing
CALYPSO's Stop Light (Working with the Stop Light window [ 712]) and (if installed) the Light signal window (Working
with the light signal window [ 719]) dialog boxes are the communication interface between you and the system.
Joystick
You activate the setup mode for a feature in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features. To do so, select the Setup Mode entry from the selection list
and highlight the feature in the list of features. In the Set To selection
menu, select ON.
CALYPSO
7-11
In the Stop Light window, a stylized stop light helps control process flows
and displays important status information.
The Stop Light window is always on view after you start measurement. It
controls communication between the CMM and CALYPSO. It is also the
interface that enables you to intervene in a measurement plan run.
7-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Do not close the Stop Light window, because if you do CALYPSO will lose
contact with the CMM.
However, you can always minimize the Stop Light window or put it behind another window. You can display the Stop Light window permanently in the foreground.
The illustration below shows the Stop Light window:
You can also display the Stop Light window permanently in the foreground via View Always on top.
The following elements that can be activated via the View menu are used
for the control of the measurement plan run:
Stop Light
Base Alignment
Display Position
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-13
Position Display Extension (displays also the rotary table angle and the
A and B angles)
Probing On/Off
If you want to move the views in the Stop Light window, click the Move
Elements icon and position the views as you wish. To exit the movement
mode, click an unoccupied part of the window.
To save the arrangement of views, click the Save view, size and position icon.
Additional windows
Via the More menu, you can open the following windows in the Stop
Light window:
Taskbar
To call other ZEISS programs
Status Monitor
To display and log all routine procedures of CALYPSO
Joy Stick
Call of the CZ Control Panel Extension which allows you to lock
the joystick of any axis (see Locking the axes of the joystick [ 718])
7-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Click red in the Stop Light window or press the ESC key on the control
console (not in case of Dynalog P!).
The CMM immediately cancels the measurement.
You have to click green before you can start a measurement plan again.
Interrupting a run
Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill, but
can continue at some subsequent point in time.
1 In the Stop Light window, click the yellow light.
The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes.
2 To continue the run: Click green.
- or To stop the run for good: Click red.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-15
Button
Function
Continue Run
Cancel Run
7-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: Passive sensors: If you use an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must clear
the stylus before you set the stop light to green. Otherwise, the weight
of the stylus itself is determined incorrectly.
1 In the Stop Light window, click the green light.
The connection between controller and CMM is reestablished.
2 Using the joysticks, carefully move the stylus away from the workpiece
until it reaches a safe position.
Resume your work. To be on the safe side, check the stylus system and
make sure that the stylus is not twisted or damaged.
Note: Passive sensors: If you use an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must clear
the stylus before you set the stop light to green. Otherwise, the weight
of the stylus itself is determined incorrectly.
1 Set the stop light to green.
2 Click the Run Measurement Plan icon.
The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition window appears on the screen.
3 Deactivate the Clear existing results check box.
4 Start the run with OK.
CALYPSO reruns the measurement plan. This time around, however, it
measures only the features for which no measured values were recorded.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-17
Functions
F9
7-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The Configure tool changer rack window opens. A stylized representation of the work area of the DuraMax is displayed.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-19
Configuration in CALYPSO
Initialization of all lamps of the result display (e.g. when starting the
measurement)
Measurement in progress
7-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Call
Depending on the settings, the remark window opens during the CNC
run or, if necessary, afterwards. The window is based on the measurement plan and is saved together with the corresponding measurement
plan.
You can always open it in the corresponding measurement plan after the
measurement using View Information on run. The Information list will then show the problems and events that occurred during
the last CNC run if the list has not been reset before closing the measurement plan.
CALYPSO
7-21
marks and suggestions for solving the problem are provided in the Description text field below.
By clicking one of the entries in the Features concerned list, the corresponding feature in the measurement plan area is selected and by clicking Open or double-clicking, the corresponding feature is opened.
Here, you can make the changes according to the help information in the
Description field.
When you have analyzed and solved the problems that occurred, click
Reset. Thus, all remarks in the list are deleted and the window is closed.
NOTICE
The Clear existing results setting in the Start Measurement window also resets the remark list.
Status after cancellation
Printouts
If the corresponding setting is made, the run-related remarks are summarized in the custom printout and compact printout.
7-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Repeating measurements
Repeating measurements
Use of repeat measurements
Repeat measurements are performed to avoid the transmission of measuring errors to the statistics system. Measuring errors are, for example,
caused by soiled workpieces. In this case, the entire workpiece must be
measured again.
CALYPSO makes it possible to remeasure individual critical characteristics of a workpiece and to combine the new measuring results with the
already correctly measured results.
Repeat measurements are also suitable for the automatic measurement
of several similar workpieces, for example on a pallet. Repeat measurements can also be performed at a later stage. With the aid of the part
number, CALYPSO remembers which parts still cause measuring errors.
The settings for a repeat measurement are stored in the measurement
plan. You will be informed as soon as measuring errors occur. You can
then interactively control the type and number of repeat measurements
and decide which measuring results are to be accepted and which not.
All characteristics that are out of tolerance and that are possibly limited by the badElement Formula function
If you want to limit the critical characteristics according to certain factors, you have to program a PCM function called badElementFormula.
Insert the criterion for the selection of the critical characteristics in this
PCM function.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-23
Repeating measurements
7-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Repeating measurements
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-25
Repeating measurements
The run is then identical to the run of a new series of repeat measurements.
5 Tick the part numbers that are to be measured again in the Reset
part number window.
Parameter
Meaning
Recheck = 0
Recheck = 1
Reset: = 0
No reset
Reset: = 1
Reset
Maximum
You have the following options for entering the PCM function:
7-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Repeating measurements
4 Check the workpiece for dirt or other reasons causing measuring errors.
5 Start the repeat measurement by clicking OK in the Repeat Measurement dialog.
The measurement plan run is performed again. If critical characteristics
still exist, the Select Characteristics for Repeat Measurement dialog is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-27
Repeating measurements
The default printout shows the following information about the repeat
measurement:
Part number
Custom printout
7-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Repeating measurements
after the measurement. The context menu of the CAD window allows
you to display the masked points in red.
Remedy
If for a feature the number of points used for the evaluation is considerably smaller than the nominal number of points, CALYPSO has masked
certain measuring points due to insufficient or excessive measuring force.
For such features, you must correct the scanning speed or define more
precise specifications for the workpiece form or position, e.g. by means
of a discrete-point macro measurement.
Then repeat the measurement.
NOTICE
The remark window assists you in this and similar cases. It makes it possible to open and edit the features concerned quickly (Working with
the remark window [ 721]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-29
Manual measurements
Manual measurements
Surface measurement with single points
You can define the coordinates of certain points by manual probing. To
do so, you must set the Surface measurement with single points mode.
Otherwise, CALYPSO attempts to recognize a feature from the probed
points.
Conditions:
The CAD model for the workpiece is loaded.
1 Select Features Surface measurement with single
points.
CALYPSO switches to the Surface measurement with single points
mode. The Surface measurement with single points dialog
box is opened.
7-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-31
7-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-1
Printouts in CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
Overview of the printouts in CALYPSO
There are single printouts and multiple printouts in CALYPSO.
The default printout, the compact printout and the custom printout
belong to the single printouts.
The results of form and location checks can be represented and output
graphically as a form plot or location plot or as a point list. You can also
output the CAD view as a plot.
You can configure CALYPSO so that printouts and plots or graphics are
output automatically on the screen, the printer or as a PDF file during the
CNC run.
If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in subsequent evaluation runs, you can use the export functionality of CALYPSO
that supports a number of mainstream formats.
Combined evaluations
You can also combine several measurement plans and create combined
assessments (Combining several measurement plans [ 627]). The
measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on
the CMM they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in
the network.
In the Single Printouts mode, you can output the predefined individual printouts such as the default printout, compact printout and
custom printout.
Multiple printouts can be output in the Multiple Printouts mode. Multiple printouts represent any combinations of default, compact and
custom printouts and of individual printouts created via the PiWeb
Basic Reporter.
NOTICE
Most options are available in the Multiple Printouts mode as these
printouts include all types of single printouts.
Default printout
8-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
the measurement plan and of all elements are also output. To do so, the
PCM option is not necessary.
If you want to output the deviations in the Amount mode, the corresponding column has the heading Dev. <->. <->.
Compact printout
The Compact Printout is shorter than the default printout. It lists the
characteristics together with the measured features for quick assessment.
The contents and representation of the compact printout can be configured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-3
Printouts in CALYPSO
8-4
The contents and representation of the Custom Printout can be configured. Furthermore, you can influence the layout of parts of the custom
printout.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
Multiple printout
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-5
Printouts in CALYPSO
8-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
Preparing printouts
Outputting printouts
during the CNC run
You can define the basic structure and the layout of the custom printout and compact printout by means of the printout format editors
under Resources Design custom printout (Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts [ 821]).
NOTICE
To define which options can be selected or deselected in the Result area,
select Resources Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
Outputting printouts
again
If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the corresponding menu item in the View menu (Displaying and printing
printouts [ 813]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-7
Printouts in CALYPSO
Printouts
Compact Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
Custom Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
Default Printout:
You can run the default printout in the background.
Excel report:
Define the desired report type for output to Excel.
Output to DMIS:
For the result output in DMIS format, you can select a dmi file for the
DMIS header.
Defining a printout
1 Select Resources Define printout.
The Format custom printout dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Define on the index cards the scope and sequence of the features in
the printout.
Note: The settings are only effective when the Multiple Printouts
function is not activated. By default, CALYPSO creates a default printout after each evaluation. You define any additional printouts to be
output in the Start Measurement window.
8-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
For more information, see Format custom printout in the CALYPSO dialog
reference in the Online Help.
You can define and manage your multiple printouts in the Definition
of Multiple Printouts dialog box:
You define here the single printouts and Basic Reports that should form
your multiple printouts. You can define the basic structure, layout, contents, output media, output format, etc. for each printout (Creating
multiple printouts [ 810]).
Creating individual
printout templates
Outputting printouts
during the CNC run
After starting the CNC run, select the prepared multiple printout to be
output in the Result area in the Start Measurement window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-9
Printouts in CALYPSO
If the check box is unticked, the print definitions of the multiple printout are ignored. No printout is printed.
The same applies to other options such as EXCEL reports, PDF, etc.
NOTICE
The options that should be selectable in the Result area can be defined
under Resources Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
Outputting printouts
again
If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the corresponding menu item in the View menu (Displaying and printing
printouts [ 813]).
8-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
1. Creating/selecting a multiple
printouts
2. Selecting characteristics and
printout header parameters
3. Defining the single printouts to be
created
4. Defining the single printout
2 Click Create New Multiple Printout and enter the desired name.
- or 3 Select the multiple printout to be edited from the list under Multiple
Printout.
4 To remove the results of certain characteristics from certain printout
features click Mark characteristics for hiding.
5 Select the characteristics that should all be hideable under the preset
Mark function in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
You can then select the Hide option for each individual printout
feature for which the marked characteristics are to be hidden.
Note: You can define additional output features for individual characteristics in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
window (see Measurement plan editor characteristics).
6 To define the selection of the printout header parameters that are to
be entered: Click Select printout header parameters for input and select the desired printout header parameters for input at
CNC start and in the measurement plan.
7 Select under Printout Features the elements to be included in the
multiple printout and edit their structure.
- or -
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-11
Printouts in CALYPSO
er [ 92]
10Click Display Multiple Printout Now to check the result of your
modifications.
The function is active only if results are already available.
11Press OK to confirm.
NOTICE
You will find detailed information on all functions of the dialog box in
the Online Help under Definition of multiple printouts.
If you have installed MS Excel 2000, you will also be able to output the
measuring results in the form of an Excel report. Three predefined reports
are available in the <user directory>\data\excel_report directory:
8-12
1 In the Single Printouts mode: Open the User Defined Pages window (Resources Define printout) and click the Select EXCEL
Report button on the Default Printout / Warning Limit tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
Experienced MS Excel users can modify the existing report files and create
their own.
After starting the CNC run, select the printouts to be output and define
whether they are to be printed in the Result group in the Start Measurement window.
It is possible to create the printouts again at any time after the CNC run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-13
Printouts in CALYPSO
Icon
Function
Show default printout
Print default printout
Examples of printouts
Overview: Examples of printouts
The following help topics show some examples of printouts:
8-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-15
Printouts in CALYPSO
8-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-17
Printouts in CALYPSO
8-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Printouts in CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-19
Printouts in CALYPSO
8-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The custom printout is your way of presenting measuring results, for example, to a customer or client. You can generate your own custom printouts tailored to your needs and preferences or to those of your client.
Custom printouts are ideal for attractive graphical presentations. They
consist of the contents of various graphic files.
Compact printout
The output format of the compact printout is automatically predefined by the output format for the custom printout.
You can customize the header of the compact printout via the Printout format editor.
Contents
Edit under
Printout header
Workpiece
Measurement data
etc.
Header line
Printout area
Characteristics
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe results of the characteristics.
out Characteristic Editor
File name: cffra.gra
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-21
Area
Contents
Edit under
Messelemente
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe results of the features.
out Feature Editor
File name: me.gra
Resources Design custom printout Characteristic Group Editor
Characteristic
groups
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe datums of the coordinate sys- out Characteristic Editor
tem.
File name: cfpos.gra
User-definable
pages
any
Printout header
compact printout
global dummies. You enter these dummies once for each measurement plan (such as the part number, for instance), while others(e.g.
time, measurement plan name) are automatically filled in by CALYPSO.
For more information, please refer to Preparing printout header data [ 827].
8-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon of
characteristi
Histogram
Name of
char.
Deviation from
tolerance
Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower tolerances, the printout contains further information:
Printout header
Header lines
Characteristics
Features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-23
Characteristic groups
NOTICE
You need some experience with drawing programs in order to use the
editor.
Graphic
toolbox
Drawing area
Special toolbox
The functions of the printout format editor do not differ greatly from
those of conventional drawing programs. They are not described in detail
in the following.
The special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can
insert into the custom printout. These are filled either automatically by
CALYPSO while the measurement is in progress, or manually by the operator. The special toolbox of the characteristics contains two tabs. On
one tab, you will find the characteristic attributes.
8-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The graphic toolbox contains icons representing the usual graphics tools
for drawing simple graphics elements, and for inserting complete graphic
files (such as a company logo, for example) into the custom printout.
The info bar contains information on size of image, working directory and
current scaling.
The toolbar allows you to access a selection of commands for controlling
the printout format editor.
Menu
Menu item
Function
File
New
Save
Save as...
Open
Format
Edit
Draw
Close
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All
Duplicate
Make Polygon
New
Number
Field
Text Field
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-25
Menu
Menu item
Function
Table Output
Graphics
Fill Color
Border Color
Line Width
Properties
Width...
Height...
Object Name...
Object Visability...
Bring
Forward
To Front
Send
Background
To Back
Group
View
8-26
For Symbols
For Comments
Group
Ungroup
Ungroups a group.
Align...
Refresh
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Grid Off
Define Grid
Scale Feature
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Menu
Menu item
Function
Reset Page
Select Objects
Local data: You enter this data each time you start a measurement
plan.
Global data: You enter this data once only for each measurement
plan.
CALYPSO provides other information for the printout header data (such
as tester, date, etc.), which cannot be modified.
In addition, you can define your own printout header fields and, if necessary, their input mode and value (Defining your own printout header
data [ 828]).
Playing a video
To play a video about Inserting your own logo into the printout header,
click 003_e_Protkopf_aendern/003_2_demo.htm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-27
Printout header
data
Type
Subsequently entered
SYS
local/global
EDIT
global
once only per measurement plan under Resources Printout header parameters
START
local
for each measurement plan start in the Start Measurement dialog box, see Entering local printout header data [ 76]
OTHER
local/global
8-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The type and length of parameters or selection lists are defined in this
file.
You can also activate and edit this file. (INI file for printout header
data [ 830]).
NOTICE
If a variable defined in the userfields.ini file was already defined in the
userfields.txt file, the definitions in the userfields.ini file will overwrite
those from the userfields.txt file.
You activate this file by renaming the xxx_userfields.txt file you received
in the <user directory>protocol\protform directory to userfields.txt.
NOTICE
If an INI file [ 830] called userfields.ini is present in addition to the
userfields.txt file, its settings will overwrite those of the userfields.txt file.
Supplementing file
To define an additional input field, add one line with the following elements, separated by commas:
Element
Meaning
Labels
Identifier
Display control
Examples:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE
u_field2,FELD 2,R
u_field3,FELD 3,E
The newly defined fields have been added to the selection column of the
printout header fields.
Print Results
The entered values will appear in the printout header of the custom printout and the compact printout.
The identifications (e.g. u_field1) and the appropriate values will be
output in the table file (*_hdr.txt).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-29
The settings in this file will overwrite the settings of any existing TEXT
file [ 829] named userfields.txt.
If no INI file is active, any parameter can be entered for the printout header
data.
Activating file
You activate this file by renaming the zzz_userfields.ini file you received
in the <user directory>\protocol\protform directory to userfields.ini.
The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values for
one option are entered with separating commas. If a value itself contains one or more commas, this value must be placed in quotes (").
Example: <option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values <option>="X,Y,Z" means one value
8-30
For the userfields.ini file, the following has been agreed for the section
and option names:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
<option>
<value>
= <pname>
editMode
= true
false
runMode
= true
false
selectiveList
= true
false
Otherwise
When a value for the field is to be queried on
CNC start
Otherwise
For input via combo box or selection list
Otherwise
= <aname>
editable
= true
Combo box
false
Selection list
= <dvalue>
type
= A or a
F or f
I or iI3 or i3I5
or i5I10 or i10
maxLength
= <dvalue>
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-31
<option>
maximumValue
<value>
= <value>
minimumValue
= <value>
forbiddenAnywhere
= "string"
Characters which are not allowed in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt file overwrites this indication.
forbiddenFirst
= "string"
forbiddenLast
= "string"
Each combo box and each selection list is assigned as a value of the
selectiveListValues option the name of the section in which the individual entries of the list appear line by line.
Each line in this section has the form <option>=<value>. The options
are entered in the protheadpara file; the assigned values, on the other
hand, are displayed in the relevant list.
NOTICE
This enables, for example, the entry of numerical values as UserIDs in the
protheadpara file for further processing, whereas the user names are
displayed in the Input Parameters window.
Then the user selects its user name but the UserID is entered in the protheadpara file.
Input check
If the type and maxLength entries are available, CALYPSO checks when
entering or changing the corresponding parameter whether the data type
and length are complied with and issues a message in case of non-compliance.
If the type, maximumValue and minimumValue entries are available, CALYPSO checks when entering or changing the corresponding parameter
whether the data type and value range are complied with and issues a
message in case of non-compliance.
If the directory of the userfields.ini file contains a forbiddenChars.txt file, the entries of the latter are used to check the alphanumeric
inputs. If the section contains lines with forbiddenAnywhere, forbiddenFirst or forbiddenLast, these indications overwrite those of the forbiddenChars.txt file.
8-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-33
8-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-35
In the drawing area, click the position where you want to insert the
object.
4 Save the template:
Select File Format and enter the desired format.
Select File Save As and save the template under a new name.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the
Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you want
8-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
to position the field. Delete the word Tool from the label and type
Pallet number instead.
4 Close and save the printout header you edited.
5 Open the list of characteristics.
6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted and select Parameter in the context menu.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Under Presettings, enter the following:
PALLET=inquire("Enter the pallet number: ")
setRecordHead("tooldf",PALLET)
Explanation: What is found in the tooldf variable is output into the
pallet number printout header field.
The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user is
prompted to enter the pallet number.
The effect of the second line is that the number entered in this way is
assigned to the tooldf variable and is thus subsequently printed in
the printout under pallet number.
Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan, which
means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
Name of field
Labels
SYS
Operator
operid
Date
date
Short date
dateshort
Time
time
CMM type
dmeid
Device Administration
devicegropup
CMM No.
dmesn
Control Type
controllertyp
Software ID
dmeswi
dmeswv
Measurement Plan ID
planid
CT dataset
pointCloudFile
Extent of run
measRun
Page
actpgnr
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-37
Data group
EDIT
OTHER
8-38
Name of field
Labels
From
nrpgs
Length unit
lengthunit
palletlocationnumber
Name
partid
Department:
vda_departm
Telephone/Fax/E-Mail
vda_phone
Number
vda_number
Tolerance Mode
deviationmode
deviationmodekey
Temperature workpiece
temperatureworkpiece
Temperature scale X
temperaturescalex
Temperature scale Y
temperaturescaley
Temperature scale Z
temperaturescalez
temperaturebasesystem
Meas. Duration
durationofrun
Decimals printout
outdecimalunits
Language Recognition
languageid
MMC/LMC-Mode
mmcmode
mccplanversion
Part Name
partid
Drawing No.
drawingno
Workpiece Rev.
partrv
partsn
partcomment
Clamp ID
clmpid
Clamp No.
clmpsn
Fixture
fixtid
Fixture No.
fixtsn
Previous Operation
prevop
Creation Date
creationdate
Revision Date
changedate
Created By (operator)
produceoper
Changed By (operator)
changeoper
creationswi
creationdme
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Data group
Name of field
Labels
START
partnbinc
Part No.
partnbLong
Start Comment
startcomment
Order
order
Tool
tooldf
Process Plan
mfgdev
Lot ID
partnbLong
Test ID
lotid
Pallet location
palletlocation
Pallet ID
palletid
Audit-No.
vda_auditno
Version
vda_version
Subject Number
vda_subjno
Remark:
vda_remark
Name
vda_name
Signature:
vda_signature
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-39
This section provides you with information on the output of form and
location plots via the Graphics Element utility in the measurement
plan.
Form and location plots can also be output from within certain characteristics. You define the output of the corresponding plot in the definition
template of the characteristic. For more information, please see Outputting form and location plots for characteristics [ 872].
Examples
For examples of selected form and location plots, please refer to Examples of form and location plots [ 844].
8-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Printout header
2 Plots
3 Data table
Graphics forms with
printout header and data
table
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-41
Output of graphics
Suitable diagrams are predefined as single templates for the representation of form and location plots. If necessary, you can change
existing single templates and create new ones in the graphics editor
(Creating single templates with the graphics editor [ 860]).
To improve the comparison of measuring results, it is possible to summarize the measuring results of several characteristics of the same
type in one diagram (Grouping characteristics), e.g. several roundness checks.
Graphics can be displayed and output to the printer during the CNC run.
CALYPSO displays graphics in the Calypso Formplots window. This
window allows, e.g. printing and output as a PDF file as well as other
evaluation options (Working with the plot window [ 870]).
8-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-43
Single templates
Pie chart
Line plot
8-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic / Feature
Roundness Ref
Single templates
Pie chart
Line plot
Straightness
Straightness Ref
Flatness
Line plot
Line plot
Line plot
See Form plot for flatness [ 846]
Plane plot
Flatness Ref
Line plot
See Form plot for flatness [ 846]
Plane plot
Cylindricity
Pie chart
See Multiple circle form plot for cylindricity [ 847]
Cylinder plot
Line plot
Surface line plot
See Surface line plots for cylindricity [ 847]
See Straightness plot for surface lines [ 850]
Curve Form
Line plot
See Form plot for curve form [ 851]
Curve plot
See Form plot for curve form [ 851]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-45
Characteristic / Feature
Circular pitch
Linear Pitch
Single templates
Pitch plot
See Pitch plot [ 859]
Pitch plot
See Pitch plot [ 859]
My templates
You can use the standard templates or create and name your own templates. The graphics editor allows you to create and edit your own templates (Creating single templates with the graphics editor [ 860]).
Adjusting a plot
In this plot window, you can define additional settings for the representation and the scope of display (points, segments). (Working with the
plot window [ 870]).
8-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The single template allows you to determine whether the measuring values are to be mirrored. Thus, the deviations from the nominal values are
removed in the opposite direction: Positive deviations become negative
and negative deviations become positive.
The multiple circle form plot shows the individual circular sections with
different radii in concentric form. If you do not wish the representation
with different radii, open the Define graphics output window and
activate Stack Multi Plots. The circles will then be plotted one upon
the other in the colors set.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-47
The surface line plot shows individual surface line section segments with
magnified representation of the deviations.
The example shows a surface line plot with four surface lines. The surface
lines that are opposite to each other are represented in the same color:
8-48
Surface lines
left
blue
90
left
purple
180
right
blue
270
right
purple
In the basic settings, the surface lines in the plot are all displayed in the
same color.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To open the Segment window, click Segment Selection in the Define graphics output window.
In the Segment window you define the surface lines to be represented.
The different segments have consecutive numbers in the Segment window. These numbers result from the order of the segments in the measurement strategy.
Example
With the strategy you first measure a circular section and then two surface
lines. The following segments are displayed in the Segment window:
Number of the segment
Segment type
001
002
Circular section
003
Scale factor
With the scale factor in the Data group you define the distance between
the represented surface lines.
The plots contain coordinate axes with mm scale. You can determine the
exact position of a deviation on the workpiece by using the rotary table
angle, the angle of the surface line and the determined height in the form
plot. The rotary table angle is stated in the data table in the Define
graphics output window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-49
Navigation
Tools
Help
Page 1 of 1
Zoom:
Calypso
5.5.0116
Part Number
13
Date
Carl Zeiss
Order
Regression 2.0
Drawing No.
Department
CMM Type
Prismo
Operator
Master
Signature
Meas. Plan Name
Testblock1
Nr
Identifier
Actual [mm]
Tolerance
[mm]
Number
of Points
Vmess
[mm/s]
Stylus Radius
[mm]
F.Typ
L-C
UPR
You can change the size, the inclination and the number of automatic
surface lines.
It is possible to show the rear side of the cylinder weakly or to hide it.
8-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Selecting segments
To open the Segment window, click Segment Selection in the Define graphics output window.
In the Segment window you define the segments to be represented.
The different segments have consecutive numbers in the Segment window. These numbers result from the order of the segments in the measurement strategy.
Example: With the strategy you first measure a circular section and then
two surface lines. The following segments are displayed in the Segment
window:
Graphics output
Segment type
001
Circular section
002
003
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-51
Selectable projection
plane
You can select the projection plane and its orientation for the representation of the curve form plot:
X/Y
Y/X
X/Z
Z/X
Y/Z
Z/Y
The first axis is the horizontal axis and the second axis is the vertical axis.
Scaling curve
You can differently scale the representation of the curve in the X, Y and
Z direction.
Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window
where you can make additional settings for the representation and the
scope of display (points, segments).
8-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The points projected onto the plane are shown on the location plot.
The nominal and actual positions of the bores are marked by crosses
which are connected by lines.
At each nominal position, the deviation of the actual value from the
nominal value and a designation are shown.
You can define the type and color of the crosses as well as the labeling
and the font.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-53
The best fit result includes the data table. The magnification is shown
below the scale.
Curve plot
8-54
Curve plot
Line plot
2-curve plot
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
A curve plot shows the deviation between the nominal distance and the
actual distance in graphic form. It is not a representation of the actually
measured values and does not show the form of the workpiece.
The following applies to the standard template:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-55
Line plot
The line plot shows the difference between the actual distance and the
nominal distance for each measuring point based on the first measuring
point.
The largest and the smallest deviations are identified by a red circle.
2-curve plot
8-56
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Please note that contact between or intersection of the curves is possible
in the case of magnified representation, although no real contact or intersection takes place. To determine the actual curve distance, the representation must not be magnified.
NOTICE
If the nominal curves are not identical or the magnification is very large,
the tolerance lines might not be completely visible in the plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-57
Nominal curves are displayed as gray lines. If, as shown in the example
above, they are identical, the lines are superimposed.
The largest and smallest distances between the curves are identified
by red circles.
8-58
the contact lines: the auxiliary line through both contact points as well
as the parallel line through the circle center
the contact point lines from the circle center to the nominal and actual
contact points
the contact point tolerance from the circle center passing the nominal
contact points on the left and right
the orientation line: the angle bisecting line between the angle spanned by the contact points and the circle center
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The bend circles represent the curvature of the curve in the contact points.
They are drawn near the corresponding contact point.
You can set the following properties:
Pitch plot
CALYPSO provides a pitch plot.
Contents of the pitch
plot
In the pitch plot, the pitch features activated in the measurement plan
are shown in the following order:
Individual pitch
Cumulative pitch
Pitch error
Radial runout
Roundness
Extreme points
Use Extreme points visible to define that the largest positive and the
largest negative deviation is marked by small red triangles.
Coordinate axes
You may use linear or logarithmic scaling for the Y axis; linear scaling must
always be used for the X axis. The color of the coordinate axes is determined by the Pen: Basegrid property. The color and the font of the
labeling of the axes is defined via Text: Font.
Limits
The tolerance and warning limits are drawn in the plot. The color of the
lines are determined via the Pen: Tolerances and Pen: Warning level properties. If a property is not to be shown, you must set the corresponding color to transparent.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-59
8-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-61
[ 863]
Magnified representation of the deviations [ 865]
Outputting variables in graphics [ 864]
6 Save your changes.
Saving changes of single templates [ 866]
8-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 If the result is satisfactory, you can save your changes to the clipboard
by clicking Apply.
5 To start from the beginning, click the Reset button.
CALYPSO undoes all changes made since the last time the settings
were saved or saved to the clipboard.
Note: To maintain a clear structure of the property list, the graphics
editor shows by default only the most important properties of an element. To display all properties, activate the Extended option in the
title bar.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-63
You insert a text field in the single template and enter the desired text in
the Text property field.
You can insert in the text:
own system variables with any values (free texts, formulas, etc.)
8-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In the Define graphics output dialog box, select the New... list
item in the Parameter / Any Input selection list.
The New Text / New Number input field is opened.
3 Enter a name in the Name input field.
4 Enter a value via the Value field or a formula via the context menu.
5 Select the format in the Format field.
You can select between Text, Integer, Scalar, Length, Angle and Temperature.
6 Press OK to confirm.
Editing variables
CALYPSO
8-65
The yellow background color tells you that a formula is used and that the
Magnification Factor defined in the property window is ignored.
Using magnification
8-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
CALYPSO uses functions of PiWeb for the printout header editor. Only
limited functions are available in CALYPSO.
Calling the printout
header editor
Select Resources Design custom printout Printout Header Editor for Graphics Feature... to open the printout header editor.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-67
The type of a plot and its orientation are defined in a PTX file. To open a
file in the printout header editor, select File Open Report. The PTX
files are located in the <user directory>\protocol\formplott\PlotControlFiles\templates directory.
At the left margin of the window, click the Pages button to open the
list of existing pages.
Master page
The master page is used to ensure a uniform appearance for all pages of
your report. Elements of the master page are grayed out on all report
pages in the screen view.
NOTICE
All entries made on the master page become immediately active when
you quit the master page. To carry out additional modifications, call the
master page again.
The Properties tab allows you to deactivate the validity of the master
page for individual pages of the report. Untick the Use Master Page
check box.
Report page
Features
Image
Line
Text
Container
The elements can be edited either via the context menu or the Properties tab.
Properties tab
The Properties tab allows you to show and define all properties of the
elements. The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the
status bar of the list.
Image elements
Text elements
The context menu and the Properties tab allow you to insert variables
such as the current time or the current page number in each text element.
8-68
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the status bar of
the Properties index card. A short description of the active property is
displayed in the lower field on the index card.
Assigning properties
In the drawing area, you can activate elements by clicking them and define their properties via the Properties index card. The modifications
become immediately active and are displayed in the drawing area.
Assigning variables to
text elements
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-69
Paging
You can move between the pages of the graphic using the Navigate
menu.
Zoom
The slider of the zoom at the top right corner of the toolbar allows you
to zoom the view of the plot in and out.
Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window. In
this window, you can define additional settings for the representation
and the scope of display (points, segments).
Info mode
Click with the mouse in the info mode (Tools Info mode) to display
details on the individual points/segments. Information on the characteristic, segment, upper and lower tolerance, deviation, angle and status is
displayed.
8-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To save the graphic as a PDF file in any directory, select File Save
report as PDF.
NOTICE
Measurement plans created with older versions of CALYPSO can also be
saved as a PTX file. The current measurement plans only allow the saving
as a PDF file.
Page information
Select Tools Page Information to display the size of the paper and
the orientation used for the plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-71
Graphic
You can also output form and location plots via the Graphics Element utility. For more information, please see Outputting form and
location plots with the graphics elements [ 840].
Certain form plots are available for the following characteristics via the
definition template for the characteristic:
Straightness
Flatness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot [ 881] for this.
Roundness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot [ 881] for this.
8-72
Cylindricity
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you have
created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical form.
Location plots for characteristics
Certain location plots are available for the following characteristics via the
definition template for the characteristic:
Runout
Radial runout of circles
Total radial runout of cylinders
Axial runout or total axial runout of planes
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you have
created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical form.
CAD window as a plot
You can also freeze the representation in the CAD window and output
it as a drawing with spatial effect in a plot (Outputting the CAD view
as a plot [ 878]).
CALYPSO
8-73
Output of a form or location plot must be activated in the characteristic in question (Activating form and location plots [ 875]).
The desired type of plot (the format file) must be selected and the
desired properties of the form plot must have been set (Setting the
type and properties of the plot [ 876]).
The feature must exceed at least one of the values set in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
You can output the form and location plots created during the CNC run
as a PDF. To do so, you must activate the output as a PDF in the Result
To File window.
All form and location plots displayed during the CNC run are output.
The PDF files are assigned a name which is composed of the measurement
plan name, the part number and the _gra suffix and are saved in the
<user directory>\workarea\results directory.
8-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
8-75
8-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-77
This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can now
display the form or location plots of other characteristics together with
the current form or location plot. Select the desired characteristic.
5 Press OK to confirm.
A condition for output of a CAD model is that you have previously created
the desired CAD model with its parameters (zoom factor, scope of model,
rotation angle, offset, magnifying factor etc.) in the CAD window and
saved it using CAD View Save View.
You activate the output of the CAD window as a plot in exactly the same
way as the form or location plot using the Graphic icon in the definition
template of the characteristic. Then select CAD View as the format. A
selection of possible CAD views appears. The current view has the name
model. Other previously saved views appear with their file names.
Select the desired view in the list and click the Plot button.
File name
Multiroundness
multiroundness
cz_mr.gra
multiroundness
cz_mr_t.gra
Plot type
Roundness
8-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
multiroundness
cz_mr_dia.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalysis
cz_fo.gra
3D Flatness View
flatness3d
cz_fn3d.gra
circlemulti
cz_fn_mc.gra
linemulti
cz_fn_ml.gra
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalysis
cz_fo.gra
Straightness
straightness
cz_sn.gra
Multistraightness
multistraightness
cz_msn.gra
Cylinderformcircular3d
cz_cf_3dc.gra
Cylinderformline
cz_cf_l.gra
Cumradialrunoutmulticir- cz_crro_mc.gra
cle
Flatness
Straightness
Cylindricity
cz_crro_sc.gra
Curve Form
Linear curve form
curveformline
cz_cu_li.gra
Curve form 2D
curveform2d
cz_cu_2d.gra
Curve form 3D
curveform3d
cz_cu_3d.gra
Multi-Curve form 2D
multicurveform2d
cz_mcu_2d.gra
Multicurveformline
cz_mcu_li.gra
CurveformSlope
cz_cu_sl_Type1_ls.gra
Curve Slope
Slope Type 1
cz_cu_sl_Type1_p.gra
Slope Type 2
CurveformSlope2
cz_cu_sl_Type2_ls.gra
cz_cu_sl_Type2_p.gra
Slope Type 3
CurveformSlope3
cz_cu_sl_Type3_ls.gra
cz_cu_sl_Type3_p.gra
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-79
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
borepattern
borepattern_new.gra
Perpendicularity
perpendicularity
cz_pe.gra
Perpendicularity 3D
perpendicularity3d
cz_pe3d.gra
multiPerpendicularityOnCircle
cz_pe_mc.gra
Parallelism
parallelism
cz_pa.gra
Parallelism 3D
parallelism3d
cz_pa3d.gra
multiParallelismOnCircle
cz_pa_mc.gra
Angularity
angularity
cz_an.gra
3D angularity
angularity3d
cz_an3d.gra
multiAngularityOnCircle
cz_an_mc.gra
Axial runout 3D
axialRunout3d
cz_ar3d.gra
cumAxialRunout3d
cz_car3d.gra
Cumradialrunoutmulticir- cz_crro_mc.gra
cle
Position
Bore Pattern
Perpendicularity
Parallelism
Angularity
Runout
cz_crro_sc.gra
multiAxialRunoutLine
cz_ar_ml.gra
multiCumAxialRunoutLine
cz_car_ml.gra
multiRadialRunout
cz_rro.gra
radialRunoutOnCircle
cz_rro_sc.gra
AcisView
acis_3d.gra
8-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The measured points are generally connected by lines in the form plots.
In case of the roundness plot, however, two adjacent points will not be
connected if the distance between them exceeds 1/120 of the corresponding circle.
In the case of the Fourier representation for flatness and roundness, the
amplitudes for the different harmonics as well as a table with the largest
amplitudes and the associated harmonics are displayed.
The amplitudes are shown in radial direction in the Fourier analysis of
roundness and the amplitudes are shown in normal direction with respect
to the plane in the Fourier analysis of flatness.
NOTICE
The precondition for Fourier analysis is that a closed or overlapping circular path has been measured.
Presentation
Calculation process
To determine the values to be shown, all measured points are filtered first,
if necessary, and outliers are eliminated. Then, to calculate the various
amplitudes, a Fourier analysis is carried out, taking into account unequal
distances between the measured points.
In the Fourier analysis of flatness, the valid deviation is the deviation in
the direction of the normal with respect to the plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-81
The form and location plot window allows you to define the appearance
of your form and location plots. You also use it both when manually calling and printing out plots for characteristics that have already been measured and when defining the appearance of plots that are to be displayed
automatically during the CNC run.
The illustration below shows the Form Plot window for a roundness
plot for a circle.
8-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this window, you can edit the representation of the form and location
plot and print the current representation.
Division of the window
The form plot header, containing the data of the printout header.
The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along with
the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The two red
lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower tolerance limit.
You can see at a glance where a measured point deviates from specification, and in which direction.
A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value, the
tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if used.
You can mark extreme points. To do so, select Edit Plot Type in the
form plot window and tick the Extreme Points check box. You then
have a choice of different marking symbols.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-83
8-84
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Exporting measuring results independently of each other into different file formats
Exporting the results (points) of all curves into files with a certain file
format
Exporting the results (points) of selected features into files with a certain file format
The following table shows all possible exports of results from within CALYPSO:
File type
Table
The measuring results are saved in the following text files in table
format:
*chr.txt: characteristics
*fet.txt: features
The results are available for use in other programs such as spreadsheet programs.
Files of this type are saved under <user directory>\workarea\results
under the name of the measurement plan which corresponds to the
measuring results, including part number indices.
Merge file
The measuring results from different CNC runs are written sequentially into the same file.
Before you can save the measured values in a merge file you have to
initialize them. Merge files always have table format.
They are saved in <user directory>\workarea\results under the name
merge.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-85
File type
DMIS available as option only The measuring results are saved in a file in DMIS format and are suitable for CMM acceptance processes.
Files of this type are saved in <user directory>\workarea\dmisout under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the measuring
results.
Note: DMIS recognizes only one single tolerance mode. The deviations are therefore output as in the Number scale mode even if the
Amount mode is set.
Define the scope and sequence of the features in the printout.
Q-DAS available as option
only
The measuring results are saved in one or several files in Q-DAS format and are suitable for Q-DAS statistics programs (e.g. qs-STAT,
procella).
The system only saves the results of those characteristics that correspond to the characteristic set in the measurement plan editor
(Characteristic to Statistic on).
In the selection list you define the division into several files:
Note: You can also define the attributes to ensure that certain
characteristics are added to all Q-DAS files.
The files are saved with the extensions .dfd and .dfx in the <user
directory>\workarea\qdas\ directory. The file names are composed of
the name of the measurement plan, the part number and the group
name, each one separated by underscores.
PiWeb
8-86
The measuring results are saved in a PiWeb report. The scope and
type of the representation can be defined in the Configuration
PiWeb Output window. It is possible to select templates, define
the output of the printout and insert additional files such as image
files.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
File type
Measuring points
Saving of the measuring results for later re-evaluation, possibly according to different criteria.
You can limit the number of measuring runs to be saved.
Curve Points
The measured values that have not been interpolated and the
measured values that have not been interpolated and not corrected by the stylus radius in the curve coordinate system analogously to KUM-UX.
Result files that can be directly read from TiMS for contour and
surface evaluations.
VDA format: The curve points corrected by the stylus tip radius
are written in files named feature_name.vda as MDI.
Points of features
During the CNC run, the points (nominal and actual values) of selected or all features are exported in one of the nominal-actual comparison, ASCII, VDA or DXF formats.
Stylus data
The stylus data are written in an ASCII or PDF file during the CNC run.
The scope of data is defined in an INI file.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-87
You can define individual paths and names [ 888] for the following
data types:
Measuring points
Stylus Data
Q-DAS File
DMIS File
dml file
8-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
tive for all measurement plans, you must activate Name from setting for all Measurement Plans.
You can only make the individual settings for the active measurement
plan if you do not tick this check box.
5 Enter the name of the output file with the appropriate extension in
the Name definition of output file in PCM Syntax (with or
without path) input field and confirm your entry by pressing the
Return key.
Note: If you do not enter any path, the path of the current measurement plan is used.
Note: The name is entered in the Current Name output field. If the
name contains parameters (e.g. part number) to which no values
have been assigned, these parameters are not displayed.
Note: All file types, for which you defined an individual name, as well
as the names themselves, are shown in the All name definitions
deviating from default output field.
The defined names will be used for the selected output files.
NOTICE
If a file already exists under a name used for the output files, the file will
be overwritten with the new output file.
The default printout is created in addition under a default name (protocol)
irrespective of the name definition.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-89
2 Select the file types to be saved and initialize the merge file, if needed.
8-90
You will find more information on this window under Results to File in
the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
8-91
8-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the output format and the scope of output in the Export
Points window.
3 Define the alignment the coordinates should refer to as well as the
point type.
4 Select Export to start the export.
The points of the feature are written in the feature_name
+part_name file in the current measurement plan path.
NOTICE
The last settings made in the Export Points window will always be used
for the export. If a CNC run starts after the manual export, the points are
exported from the measurements with the settings defined for the manual export.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-93
Settings
On: Presetting for new measurement plans from V4.6 and higher.
The uniqueness of the DMIS name is guaranteed internally.
Off: Use of the first 8 characters for the element names as before
version 4.6. The rest is cut off.
Length of feature name The length of the output feature names is:
10 / 64 / 255.
Definition of TOL/
WIDTH
Source of nominal data Features: The nominal data is adopted from the features.
for measured features Characteristics: The nominal data is adopted from the characteristics.
Special aspects of nominal values
If you have set the characteristics for the nominal data source, the nominal
data in the characteristics will be assigned to the following nominal data
in DMIS:
Category
Characteristic
Nominal
Size
Diameter
Diameter
8-94
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Category
Angle
More
Characteristic
Nominal
Radius
Diameter
Normal Direction
Normal Direction
Cone Angle
Cone Angle
Cone Angle
Inclination Angle
Normal Direction
Rotation Angle
Normal Direction
Feature Angle
Start Angle
Diameter Two
Diameter Two
Radius 2
Diameter Two
Slot Length
Length
Slot Width
Width
If a feature is used in several characteristics which contain different nominal values, an average is calculated, first within the identical characteristic
types and then a higher-order average is determined for the averages
calculated in this way.
Projection Angle One and Projection Angle Two as well as Inclination Angle and Rotation Angle form a logical unit. A feature's normal
direction is computed from the combination of such a unit. If only one
part of such a unit exists, the missing nominal data will be completed with
the corresponding data of the feature.
Content
planid_partnb_hdr.txt
planid_partnb_chr.txt
planid_partnb_fet.txt
All three files have the same format: The first line contains the column
headers of the table, the following lines contain the measured or calcu61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-95
lated values for the corresponding column and there is an END at the
end of the file.
The *_hdr.txt header file contains the general data for the measurement plan and the measurement.
The *_chr.txt characteristic file contains all values defined and measured or calculated in the characteristics.
The feature file contains all values (nominal and actual values) defined
and measured in the features.
The same identifiers as in the printout format editor are used for designation of the values.
Interface to DML
The table files represent the interface to various other output formats,
e.g. also to the DML files.
In addition to the direct measuring results, the table files contain further
information:
Curve results
Tolerance zone
The results of the curve measurement are output as table files if the
Curve Points check box is ticked in the Result To File window.
If the Masked curve points check box is ticked in addition, the table
file also includes the masked points which are not used for the evaluation.
These lines contain in each column the entry 99999 instead of the
measuring values.
Tolerance zone
8-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Matrices and vectors are represented as a character string and use only
one column of the table. The components are lined up and separated by
the @ separator:
Matrix A = a11@a12@a13@a21@a22@a23@a31@a32@a33
Vector v = v1@v2@v3
The coordinates of the vector refer to the base alignment.
The two coordinate systems are saved in lines which belong to a True
Position or best fit of bore pattern in the table file of characteristics
(*_chr.txt).
The vectors can be converted into inch but the matrixes not.
Tolerance zone of a True
Position
pol2dxy
pol2dyz
pol2dzx
pol3dxy
polxyz
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-97
NOTICE
The original coordinate designations (X, Y, Z) are retained in the type
(translated characteristic type) and idsymbol columns (language-neutral characteristic type).
Instead of the automatically generated X and Y axis designations, you can
select any other designation and invert the order of the characteristics in
the table file.
NOTICE
The renaming and inversion take also place in the custom printout. The
two other printout types remain unchanged.
id
type
idsymbol
AB
True Position 1A
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1B
gdtPosPol2d Y
True Position 1B
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1A
gdtPosPol2d Y
True Position 1A
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1B
gdtPosPol2d Y
gdtPosPol2d X
gdtPosPol2d Y
BA
AB*
anna,bella
8-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-99
As long as the measurement plan is open, the data that has been determined during the measurement can be evaluated again and according to
changed criteria e.g. with respect to additional or modified characteristics. Once the measurement plan has been closed, this is not possible
anymore.
However, if you notice later that another evaluation of the measured data
would be more useful, you can use the function for subsequent evaluation. The prerequisite is that the measuring points of the measurement
have been saved.
You can select automatic saving of the measuring results or manual saving after the measurement.
NOTICE
This function is used to re-evaluate the data originating from the measured features. You cannot measure additional features. The constructions
and characteristics may only refer to the already measured features.
Procedure
Perform measurement
Save measuring points
Perform evaluation
Perform evaluation
8-100
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
is automatically increased at the end of the CNC run is used when saving
the measuring points.
The measuring points of a part number are saved by default in a file
named <part_number>.zmp in the <user directory>\workarea\inspections\<measurement plan>\idmeaspoints directory.
The number of saved files relating to a measurement plan is limited by
the Limit setting (by default: 5 files). The oldest files will be overwritten
when the limit is exceeded.
NOTICE
If you modify the paths and names for the files containing the measuring
points via Resources Name for output files, this mechanism is
no longer effective. You must then ensure the unique assignment of the
measurement to the file.
Automatic saving
You must set the automatic saving prior to the measurement in the Result To File dialog box which is opened via Resources Results to
File.
Manual saving
CALYPSO
8-101
5 Set the desired evaluation parameters and start the subsequent evaluation.
8-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO runs the measurement plan in the same way as when measuring with the CMM but without probing the workpiece. CALYPSO
uses the loaded measuring points for the calculation of the features
and characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-103
Principle
VisualBasic
Access procedure
If all preconditions have been met, access to the measured values takes
place in three steps:
8-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You have programmed a process that can access the desired measuring results using the functions of the interface (Syntax of the
CalypsoInterface [ 8106]).
The external process will run as soon as it is called by CALYPSO. For this
purpose, three PCM commands must be entered in the measurement
plan settings, for example (it makes sense to enter them in the postsettings).
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("<executable program>")
closeSocket()
The content in <executable program> depends on the programming language.
Example
If you wrote a Visual Basic script with the name getValuesFromCalypso.vbs, the three lines would look like this:
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("Wscript C:\getValuesFromCalypso.vbs")
closeSocket()
VisualBasic
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-105
Example
Syntax
The necessary properties and functions are listed in the following Help
topics sections.
Construction of CalypsoInterface
The syntax for constructing the CalypsoInterface object is as follows:
CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Creates an interface object and returns an object of the type CalypsoInterface.
NOTICE
It makes sense to create only a single instance of the CALYPSO object
data exchange can take place through only one port of the server.
Example
tics [ 8111]
These options will be explained in more detail in the following sections.
8-106
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Properties of CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the properties listed in the table below.
Property
Function
HostName
Example:
Default: "localhost"
MyCalypso.HostName =
"160.4.11.146"
If the client (VBS, VB or VBA program) is located on a different computer than that of CALYPSO, this property must be assigned the
computer name or the IP address of the server before the connection
is established.
TimeOutConnect
Specifies the latest time after which a connection setup attempt with
CALYPSO will be aborted.
Example:
MyCalypso.TimeOutConnect = 10
Default: 10 [seconds]
TimeOut
Example:
Example: MyCalypso.TimeOut = 10
Default: 5 [seconds]
Port
Example:
Default: 9998
Example: MyCalypso.Port
= 9998
ErrNo
No error
-1
11
-9
-10
-11
No connection to CALYPSO
-12
-13
TimerError
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-107
Property
Function
????
ErrName
(Read access only)
ErrMessage
Example:
MyCalypso.ErrMessage =
False
Calypso.ErrName is assigned the "Description" parameter of a system error. Specific errors of the CALYPSO object (-9 to -13, 11) currently contain no designation of the error.
Permits a message to be issued: If the property is Calypso.ErrMessage = True, a message window (MsgBox) with the error code will
be displayed as soon as the condition Calypso.ErrNo < 0 is met.
Default: False
Defines whether to wait for a response for the data exchange functions. The waiting duration then depends on the property Calypso.TimeOut.
Default: True
Returns a numerical value for the status of the socket connection.
Meaning:
0
SckClose
SckOpen
SckListening
SckConnectionPending
SckResolvingHost
SckHostResolved
SckConnecting
SckConnected
SckClosing
SckError
8-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Purpose
ConnectCalypso
Sets up the connection to CALYPSO. Successful execution is a precondition for all access functions.
Example:
e = MyCalypso.ConnectCalypso
If e <> 7 Then
err = MyCalypso.ErrNo
errTxt = MyCalypso.ErrName
MsgBox( err & " " &
errTxt)
End If
The return value is the State property (type: long). The ErrNo
property is possibly assigned an error number.
CloseCalypso
Ends a connection between the client VB/VBA program and the CALYPSO server.
The return value is the State property (type: long; see State
property [ 8107]).
The ErrNo property is possibly assigned an error number.
Purpose
GetInspectionName
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-109
Function
Used for
Returned
GetMeasElement("Identifier")
GetXYZ("Identifier")
Position
Vector
Example:
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Position
Vector
Set myVector =
MyCalypso.GetXYZ("Cone1")
X = myVector.X
Y = myVector.Y
Z = myVector.Z
GetActualXYZ("Identifier")
Normal Vector
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Set myVector =
MyCalypso.GetNormalVector("Cone1")
NX = MyVector.X
NY = MyVector.Y
NZ = MyVector.Z
GetActualNormalVector("Identifier")
Normal Vector
GetIoSign("Identifier")
Nominal
Double
Inside/outside identifier
-1 = inside 0 = outside
Vector
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
GetRadius("Identifier")
Double
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
GetActualRadius("Identifier")
GetLineDirection("Identifier")
GetActualLineDirection("Identifier")
Vector
GetEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Double
Ellipse
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
GetActualEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Double
Ellipse
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
8-110
Double
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Vector
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Used for
Returned
GetConeAngle("Identifier")
Double
Angle in Radians
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Double
GetLength("Identifier")
Double
Angle in Radians
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
GetActualLength("Identifier")
Double
GetWidth("Identifier")
Double
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
GetActualWidth("Identifier")
Double
GetHight("Identifier")
Double
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Double
Used for
Type
GetCFNominal("Identifier")
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
GetCFupperTolerance("Identifier")
Double
GetCFlowerTolerance("Identifier")
Double
GetCFInTolerance("Identifier")
GetCFType("Identifier")
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-111
8-112
CALYPSO
YA = myVector.Y
ZA = myVector.Z
Set myVector = MyCalypso.GetLineDirection("Line")
XN = myVector.X
YN = myVector.Y
ZN = myVector.Z
'=====================
' Get Control Features
'=====================
DA = MyCalypso.GetCFActual("Diameter_CylFroCe")
DN = MyCalypso.GetCFNominal("Diameter_CylFroCe")
BR = MyCalypso.GetCFInTolerance("Diameter_CylFroCe")
SBR = MyCalypso.GetCFType("Diameter_CylFroCe")
'====================
' Close Connection
'====================
If MyCalypso.CloseCalypso = 0 Then
MsgBox( "Connection closed")
Else
MsgBox ( "Could not close the connection to Calypso")
End If
WScript.Quit[1]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-113
8-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-1
9-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
plate [ 95]
Setting up footers and headers [ 96]
Generating a table of contents [ 97]
Adding design elements from the toolbox
[ 99]
Linking an element to a characteris-
tic [ 922]
Changing element properties [ 919]
Arranging elements on one page [ 920]
Designing interactive protocols [ 925]
Save the protocol template and close the PiWeb BasicReporter
BasicReporter [ 926]
Define output media, scope, order, etc. in the Creating multiple printouts [ 810]
Definition of Multiple Printout window.
Click Display Multiple Printout Now to
check the result.
The function is active only if results are already
available.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-3
Horizontal lines above the work area for operation and control
Work area
Configuration area
The menu bar contains all functions needed for editing the template as
well as for importing, printing, and saving.
The toolbar contains the most important functions in the form of icons.
Configuration area
In the configuration area, you can use the following tabs to define the
protocol template:
Pages
Toolbox
Data providers
Properties
Work area
The work area shows the results of the settings and entries made.
To enlarge or reduce the view, use the slider in the upper right corner of
the work area or the functions available via View Zoom.
9-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The master page defines the basic layout of all pages. Features you want
to use on all pages, only need to be created once on the master page.
They will appear on all pages. A master page is designed in the same way
as the report pages.
Tip: Select File Import master page to transfer an existing master
page into a new protocol template.
Tip: If you do not want to adopt the master page settings for a certain
report page, display the respective page in the work area, select the
Properties tab and disable the Use master page option for the report page.
The following instructions refer to the work with the report pages.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-5
Deleting pages
1 Select the desired page on the Pages tab and select Delete from the
context menu.
Header line
Content area
Footer line
The header and footer lines of the master page appear on all report pages
the master page has been assigned to.
On each report page, you can change the size of the individual sections
and add further elements to the header.
1 Display the desired page in the work area.
2 Click the page margin.
Border lines with handles are displayed.
In the illustration, header and footer are shown in white, the content
area is dark gray.
Header line
Content area
Footer line
9-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-7
Merge pages
The table of contents combines all successive pages having the same
name.
Page status
The table of contents displays an icon for each report page, indicating
whether or not the measuring results of the respective page are within the defined limit values.
You can choose between several sets of icons.
Page Thumbnails
9-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Tip: Use the context menu of a category to group and re-arrange the
element templates of the area.
Alternative procedure
1 Drag the characteristic from the Data providers tab to the page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-9
2 Select the desired element from the open selection list. The list contains only elements that are suitable for the respective characteristic.
3 In the work area, adjust the frame, i.e. the size of the element to the
content to be inserted. The following contents can be added:
Text and variables [ 910]
CAD views [ 911]
Lines [ 912]
Reports and tables [ 914]
Form plots [ 917]
Tip: You can use the context menu of an element and the Windows
standard shortcuts for cutting, copying, and pasting even spanning various report pages.
Changing the appearance
The Properties tab in the configuration area allows you to define the
appearance of the element, e.g. line type, colors and font. The most important properties may also be changed via the context menu of the element.
For a uniform design of several elements, you can simultaneously modify
the appearance of several elements or adopt it from other elements
(Changing element properties [ 919]).
Tip: Instead of repeatedly changing the properties of frequently used
elements, you can modify element templates and create your own templates (Modifying and creating element templates [ 927]).
Arranging elements on
one page
Elements can be easily positioned using the mouse. Like in other graphic
programs, you can align several elements to each other and distribute
them uniformly. Rulers and grids help you position the elements precisely
(Arranging elements on one page [ 920]).
Deleting an element
1 Highlight the element and press the DEL key.
- or Use the corresponding context menu function.
9-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Variables
Open Text Variable and select the desired variable from the
context menu.
Configuration area
To enter, select, and format text and variables, you can also use the
Appearance option in the Text field on the Properties tab in the
configuration area.
Labeling elements
The elements contain text fields to allow for labeling of individual elements such as autoshapes and lines. To enter the text or variable, proceed
in the same way as for the Text element.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-11
Tip: To access further editing options, double-click the image. You can,
for example, change the view or the color of the CAD model.
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to include meta information on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout.
Tip: Once you have completed the definition of the CAD model view,
you can use the context menu to delete the CAD data from the protocol
template in order to save memory space (Image Remove CAD data).
The Dynamic image element template allows you to output the current image from any directory. This may be, for example, the image of a
measuring machine's monitoring camera or an automatically created
CAD view of components.
Example
By means of PCM commands, for example, you can save CAD model
views in a directory during the CNC run. Include a dynamic image in the
protocol template to allow for output of the image stored in this directory.
Result: The current image will then be included in the printout.
Dash style and end caps (e.g. arrows) can be selected in the configuration
area via View on the Settings tab.
Bending a line
You may insert any number of edge points. The edge points can be removed again using the context menu.
Tip: To connect two lines, drag the end point of one line to the end point
of the other line.
Label
To label a line:
1 Enable the Text visible option in the context menu.
9-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Connection lines
3 You can add anchor points to some elements, for example, to connect
a line to a certain object of a CAD view:
Use the context menu of the element to add an anchor point: for
example, via Image Add connection point.
Drag the anchor point to the desired position.
Drag the other end point of the line to the anchor point.
If you move one of the connected elements, the line will automatically
be moved, too.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-13
3. Arranging elements
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to easily include information on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout. Drag the
MIBA flag element to the CAD model. Small circles indicate the points
where you can fix a banner. Then select the desired characteristic.
Inserting a table
9-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Designing template
rows
Linking characteristics to
a table
The table output contains all characteristics linked to it. See also Linking
an element to a characteristic [ 922].
Tip: If you want all characteristics of the current measurement plan to be
output in the table, just drag the folder from the Data binding tab to
the table in the work area.
Selecting elements
The title bar and the template rows of a table often contain a large number of elements. It may therefore not be easy to select a certain element
in the display area with the mouse.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-15
Tip: To select a template row, select an element of the template row and
press ESC. By pressing ESC once again, the table will be selected as parent
element.
Following pages
The protocol contains all measurement plan data to be output. The table
will be continued on following pages, if necessary.
The report page will be copied if not defined otherwise. Data will only
be output within the defined table frame.
9-16
...
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-17
Plot
Function
Plane plot
Fourier plot
Straightness plot
Individual lines
Connected steps
Curve
Represents the result of the linearity evaluation as well as the evaluation result of the unwinding of circle, plane and curve.
If you enable the Point distance fixed option in the in the Data group, the X axis will not be scaled in mm but in points. The points
are distributed at uniform distances on the X axis.
Circle plot
9-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot
Function
Pitch plot
CALYPSO
9-19
9-20
To align several elements to each other, use the following icons (or the
corresponding points in the Format menu):
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon
Function
Align left
Align right
Align top
Align bottom
Center horizontally
Center vertically
NOTICE
The function always affects the element selected last, which is highlighted
in color.
Distributing elements
Function
Distribute horizontally
Distribute vertically
Arranging elements in
an overlapping manner
Positioning elements
precisely
Bring to front
Bring to back
For precise positioning of elements, you can enable the following utilities
in the View menu:
Icon
Function
Ruler
Grid
Snap to grid
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-21
Characteristics
XY plot
Table
MIBA flag
Protocol
Pie chart
The Data providers tab in the configuration area displays all characteristics of the currently loaded measurement plan.
By double-clicking a characteristic, detailed information on the characteristic will be displayed in a separate window.
The selection list at the bottom edge of the tab allows you to filter the
list of characteristics.
9-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Canceling a reference
1 Select Remove data binding from the context menu of the icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-23
9-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting a link
1 Select the desired element in the work area.
2 Open Reference in the context menu of the element and select the
action to be performed after clicking the element.
Tip: By selecting Edit reference , you open a dialog box for easy
setting of the parameters.
Removing a reference
1 Open the context menu of the element and select Reference No
reference.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-25
9-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-27
9-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10
Chapter
Managing CALYPSO
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-1
CAA data
10-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can also add the current measurement plan and, if necessary, additional data to the file containing the error report which makes analysis
easier. In particular, the PCM commands and the formulas and PCM files
processed by the PCM commands may furnish useful information. For this
purpose, define test outputs.
Presettings
This is where you define the additional files to be attached to the error
report each time when saving or the defaults to be offered in the saving
dialog.
Combining unhandled
exceptions
The Error Report window allows you to combine all unhandled exceptions that occurred during the program run and to save them in a compressed file for analysis by a Carl Zeiss service engineer.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-3
2 In the Define Test Outputs dialog box, tick the check boxes for the
desired test settings and close the dialog box.
10-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In the Error Report for Defaults dialog box, tick the check boxes
for those files that are to be attached when saving or for which saving
is to be proposed as default in the Save Error Report dialog box.
3 Activate Show dialog when saving if the Save Error Report
dialog box is to be displayed with these defaults when saving. Additional settings are possible in this case.
If you untick the check box, the files defined here will be attached
automatically when saving without any additional query.
4 Press OK to confirm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-5
10-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you tick the Show dialog when saving check box under Settings Error Report, the Save Error Report dialog box will
open.
Note: The other menu items under File are used for special service
purposes: Open can be used by Carl Zeiss employees to unzip the
forwarded measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-7
User
Here, you can define new users and manage the existing users. You
can also configure the login procedure, e.g. system login or automatic
login.
This notebook can only be edited by the Master user.
CMM
Here you can set up the configuration of the CMM (control type,
probe, control console, etc.) and the software drivers. You also initialize the CMM here.
You can define several measuring systems (device groups) and switch
between them.
Status Monitor
You can view all important events which occurred during the current
measurement.
Environment
You can modify the user-specific settings (language of the user desk
and printouts/protocols, units of measure, font, start conditions, colors of the CALYPSO windows).
Measurement
Here you can set the measurement parameters of the CMM (working
speed, clearance distance, retract distance, scanning parameters,
etc.).
Miscellaneous
Here you can view the license information and internals.
Most settings are valid globally, i.e. equally for all users. Exceptions here
are the settings for language, units of measure, font and color. Each user
can select these specifically. The same, of course, applies to the user settings (privileges).
You will find an overview of the settings in These system settings can
be modified [ 1015].
10-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Marker
User management
Basics about users
The CALYPSO user management guarantees that only designated and
authorized users use CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-9
CALYPSO can be configured such that the user logged in on the computer will not need to enter again his user name and password when
starting CALYPSO.
Activating the system login [ 1013]
Deleting users
Renaming users
Changing passwords
The Master user manages the CALYPSO users under Extras Settings in the Users notebook.
Managing users
1 As the Master user, you manage your users in the system settings.
Open the Users notebook via Extras Settings User. The
Management page is displayed.
The name of the current user (Master) is shown in the User field.
Adding users
Deleting users
Renaming users
10-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Environment Setup
Define Directories/Paths
Equipment Setup
Measurement Setup
Evaluation/Output Setup
Assigning privileges
1 Select Extras Settings Users and open the Privileges notebook page.
2 Click the name tab of the user you wish to assign privileges to.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-11
Note: With the automatic login mode enabled, all persons starting CALYPSO on this computer will use the same user profile. CALYPSO does
not check whether or not the persons are authorized to use CALYPSO.
To be on the safe side, only use the automatic login if the computer is
used by one person only.
Note: Only the Master user has the right to activate or deactivate automatic login.
1 Select Extras Settings User.
2 Tick the Auto log-in should occur following system start
check box.
3 Select from the list the user to be logged in automatically.
10-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
10-13
10-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-15
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
CMM
AAI
How to configure
the AAI interface
Retract distance
Measurement
Travel
Changing the
CMM
Interface
Changing the
CMM
Probe
Changing the
CMM
Light Signal
Working with
Environment
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
Temperature
Point Density
Environment
Export DMIS
Measurement
User
AutoRun Rights
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Environment
Save
Changing the
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Form Datum
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
10-16
61212-2011002
Management
CALYPSO
Managing
users [ 1010]
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Measurement
Features
Changing the
Features
Features
Measurement
Changing the
Automatic opening of an
Environment
AutoRun file at program start
Start
Automatic opening of a
measurement plan at program start
Environment
Start
Measurement
Environment
Export DMIS
Configuring the
DMIS export
CMM
Panel
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Methods
Changing the
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Delete user
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Rename user
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Computed feature calculation
Measurement
Point Density
Changing the
61212-2011002
Form Datum
Changing the
CALYPSO
10-17
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Activate/deactivate licenses
Miscellaneous
Licenses
Activating licens-
es and displaying
program parameters [ 1014]
Assign file with default name Environment
Default Name
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Position dialog boxes
Environment
Dialogs
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
DMIS preprocessor for DMIS Environment
export
Export DMIS
Probe
CMM
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
CMM
Rotary Table
Logging in the
CMM
CMM
Rotary Table
Changing the
Changing the
CMM
Rotary Table
Changing the
Environment
Printer
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Printer for measurement
plan
Environment
Dynalog keys
Environment
Printer
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Dynalog
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Discrete-point measurement Measurement
Methods
Changing the
10-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Environment
Export DMIS
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Window colors
Environment
Colors
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Form of derived names
Environment
Default Name
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Device interfaces
CMM
Interface
Changing the
CMM
Measuring Systems
Changing the
Speed
Control
CMM
Changing the
CMM
Control
Initializing the
CMM [ 1015]
Internal parameters of software installation
Miscellaneous
Change password
User
Internals
Activating licens-
es and displaying
program parameters [ 1014]
Profile
Changing the
password [ 1012]
Enable password change
User
Profile
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Coefficients (expansion) for
scales
CMM
Environment
Temperature
Changing the
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-19
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
CMM
Light Signal
Working with
Miscellaneous
Licenses
Activating licens-
es and displaying
program parameters [ 1014]
Define manual run
Measurement
Manual run
Changing the
CMM
Machine
Changing the
CMM
Dual arm
Changing the
Language
Language
Probe
CMM
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
CMM
Probe
Changing the
CMM
Probe
Changing the
Measurement
Measurement
10-20
Methods
Changing the
Changing the
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
VCMM
Changing the
Machine
CMM
Measurement
MMC / LMC
Changing the
CMM
Measurement
Rotary Table
Mass moment of
Changing the
Default Name
Measurement
Probing Quality
Configure OVCMM
Measurement
VCMM
Measurement
SCAN Limits
Changing the
Measurement
CMM
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
Changing the
Changing the
61212-2011002
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
CALYPSO
10-21
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Paths
Changing the
Paths
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Preprocessor for DMIS export Environment
Export DMIS
Configuring the
DMIS export
Environment
Save
Changing the
Point masking
Measurement
environment [ 1013]
Point Masking
Changing the
Changing the
Measurement
CMM
User
AutoRun Rights
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Assign privileges
User
Privileges
Assigning user
Changing the
privileges [ 1011]
Master stylus in sensor system
CMM
Measurement
Scanning speed
Measurement
Master Stylus
Changing the
Changing the
Changing the
Measurement
SCAN Limits
Changing the
10-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Interface type
CMM
Interface
Changing the
Environment
Font
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
CMM serial number
CMM
Machine
Changing the
Measurement
Travel
Changing the
CMM
Dual arm
Changing the
Miscellaneous
Measurement
Environment
Internals
Activating li-
Changing the
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Language (printouts)
Environment
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Starting behavior
Environment
Start
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Management
Managing
User
Status Monitor
CMM
Control
Changing the
users [ 1010]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-23
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Management
Changing the
Language
Language
Navigator
Tolerance class
SCAN Limits
Measurement
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
Measurement
Nominal
Changing the
Measurement
Navigator
Changing the
CMM
Connect
CMM
Control
Changing the
Changing the
Measurement
Speed
Changing the
Movement
Dispersion
Simulation
Measurement
Qualification of
styli [ 1125]
Changing the
10-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Environment
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Directory for measurement
plans
Environment
Environment
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Preassignment of scanning
areas
Measurement
Environment
SCAN Limits
Changing the
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Start Angle
Default Name
Environment
Changing the
with default
names [ 624]
Angle for home position
travel
CMM
Environment
Environment
Probe
RTP20
probe [ 163]
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-25
10-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-1
11-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
When you use an RDS, the CMM can probe the workpiece from a large
number of different directions by adjusting the A and B angles. Every RDS
position you want to use for probing is considered to be a particular stylus
and needs to be qualified separately (exception: if you use the RDS-CAA
option, see in the operating instructions for the RDS-CAA option under
Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option)).
To facilitate work, you can create a list of the angular positions for the
probe, thus defining the styli at the same time. After qualification of a
defined angular position, it is possible to calculate the values for the remaining angular positions.
During qualification, the CMM recognizes the styli in question, and you
do not need to qualify these manually. You can learn how to create this
list at Creating and editing the RC List [ 1117].
Then you begin the qualification of the stylus system via the Automatic
qualification icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-3
Management
Stylus system
Mode
Parameter
Standard
Tensor
Star
Stylus name / no.
Geometry
Taper Angle
Sphere
Star_1
Qualify stylus
Reference sphere
Name
Date
No.
Star_1
5.10.11
Temp.
SNo
Date
R:
R:
S:
S:
X:
X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z:
Type:
Tilt:
VAST
Rotate:
OK
11-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
vided (i.e. a fitted probe with adapter plate), only the name of the
stylus system and the name of the first stylus can be assigned.
Note: If a stylus system with the option of a multi-stage stylus change
exists (e.g. an articulating probe holder with probes provided with a
stylus changer), different dialog boxes will open.
The selection box includes the installed probe.
The Simulation option offers all probes that have been selected in the
configuration of the measuring machine.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-5
You may adopt the default designation of the RDS carrier or define a
name of your choice. This name is entered in the empty field and transferred to the system by clicking Add. The new designation is now displayed in the selection field. This RDS carrier may by assigned later to an
RDS holder. You have to define a designation in the New stylus system field. This stylus system may later be assigned to a stylus change
holder of the XXT type. The name of the stylus defines the individual
stylus.
Note: If you use several RDS carriers, you must already define here the
assignment to the RDS carrier here (e.g. XXT_TL1 or XXT_TL2). You cannot change the assignment subsequently.
11-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders. Additionally, in
the case of the SP25, a name for the module must be defined. This
module cannot be assigned to a holder.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-7
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
11-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-9
11-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
11-11
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab in CALYPSO.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
You will find detailed information on this window in Probing system
qualification in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
2 Click the Insert new stylus button.
3 In the Create new stylus window, enter the name and number to
be used for referencing the stylus.
With respect to the name, CALYPSO does not distinguish between
uppercase and lowercase characters.
The number must be unique within the stylus system. Therefore, you
can only choose among the free stylus numbers or enter a higher
number than the last one of the selection list.
Renaming a stylus
In the Probing System Qualification window, you can change the name
of a stylus at any time, but you cannot change its number.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change.
11-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: This is not valid if CALYPSO is used with MPS on a real CMM (not
in the simulation mode). In this case, the data of the master stylus is determined automatically via a reversal measurement.
Note: You do not have to enter the data of the master stylus for passive
styli as these are saved automatically by the system.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM MasterProbe.
The MasterProbe notebook is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-13
Type
RDS
CMM
Arm 1
XS=
0/
YS=
ZS=
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system and
the dimensions (length) of the master stylus:
DSE
Arm 2 / Individ.
Bridge
Arm 1
Arm2 / Indiv.
XM
0/
-XM
0/
XM
0/
XM
0/
-XM
55 /
-ZM
55 /
-ZM
55 /
-YM
73 /
-ZM
73 /
-ZM
135 /
YM
135 /
-YM
135 /
-ZM
155 /
YM
155 /
-YM
11-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-15
2 Select the name of the stylus whose position you want to define.
You can see the currently valid values for the edited angle position
under Angle (A/B).
3 Define the desired angle position using one of the following methods:
Click To Feature to align the angle position parallel to the axis of
a feature.
Under System, select a coordinate system and an axis and click
System / Axis to align the angle position parallel to the selected
axis.
Under X, Y and Z, enter the direction of a vector and click System / Vector to align the angle position in the direction of the
selected vector.
11-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Click Invert position to reverse the previously defined angle position, i.e. to change all angles by 180.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-17
3 Enter the name of the stylus system whose positions you want to define.
4 Enter here the maximum taper angle.
5 Edit the list of the angle positions of the RDS stylus and use the following functions:
11-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon
Function
Deletes the contents of the stylus list.
Loads an existing stylus list.
Saves the list in a file.
Adds a new line in the list below the marked line or at the end of the list.
Deletes the marked lines in the list.
(only with the RDS-CAA option)
The styli with RC-CAA are extracted from the features marked in the list of features and
inserted into the stylus list.
It is only possible to insert styli from one single stylus system in the list.
(only with the RDS-CAA option)
The features contained in the measurement plan are checked with regard to the use of
RC-CAA styli. If a stylus position used in the measurement plan coincides with a position
in the styli list, then, after response to the query, the listed stylus system and the stylus
with the same angle position are assigned to the feature (the measurement strategy).
If a measurement plan contains several stylus systems with RDS-CAA styli, you are
prompted to specify the system for which you want to use the function.
Note: When using RDS star styli, you must ensure the correct assignment as several
styli with the same stylus position exist in the list. It is possible to use the same list for
various stylus systems.
If there are several styli with the same angle position in the styli list, the first stylus will
be assigned.
Creates a new stylus system.
6 To edit a list cell: Click the list and enter the values directly.
- or Define the desired angle position on the RC position tab and click
Transfer to list.
7 In the Styli list, enter the stylus name and the corresponding positions of the articulating probe (angles A and B in degrees).
You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole list using
the context menu. We recommend using stylus names that contain
the angular positions that helps you later choose the correct stylus.
Note: Avoid those angular positions of the articulating probe in which
stylus shaft directions are close to the shaft direction of the reference
sphere, as there is a relatively high risk of shaft probing in this case.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-19
8 Click Close.
The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new stylus system
is created in the stylus system management. Each row of the styli list
creates a separate stylus.
The data path and name are assigned by default and can be changed.
9 Close the RC List window.
In the Probing system qualification window, you can now click the CNC
Probing system qualification icon to begin qualifying the RDS positions.
11-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Enter the A and B angle values for the Start angle and End angle.
4 Define whether you want to determine the Step Width or the Step
Count.
5 Click Calculate Styli Angle.
The field shows the calculated angular positions as own styli together
with the standard <AngleA>_<AngleB> stylus name.
6 Edit the list as required.
You can also edit lines and delete lines via the context menu.
7 Confirm your entries with OK.
The dialog box closes and the table is transferred to the RC List window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-21
Qualification
Qualification
Master stylus
Stylus for
measurements
You must use the master stylus for qualification of the reference
sphere. Master styli are usually identified by a red dot. You must always
set the angle position A = 0, B = 0 for articulating probe systems.
NOTICE
All corrections made to the measured data refer to the master stylus. The
master stylus must therefore be protected. Never use the master stylus
for a normal measurement during operation.
11-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: If you qualify the reference sphere using a stylus different from
the master stylus, a systematic error propagation will be caused.
Afterwards, you are prompted to enter the orientation of the reference
sphere post:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-23
Inclination angle:
Rotation angle:
OK
Cancel
11-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
Qualification of styli
Basics about stylus qualification
A stylus must be qualified:
If you have installed a new stylus system that has not been qualified
yet.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-25
Qualification of styli
Management
Stylus system
Mode
Parameter
Standard
Tensor
Star
Stylus name / no.
Geometry
Taper Angle
Sphere
Star_1
Qualify stylus
Reference sphere
Name
Date
No.
Star_1
5.10.11
Temp.
SNo
Date
R:
R:
S:
S:
X:
X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z:
Type:
Tilt:
VAST
Rotate:
OK
11-26
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
The compliance of the following stylus values with the defined tolerances
or limit values can be checked by CALYPSO:
Definition of nominal
values
The nominal values for the stylus geometry and temperature are determined implicitly by manual qualification.
The compliance with the limit values is only monitored during a CNC
qualification - except for the deviation which is monitored during each
qualification.
If one of the determined values exceeds its limit value during the CNC
qualification, the qualification is repeated until the limit value is complied
with or the defined number of repetitions is exceeded.
Global settings
The monitoring of the global limit values for stylus qualification is defined
in the system setup. To do so, select Extras Settings CMM and
click Define and Activate Limit Values on the Stylus system
notebook page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-27
Qualification of styli
The required measurements of stylus values can be activated in the Definition of limit values during stylus qualification window.
Stylus-related settings
It is possible to define settings deviating from the global settings for each
stylus. To do so, click Set Limit Values in the Probing system
qualification window. In the Definition of limit values during
stylus qualification window you can select the Define limit values for this stylus option and make different settings.
11-28
The global check of stylus values is defined in the system setup on the
Stylus system notebook page or under Resources Stylus system Stylus check during CNC start ...for all Measurement Plans.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
Deviating settings for the current measurement plan can be defined under Resources Stylus system Stylus check during CNC
start ... for this Measurement Plan.
Automatic functional
testing
The sensor signal monitoring allows you to monitor the stylus deflection.
NOTICE
Sensor monitoring can only be called if CALYPSO is connected to a CMM
of the F25 type. In the simulation mode, it is not possible to open the
sensor monitoring.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-29
Qualification of styli
If the sensor monitoring function has been activated, the current stylus
deflection is measured at regular intervals and displayed in an X-Y diagram in the Display Sensor Signals window. The diagram shows the
stylus deflections from Start or Reset.
Below you will find a description of the most important sensor signal
monitoring functions.
Showing and hiding
curves
Use the X, Y, Z and zero line check boxes (at the right border below
the diagram) to show or hide the curves as required.
11-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
The zooming functions enable you, for example, to examine certain sections in detail or to display the entire curves before printing them.
Use the sliders to the left and to the right of the Print button to scale
the axes of the diagram:
FitSignals scales the Y axis in a way to display in the diagram all the
measuring results of the currently represented period.
The arrow keys in the upper left corner of the dialog box increase or
reduce the number of decimals used for the Y axis.
You can print the curves, save them as images or output them in tables.
SaveAsBMP
SavePoints
By clicking the Start/Stop button, you start and end the sensor signal
monitoring.
To reset the sensor signal monitoring during operation, click Reset.
Click Close to close the window.
Other settings
The following settings are intended for the Carl Zeiss service and should
not be activated by you:
Temp Offset
DebugC99
Vector
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-31
Qualification of styli
Use
Tensor
(default mode
for measuring
probes)
Dyn. tensor
(only with the
VAST Navigator
option)
Procedure
Note: The dynamic tensor can be determined only if the static tensor is known. If
the static tensor has not been determined
yet, the static tensor and then the dynamic
tensor will be determined automatically.
Six Points
(default mode
for trigger
probes)
11-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
Mode
Use
Procedure
Manual
Dyn. Tensor
Re-qualification
Tensor Requalification
CALYPSO automatically re-qualifies the static tensor and the stylus geometry.
Any existing dynamic tensor is retained.
Geometry Re- Re-qualification of the stylus geom- This is in principle identical to the procedure
for the Six Points mode: At first, four
qualification etry if only this has changed.
points
are probed for position determinaAny existing static and dynamic
tion, followed by six points for stylus qualitensor is retained.
fication.
However, qualification takes place in the
unclamped mode (after all, there is a valid
tensor that is not deleted).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-33
Qualification of styli
Mode
Use
Procedure
Manual Requalification
Four points are first probed for position determination, followed by the required number of points for stylus qualification. The
dead weight offset (DWO) is determined by
means of the Probe in direction of the stylus
shaft prompt.
11-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-35
Qualification of styli
shaft direction and will therefore not be probed again during the CNC
qualification.
Then you must probe three points on the cylindrical stylus in a circle
and the next three points in a circle that is offset with respect to the
first circle. After that, you can make any probings that you wish.
4
1
11-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
5 Enter here the intermediate positions for the travel path of the stylus
to the reference sphere and back. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control console to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
Click Qualification as soon as you have reached a safe position in
front of the reference sphere from which CALYPSO can then take over
the qualification of the stylus. A line with X = 0, Y = 0 , Z = 0 and the
calib type is inserted and the Way back button is activated.
Click Way back if the stylus should return on the same path. The
points are automatically inserted in the list. Otherwise, define other
intermediate positions for the way back.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
Risk of collision! Move slowly and carefully.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-37
Qualification of styli
The individual travel path for the qualification of the stylus is defined and
will be used for each subsequent automatic qualification.
11-38
If in doubt, check the stylus system construction for stability and correct
assembly in accordance with the stylus system documents. Clean the stylus and the reference sphere and repeat qualification to aim at better
results.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
If the results are stable, you have reached the limit based on all of the
factors mentioned above. You can regroup the stylus system to increase
the rigidity. Qualification with a short, rigid stylus (e.g. the master stylus)
can determine systematic errors of the CMM.
You can use special measurement plans in the CNC run to qualify stylus
systems automatically. You may also use several reference spheres (real
or virtual) and carry out rapid re-qualifications.
Example: All styli are qualified in the Tensor mode and should be qualified again once every shift because of possible changes in temperature.
In this case, it is not necessary to carry out a complete tensor qualification
every time. This is because, even though the geometry of a stylus changes
with the temperature, the flexibility does not.
For regular qualification, therefore, you can define a measurement plan
in which all styli are qualified with only 6 points. Select additionally the
Geometry Re-qualification mode.
In an additional measurement plan, select the Tensor mode for the same
stylus system, thus making a complete qualification.
In one characteristic, define the geometry specification (tensor, requalification geometry) for all styli as well as the dynamic qualification
for those styli that can be qualified on the real reference sphere.
Then define in further characteristics the dynamic repeat measurement on virtual reference spheres.
CALYPSO
11-39
Qualification of styli
You see the data of the stylus system used. In the list on the left, all
available (qualified) styli of this stylus system, the current qualification
status as well as the respective reference sphere are displayed.
On the right side, the styli to be qualified with this characteristic are
displayed with mode and reference sphere.
In the CNC run, the position of reference sphere 1 is first measured
with the master stylus.
Select under Stylus system the MasterProbe entry.
11-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
5 Define the characteristics for the qualification of the various stylus systems.
Define, using Add and Delete, the styli to be qualified with the respective characteristic.
Example: Only styli 2 and 4 of a star stylus are to be qualified. In this
case, mark stylus 1, 3 and 5 and click Delete.
For the marked stylus or styli, set the desired qualification mode for
this characteristic under Mode.
6 Select File Save to save the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-41
Qualification of styli
Note: If using more than one (real) reference sphere, CALYPSO, when
changing to another reference sphere, always travels first in +Z to the
end of the measuring range, then to the next reference sphere in X
and Y.
The stylus systems have been qualified. You may proceed with the desired
measurement plan for measuring the workpiece.
11-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing the tabular overviews containing information on Geometry, Quality of the qualification and Settings of the styli.
Display area
Display area (right): This area shows the data associated with your
selection in the navigation area. Valid styli are highlighted in green,
invalid ones in red.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-43
Stylus
Geometry
Quality
Results of the last qualification for all styli of the stylus system.
Settings
11-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Copying styli
1 In the navigation area for the respective stylus system, select the Stylus data category.
The Stylus area opens in the display area.
2 In the Styli available list, click the stylus whose data you wish to
accept and select Copy from the context menu.
The Create new stylus dialog box opens.
3 In the Stylus and Stylus no. input fields, enter the stylus name and
number and confirm with OK.
The data of the copied stylus is then used to create a new stylus.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-45
The colored backgrounds indicate whether the stylus is valid and suitable for measurement (green) or invalid (red).
2 Click the header of the respective table column to sort the entries in
ascending or descending order.
You can edit the stylus names, stylus numbers and some geometric
data.
3 For editing, click the desired field and make your modifications.
Note: Please keep in mind that other data is calculated on the basis of
the edited data. The calculated data and the qualification data cannot
be modified.
4 Click Recalculate Stylus Data to reestablish data consistency.
5 Click the Apply button to accept the changes.
11-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Click the Stylus system management icon. The Stylus system
management window will open.
3 In the Stylus System Functions group, click Print.
The Stylus system printout window is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-47
11-48
name available
X
1
Y
1
Z
1
R
1
S
1
ForceX
1
ForceY
1
ForceZ
1
shaftX
1
shaftY
1
shaftZ
1
Temp
1
Date
1
geometry
0
Mode
0
Paranamest3 0
aAxis
1
bAxis
1
cncCalib
0
name
value
column
5
width
12
In the first block, you define which stylus date is included in the printout. 1 means in the printout, 0 means not in the printout.
In the second block, you define the number of columns in the table
(column) and the column width (width).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Sphere
Reference
sphere shaft
Sphere shaft
Reference
sphere holder
The reference sphere consists of the reference sphere holder and the reference sphere shaft that is attached at a certain angle to the reference
sphere holder. The reference sphere shaft consists of the sphere and the
sphere shaft.
Reference sphere management
CALYPSO can work with several reference spheres. The data of the reference sphere used is considered for stylus qualification.
Use the Reference sphere management dialog box to manage your
reference spheres. This is where the data of all reference spheres used on
the CMM is stored.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-49
Reference sphere
RSH-214
RSH-364
RSH-514
RSH-Compact
RSH-105-A
RSH-187-M
CMMs concerned
The CMM type and the machine configuration determine whether your
CMM supports bending correction. For more information, please refer to
the operating instructions or the data sheet for your CMM.
Update
11-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
List of numbers
Reference sphere
Settings
Reference sphere
data
Clearance dist. -X
Serial Number
Clearance dist. +X
X Offset
Clearance dist. -Y
Y Offset
Clearance dist. +Y
Z Offset
Clearance dist. -Z
Sigma
Clearance dist. +Z
Roundness dev.
Reference sphere
components
Inclination Angle
No
Rotation Angle
Shaft radius
Virt. ref. sph.
Date
Clearance Distance
Sphere Radius
Inclination Angle
No
Rotation Angle
31.1.2013
Temp. coeff.
pos. valid
No
Height
Functions
New
Copy
Delete
Activate
Reset
Apply
Close
If the values of a reference sphere do not match the data on the certificate, you have to edit its reference sphere data [ 1153].
If you use another reference sphere, you can create a new reference
sphere [ 1152].
You can copy a reference sphere as virtual reference sphere for dynamic tensor qualification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-51
RSH-Compact
Sphere
CZSphereD30
CZSphereD30
Serial Number
Sphere Radius
CZSphereD25
Shaft Radius
CZSphereD15
Temperature Coefficient
Roundness Deviation
(m)
CZSphereD8
OK
Cancel
11-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Enter the values specified on the certificate or check the values preset
by CALYPSO:
Serial Number
Sphere Radius
Shaft Radius
Temperature Coefficient
Roundness Deviation
5 Select the behavior when defining the position with the master stylus:
Update Stylus Data: Recommended setting for conventional
reference spheres
Do not change stylus data: Recommended setting for optical
reference spheres (this requires definition of the master stylus on a
conventional reference sphere prior to optical definition of the optical reference sphere).
6 Press OK to confirm.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-53
11-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference sphere
Qualification date
X:
Y:
Z:
R=
Nx=
Ny=
Nz=
Serial No.
Ident No.
OK
3 Click Print to print the representation and the data on the default
printer.
4 Click OK to close the dialog box without any output.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-55
11-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-1
Straightforward programming.
The programming is simpler because you can always program on the
operator screen.
In addition, the rotary table can be used to position several equal workpieces easily if loops are used in the measurement plan for the workpiece
and rotary table position.
CALYPSO makes it possible to use the rotary table both vertically and
horizontally if your rotary table supports this function.
With suitable rotary tables (e.g. RT-AB (Rotary Table Air Bearing), CALYPSO uses the mass moment of inertia (MMI) of the loaded rotary table
for optimizing the angular acceleration.
NOTICE
The rotary table is a fourth axis for the CMM and thus contributes to the
expected measuring uncertainty. For an accuracy estimate in the case of
features measured with the rotary table, the permitted four-axis deviation
of the CMM must always be used.
In particular, the quality of the rotary table axis qualification has a strong
influence on the accuracy that can be achieved. For this reason, you
should proceed with great care (see Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]).
Follow the safety instructions given in the respective rotary table operating
instructions.
Always make sure that the workpieces and their fixtures do not protrude
the edge of the faceplate; there is a risk of inadmissibly high peripheral
speeds.
Do not change the loading while the rotary table is in motion.
12-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For safety reasons, you need to define the moment of inertia range yourself using a moment of inertia selector. This is to limit the maximum rotational speed of the rotary table. The moment of inertia selector is located on the switch panel of the control cabinet and has two stages in
the standard configuration. The application range of the stages is specified in the operating instructions for the corresponding rotary table.
For example, the following two ranges apply to the RT-AB:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-3
In the Rotary Table window, you define the behavior at CNC start.
If you tick the Redefine at every CNC start check box, the mass
moment of inertia will be redetermined by CALYPSO every time you
start the CNC run.
Otherwise, the value will be taken from the measurement plan without redefining it.
This procedure reduces the duration of the measurement. It can,
however, only be used if the mass distribution and the fixture are
always the same for all CNC runs.
12-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If RT home position is activated, CALYPSO will automatically determine the mass moment of inertia before starting the reference
travel.
Otherwise, the definition made in the system settings (CMM Configuration notebook, Rotary Table page) will apply:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-5
Manually determining
the mass moment of inertia
In the Rotary Table window, you can have the mass moment of inertia
determined manually, for example, if you create a new measurement plan
or want to use it for another workpiece. The value determined will automatically be used for the next CNC run.
When saving the measurement plan, the mass moment of inertia is permanently transferred to the measurement plan.
Visualizing the current
tilting moment
With setMTMValue, you define a certain value for the mass moment
of inertia of the rotary table with workpiece.
This procedure is only useful if the workpiece remains in exactly the
same position and orientation, e.g. in a firmly mounted fixture.
12-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the REWI additional correction [ 1210] (only for RTAB-300 P and certain CMMs)
Note: Exact mechanical alignment is not required, as the rotary table position and orientation are qualified.
To enable CALYPSO to make measurements with the rotary table and to
evaluate, the rotary table must be logged into CALYPSO and, besides this,
the rotary table must be connected to the control unit in the case of a
mobile rotary table.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM and open in the CMM Configuration notebook the Rotary Table page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-7
12-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-9
Clearance planes
The edges of the planes at the beginning of the axis (negative axis side)
are automatically blocked.
If you fasten the positive end of the RT axis by means of a tailstock, you
must additionally block the 4 edges of the corresponding plane.
Otherwise you must release the two lower, normally locked edges which
are intersected when the rotary table rotates through the various planes.
Only then is it possible for you to reach all sides when the rotary table
rotates.
RT homing
Like the three linear axes of the CMM (X, Y, Z), the rotary table also has
a home position. This is approached automatically during every CMM
homing. It is, however, also possible to approach the home position manually or automatically during the measuring operation.
In contrast to the linear axes, the rotary table has no mechanical limit stop.
During homing, the zero marking on the scale is reached by the shortest
path and the counter is set to zero. The maximum rotational angle on the
rotary table is not restricted by a mechanical limit stop either; it is restricted by the memory of the counter. The number of possible revolutions
depends on the rotary table type. On an RT1 or RT-AB-300-P, for example,
155 revolutions are possible.
It therefore makes sense to run an automatic RT homing prior to each
CNC run.
12-10
The deviation of the angle between two guide elements from the nominal
angle of 90 specified in arc seconds is referred to as a perpendicularity
error. At startup of the CMM by a Carl Zeiss service engineer, the three
perpendicularity errors are determined for the complete CMM and compensated for in calculation. However, since the perpendicularity errors are
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
not the same in the entire measuring range, there may locally be different
residual errors.
Now, CALYPSO allows you to determine for certain high-precision CMMs
with RT-AB-300-P rotary table the residual perpendicularity errors at the
rotary table location and to compensate them mathematically during the
measurement. Thus, the REWI additional correction makes it possible to
increase the accuracy of your four-axis coordinate measuring machine.
For more information about whether your CMM supports the REWI additional correction function, please refer to the operating instructions or
the data sheet for your CMM.
NOTICE
The REWI addition correction function is only used for measurements
with the RT-AB-300-P rotary table.
Details on REWI additional correction
You can define and activate the REWI additional correction function
yourself using the Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx CALYPSO measurement
plan. You can install this measurement plan from the CALYPSO installation DVD under "Tools""Measurement Plan Examples". Then the measurement plan is located in the user directory of CALYPSO under workarea
\inspections_examples\inspections_rt_squareness.
A CMM Check, a Rotary Table Check or two reference spheres at different
heights is/are needed for running the measurement plan.
For more information, please refer to the User instructions for the Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx measurement plan. The document is located in
the <program directory>\userinfo\manuals\de directory. You can also
open it by clicking the User Information button in the CNC start window.
Once the residual REWI error has been determined, it will be automatically
compensated for mathematically during measurements with the rotary
table.
The REWI additional correction becomes invalid as soon as the location
of the rotary table changes.
CALYPSO
12-11
Practical notes
For high-precision measuring jobs, it may be of advantage if the dimensions of the device used for defining the local residual REWI errors correspond to the workpiece to be measured. The device for defining the residual REWI errors should be located at the same position in the measurement volume and should roughly have the same dimensions as the
workpiece. When measuring on the workpiece, approximately the same
guideway sections are then used for defining the residual REWI errors,
thus leading to more exact measuring results.
If maximum accuracy is important, you should perform the definition of
the REWI additional correction shortly prior to the corresponding measuring job if possible. External influences on the residual REWI errors such
as the influence of temperature and workpiece weight can thus be eliminated to a large extent.
12-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The workpiece permits direct qualification of the rotary table axis (e.g.
shafts with minor defects in shape).
In this case, select the Measure RT axis option in the Rotary Table window and proceed with the workpiece in the same way as
described for the measurement cylinder method (see Qualifying the
The workpiece does not permit direct qualification of the rotary table
axis, because it only contains features that are not suitable for setting
the rotary table axis (prismatic parts, flat turned parts, shafts with
major defects in shape).
In this case, select the Load existing RT axis option in the Rotary
Table window. A requirement here is that the RT axis has been qualified beforehand with a corresponding measurement plan (see
Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]).
Note: The imported measurement plan must have the same base alignment as the current measurement plan.
1 Click Rotary Table in the list of prerequisites and click Import
Measurement Plan in the Rotary Table window.
2 Select the measurement plan that is suitable for the axis qualification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-13
Groups with the features of the imported measurement plan are inserted in both the list of features as well as the list of characteristics.
x 90.0000
Show loading of RT
Rotate to
0.000000
Degree
Rotate around
0.000000
Degree
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
Wobble angle
0.010480
Position
Eccentricity
Orientation
393.0873
nx 0.0000443620
-1103.89
ny
0.00000
-0.000177442
nz 0.9999999832
RT pos absolute
-9.000000
1171.790259
Angle to main axis
0.010480
12-14
Raise RT / Lower RT: The toggle button is only displayed when using
the lowerable rotary table. Lifts or lowers the rotary table.
Show loading of RT: Shows in a separate window the tilting moment of the workpiece on the rotary table (Visualizing the tilting
moment of the RT-AB rotary table [ 1238]).
RT axis date: Date and time of the last axis setting as well as position
and orientation of the rotary table axis in the machine coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
When the rotary table rotates, all features, characteristics and coordinate
systems are turned around the RT axis. Errors in qualifying the RT axis thus
have an immediate effect on the precision of the measurement.
For qualification of the rotary table axis, always use a stylus that is as
rigid as possible (e.g. the master stylus).
Make sure that the stylus and normal and/or workpiece are as clean
as possible for the axis qualification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-15
Advantages
Disadvantages
1-sphere method
2-sphere method
12-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Measurement cylinder meth- The RT axis is qualified over Measurement cylinder required.
od
the entire height of the cyl- Master stylus can not be used.
inder. This compensates for
residual perpendicularity errors of the CMM and they
have less of an effect on the
measuring uncertainty.
Short measuring time.
Simple attachment; the cylinder is fastened to the rotary
table in a way that it can be
reproduced at any time.
Self-centering method
Use
1-sphere method
2-sphere method
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-17
od [ 1218]
method [ 1224]
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the self-centering method
[ 1227]
CMM
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the reference sphere onto the rotary table top, as far to the
outside as possible.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
12-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-19
12-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Mechanical
rotation axis
CMM
CMM
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the reference spheres onto the rotary table top at different
heights, as far to the outside as possible.
The different heights should approximately represent the size of the
workpiece to be measured.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
4 Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-21
12-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Measure the two spheres manually with 6 points each.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the spheres under Nominal
Definition.
11Use the spheres to form a base alignment.
In doing so, place the zero point in the upper sphere; use the lower
sphere for the planar rotation.
12Open the definition template for the upper sphere and use Nominal
Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop
over the sphere.
13Enter 0/0/0 at Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
the base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
14Under Angular Pitch, enter the desired value (e.g. 60) and under
Real number the matching number of sphere measurements (e.g.
6).
15Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
16Repeat step 12 for the lower sphere. However, 0/0/0 must not be set
under Center, rather the actual coordinates of the spheres in the base
alignment.
17In the toolbox or via Measure, select a cone.
18Under Nominal Definition, select Recall.
19Select all spheres in the loops.
20Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
21Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the cone in
the list.
22Click OK to confirm your input.
A message is displayed.
23Click YES to confirm.
24Define the clearance planes for the upper sphere.
25Start the CNC run.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the cone.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for workpiece measurements.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-23
xwz
180
Computed rotary
table axis at
Z' = Z+xwz
CMM
xwz
CMM
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the measurement cylinder onto the rotary table top using, for
example, 3-jaw clamps).
2 Insert a qualified stylus that you can use to probe the cylinder as far
towards the top and bottom as possible.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
4 Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
12-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-25
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Measure the cylinder manually in 2 sections that are as far apart as
possible.
Note: In doing so, make sure that the BA not rotating with RT
entry is selected in the definition template of the cylinder under Nominal Definition.
11Open the definition template for the cylinder and use Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop over
the cylinder.
12Enter 0/0/0 at Center.
13Under Angular Pitch, enter 180 and under Real number 2.
14Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
15Probe a point on the measurement cylinder from above.
16Using the cylinder and the point, set the base alignment.
Note: Make sure that you only use the first cylinder in the loop (Cylinder1(1)) for the base alignment.
17Link the two cylinders into a symmetry cylinder.
18Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
19Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the symmetry cylinder in the list.
20Tick the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center and
Retract to current side check boxes.
21Click OK to confirm your input.
A message is displayed.
22Click YES to confirm.
23Define the clearance planes for the cylinder.
24Start the CNC run.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the symmetry cylinder.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for workpiece measurements.
Note: If your CMM is equipped with a scanning probe, you should record
the cylinder using scanning paths instead of discrete-point measurement
(see Scanning). This leads to more stable results and thus more exact
rotary table measurements.
12-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
12-27
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.
11Set the values shown above and confirm with OK.
12Probe the entity from -Z.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the point under Nominal Definition.
13Use this point to form a base alignment.
14Open the definition template of the point and use Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop over the
point.
15Enter 0/0/0 at Center.
The coordinates of the point are required here. As this point sets the
base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
16Under Angular Pitch, enter the desired value (e.g. 60) and under
Real number the matching number of sphere measurements (e.g.
6).
17Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
18In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
19Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
20For the circle and the plane, select all points in the loop.
21Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
22Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
12-28
23Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the perpendicular in the list.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alignment by eye
CALYPSO
12-29
12-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In order to carry out homing with the rotary table at the start of each
CNC run, tick the RT home position check box.
Note: The RT does not move to the home position immediately, only
when the CNC starts.
3 To mechanically align the workpiece at the beginning of a CNC run,
tick the check box for the desired type under Align part mechanically.
By Eye
Normal from Feature
Base Alignment Axis
In this case, after setting the base alignment, the rotary table is positioned in the CNC run in such a way that the axes of the base alignment run parallel to the CMM axes.
You can set the RT position again after RT prealignment.
Loading mode
The LRT has been lowered and can be loaded. No measurement is
possible in this mode.
Measuring mode
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-31
The LRT is lifted. Measuring values can only be applied in the measuring mode.
The rotary table will automatically switch to the measuring mode as soon
as the CMM is switched on or a connection is re-established.
NOTICE
Do not clamp workpieces on the faceplate and the measuring table.
Do not attach the reference standard to the rotary table. The rotary table
is more flexible than the measuring table, thus causing calibration errors.
The RT travel commands dialog box allows you to lift or lower the LRT
(you will find more information in the Online Help under RT travel commands).
At CNC start, the LRT is always lifted even if the RT activated for this
meas. plan and Passive RT check boxes are not ticked in the Rotary
Table window.
In the Rotary Table window, you can define that the rotary table is
lowered at the end and when canceling the CNC run. In the presettings
of CALYPSO, the rotary table is not lowered after the CNC run. By saving
the measurement plan, the settings made on the Rotary Table page
will also be saved.
12-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-33
Using the loading mode for the RT-AB rotary table [ 1239]
pling [ 1244]
Position after
drifting
Original
position
12-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Rotary Table
RT activated for this meas. plan
Rotate Now
Passive RT
0.00
0.00
By Eye / Manually
Help Position
Normal from Feature
Manual
RT clearance paths
Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center
0.00
Auto
+X
*
Auto
Retract to top
Mass Moment of Inertia (MMI)
Redefine at every CNC start
0.00
Reset
Measuring errors are avoided because the base alignment rotates along
with the rotary table. CALYPSO does not use the nominal position of the
rotary table for this, but the very precisely measured rotational angle of
the rotary table.
NOTICE
You should carry out a rotary table homing run before you use the rotary
table as a passive RT.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-35
RT travel commands
File...
Rotate to
0.000000
Rotate around
0.000000
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
You can also use the joystick of the control console to move the rotary
table.
1 To do so, hold down the button in the left joystick and move it to the
left or right.
2 To display the position you have reached, click Read.
Entering patterns
Via File Current status of RT axis, you can also enter increments.
12-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RT travel commands
File...
Angular Spacing
360 /
4.00
0
x 90.0000
Show loading of RT
Rotate to
0.000000
Degree
Rotate around
0.000000
Degree
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
Wobble angle
0.010480
Position
Eccentricity
Orientation
393.0873
nx 0.0000443620
-1103.89
ny
0.00000
-0.000177442
nz 0.9999999832
RT pos absolute
-9.000000
1171.790259
Angle to main axis
0.010480
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-37
Before using the rotary table for the first time, the loading display needs
to be initialized. Initialization must be performed at startup by a service
engineer.
The loading display may only be used with the faceplate used during initialization. It is not permitted to use a faceplate with a different diameter
or weight.
The loading display can be opened via the RT travel commands window (Show loading of RT button) or via the stop light window
(More Show RT loading).
The loading display is opened in the RT-AB workpiece positioning
aid window.
The green point indicates the tilting moment caused by the workpiece.
The current Tilt moment is displayed at the bottom edge of the display
area. If the green point is within the red circle, the tilting moment is within
the permissible range.
If the green point is within the green circle, the tilting moment is in the
optimal range.
The green arrow indicates the direction in which to move the workpiece
in order to set the tilting moment to the optimal range.
To show or hide further detailed information, click the Show / Hide
data button.
NOTICE
The loading display will only be updated if you tick Live view below the
display area. Otherwise, the display will not change, even if you shift the
loading on the rotary table.
Display options
12-38
The loading display shows the rotary table from above. The displayed
directions correspond to the machine coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-39
RT clearance planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance planes when a rotary
table is used.
As soon as the rotary table is active, additional clearance planes and
groups are available for the features. The designations of these clearance
planes are composed of RTCP or RTG and an axial direction.
If you use the rotary table to probe rotationally symmetrical objects always
from the same direction (direction of the CMM), it is recommended to
use these RT clearance planes (RTCP...) or RT clearance groups (RTG...).
12-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you use the usual clearance plane (CP), bear in mind that this clearance
plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it rotates about the
rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see illustration).
The RT clearance planes or groups do not rotate with the base alignment
(and thus the workpiece). The position of the RT clearance planes is referred to the unrotated base alignment at an RT position of 0 degrees
(see illustration).
RT position 0 degree
RT position 45 degree
Y
Probing direction
Probing direction
SE + X
SE + X RTSE + X
RTSE + X
RT position
One rotary table position is assigned to each feature.
The rotary table can thus move to the required position for each
measurement, irrespective of the sequence of features in the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-41
12-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Highlight the desired feature and enter any angle under set to or
select an incremental angle. Select On or Off for base alignment rotating.
CALYPSO
12-43
12Repeat this procedure until all desired points have been probed.
Note: Only the first RT position is displayed in the clearance data as well
as in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Center of symmetry
When measuring workpieces with rotational pattern using the rotary table, it is not the stylus that moves to the feature but the workpiece is
12-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
rotated in such a way that each pattern features can be measured from
the same fixed probing direction.
Rotate rotary table as
well
In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the Rotate rotary table as well option in the Rotary pattern dialog box.
Clearance planes
An RT clearance plane that defines the direction for probing the workpiece is to be selected as the clearance plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-45
90
90
Probing direction
180
180
270
270
90
180
90
270
180
Probing direction
0
0
270
12-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-1
The rack assignment can be saved together with the measurement plan.
During a CNC start, CALYPSO checks whether the current assignment
complies with the assignment in the measurement plan and prompts you,
if necessary, to create the correct assignment.
To configure the stylus system changer, the following steps are necessary:
ST, ST 3, MT, MT old and ProMax only: Define the length of the master
stylus
For RDS only: Determine the RDS geometry (only if no reversal measurement has been carried out)
Determine the position of each holder (for the FCR25, VAST XXT,
MCR20 and SCR200: qualify the rack)
This step must be repeated if the position of the changer was
changed.
13-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The TP20 from Renishaw is designed for automatic stylus system changes
with the MCR20 stylus system changer modules, and the same is true of
the TP200 with the SCR200 module (see Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer [ 136] and SCR200 stylus system changer [ 137]).
On a VISTA, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH6. On an
Eclipse, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH10.
Bear in mind that you can also change styli manually on the TP20 and the
TP200 (see the user data on the TP20 / TP200 and RDS).
Risk of damage to the RDS plate!
When you change stylus systems manually without the measuring system,
the retaining solenoid is deenergized immediately. In order to avoid damage, you must be holding the stylus system in your hand at this time.
If there is no measuring system in the TP20 and you are preparing to
change the stylus system on the RDS plate manually, remember that the
retaining solenoid for the RDS plate will be deenergized immediately, because the switch contact is open. There is a consequent risk of the RDS
plate dropping out and suffering damage.
Additional racks are attached to the changer holder to render the storage
of various stylus systems and styli more comfortable. Thus the stylus system changer is equipped with different holders. In the case of a two-stage
stylus system change, the stylus system changer is equipped with holders
for complete measuring systems and probes without stylus system and
racks with holders for the stylus systems.
Supported configurations
CALYPSO supports the two-stage stylus system change for the following
configurations at bridge CMMs:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-3
The probe which is separated into the measuring system and the stylus
system is attached to the rotating and swiveling plate of the RDS. Depending on the need, different stylus systems can be attached to the receptacle of the adapter plate. These stylus systems are positioned in special racks. The FCR25, XXT and SCR600 racks can be bolted onto the
changer holder for the RDS stylus system changer.
Names of the components
In CALYPSO, unique names are assigned to all stylus systems and styli.
The name of the stylus and stylus system change defines the type of
change to be performed. To identify the individual parts of a two-stage
stylus system, the bearing part of such a stylus system including the
probe is also assigned a unique name.
13-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Always store
Store if there is a place available
Stylus system
Value
Piccolo
MasterStylus
Always store
Hook
Do not store
Star
Goliath
Always store
Do not store
OK
Cancel
Help
Note: If you select Always store and no holder is available, then the
normal manual stylus system change will take place.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-5
13-6
After the Store Stylus operation, the probe moves only to the
transfer point, because without a measuring module movement is restricted to the zone of magnetic force movement without a measuring module outside the MCR20s zone of magnetic force causes the
controller to issue collision messages.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Strong solenoids may affect the TP20 probe. If probing fails, switch off the
solenoids if necessary or consult the operating instructions supplied with
the TP20/Renishaw.
The probe moves from the end point of the RDS stylus change to the
zone of magnetic force of the MCR20 rack with open contact. As soon
as the zone of magnetic force is reached, the closing of the contact
is taken over again by the MCR20.
In the case of a manual stylus system change, the RDS change is triggered by clicking the Drop arrow. No action in CALYPSO is necessary
to change the module of the TP20. Simply remove the module manually. To pick up the stylus, you must click the Pick up arrow regardless of whether a module or the RDS plate was used.
On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the following in mind:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-7
Use of a PH10
If you have qualified stylus positions that could cause a collision with
the stylus system changer rack when stylus systems are subsequently
changed, you must use Approach Parameters to change the parameters for the holders in question.
Never change the stylus system without calling up the manual or automatic
stylus system change (e.g. by selecting another stylus system in the Probing system qualification dialog box and changing the stylus system
manually).
In the case of a manual stylus system change, the RDS change is triggered by clicking the Drop arrow. No action in CALYPSO is necessary
to change the module of the TP 200. To pick up the stylus, you must
click the Pick up arrow regardless of whether a module or the RDS
plate was used.
The ACR3 can only be operated horizontally. Maximum two systems may
be interconnected with each other (max. 8 positions). When using extensions, only the changer located directly at the head of the PH10M may
be used. Otherwise, the resulting force at the PH10M becomes too high.
Meeting tolerances
Reliable operation of the stylus changer is only guaranteed if the tolerances for probe alignment are met. These are 0.2 for the inclination, roll
13-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
and yaw angles. If this is not possible, you must use the AM1 module of
Renishaw.
NOTICE
When using the AM1, measuring range is lost and you have to take an
amount of kinematic uncertainty into account.
NOTICE
For each TP20/TP200 or XXT, you must create an own changer rack in
CALYPSO and qualify it with the RDS plate which is to be used to change
the module or the XXT plate on this changer.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-9
13-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This is where you manage all holders and assignments of your stylus system changers.
NOTICE
The arrangement does not need to represent the actual position on the
stylus system changers.
You have the following options:
Qualifying holders
Deleting holders
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-11
Setting up holders
To use your stylus system changer in CALYPSO, you must map it with all
holder positions by means of symbols in the Automatic stylus system change window.
3 Select the type of your stylus system changer and confirm with OK.
4 Enter a new name for the holder.
(For the MCR20, SCR200, FCR25 and XXT stylus system changers, you
enter the name for a complete group of holders.)
An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you selected, appears in the Automatic stylus system change window.
13-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
(With the MCR20, SCR200 and [FCR25] stylus system changers, six
holders are displayed and with the VAST XXT, three holders are displayed.)
Note: With the ProMax, all existing holders are automatically defined
when creating a changer. Possibly existing holders of other types (e.g.
MT) with the same names are replaced.
5 Add more holders and racks as necessary, until the configuration of
your stylus system changer in the system matches that at the CMM.
6 If necessary, move the holders and racks using the arrow icons.
Configuring holders
1 To configure the current holder, select the Set stylus system to
stylus system holder entry in the in the Changer selection list.
2 Select the stylus system you want to assign to the holder, and click
OK to confirm your choice.
The name of the stylus system is displayed below the holder.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-13
3 Press OK to confirm.
Qualified
Not qualified
Active
Not active
13-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualified
Not qualified
Active
Not active
Rack assignments
Using rack assignments
If you need different rack assignments in various measurement plans, it
is not necessary to create a new assignment each time. Define different
rack assignments and activate the required assignment for the measurement plan.
Check during CNC start
At the beginning of the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the real rack assignment and indicates in the Rack Assignment: <name_of_assignment> window which stylus system is to be loaded into which holder.
NOTICE
If you do not define any assignment, CALYPSO will use your holder definitions made in the Automatic stylus system change dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-15
Note: An assignment must only be saved when it is created. Subsequent changes will be adopted automatically without saving.
When closing the active assignment, all available holders are visible again.
However, the assignment corresponds to the last active rack assignment.
2 Activate Use rack assignment during start and select the desired rack assignment or enter a formula for the name of the rack
assignment.
During CNC start, the formula is evaluated and the corresponding rack
assignment is set.
By way of confirmation, you can check the composition of the selected
assignment via Display.
13-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
At the beginning of the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the real rack assignment and indicates in the Rack Assignment window which stylus system is to be loaded into which holder.
It is only then that you can execute the measurement plan.
Note: Racks for RDS stylus systems can be measured with any qualified
stylus. The angle position 180/0 is generally used; the angle position 90/0
is used for the XXT.
1 Insert the master stylus (see Inserting the stylus system [ 316]).
2 Select Resources Stylus system Automatic stylus system change.
The Automatic stylus system change dialog box is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-17
4 A prompt appears, asking you whether the master stylus has been
inserted. Check the control console to make sure that stylus 1 is selected and click OK.
5 At the prompt to probe on the adapter plate, use the joysticks to touch
the adapter plate to the surface of a holder.
You should probe in the area in which the adapter plate normally
touches the holder.
6 At the prompt to probe with the stylus, use the joysticks to probe the
same place on the holder, using the stylus this time.
The length of the master stylus is displayed.
7 Click OK.
Calypso now knows the length of the master stylus. The locations of the
holders can now be defined.
Compute the offset from the virtual axis intersection of the RDS axes.
Qualify the four preset angle positions for the RDS. CALYPSO uses this
information to compute the intersection of the axes.
Note: For the passive scanning sensors (SP25, XXT), their intersection of
the axes of the RDS is determined when qualifying the master stylus.
Normally, you enter the slot distance for these sensors only once. The
entry of the slot distance is sufficient even if a reversal measurement has
been performed. (see Defining the RDS slot distance [ 1318]).
Note: You enter the slot distance for the passive scanning sensors (SP25,
XXT) once.
The illustration below shows an overview of the definition of the slot distance X. The probe is shown from above, e.g. from +Z.
13-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference edge
CALYPSO helps you when defining the slot distance. If you know the
value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this directly in the Slot
Distance field.
1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge in the measuring range.
An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine coordinates.
2 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
In the above illustration, this is position 1.
3 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
4 Turn the RDS 180 around its A axis.
In the illustration, this is position 2.
5 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
6 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
7 Check the results in the Slot Distance field. Typical values are
around 38 mm.
The position of a holder is referenced to the intersection of the two rotational axes of the RDS. CALYPSO must therefore calculate the (virtual)
intersection of these axes. To do so, you must qualify the four additional
stylus positions of the CZ master stylus (refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5):
A/B = 0/90
A/B = 0/-90
A/B = 90/0
A/B = -90/0
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-19
position [ 1320]
These distances are defined from each given position (e.g. before entry into the rack) to the midpoint of the probe. The Position Over
Holder distance is from the stylus system adapter plate (on the
bottom of the probe) to the top of the rack. The default setting 0 mm.
You can change the settings for each holder of an assignment. If you
need to change these distances because of part or stylus clearance
problems, please be aware of how close the movements are around
the probe holders and the rack.
The positions before, after and during the change as well as the additional position are bound to the corresponding assignment.
The offset, transfer position, holder angle and position itself do not
depend on the assignment.
NOTICE
The stylus system approaches the specified positions by axis. If this movement collides with obstacles on the CMM or on the stylus system changer,
you can define explicit travel paths as safe approach paths.
13-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-21
13-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: The directions shown are referenced to this point with view angle to the holder: Side means to the right; Top means to the top;
Approach Direction means here out of the rack!
Top
Side
Approach In
8 (Only for the master user): If necessary, move the position in the
holder by a certain amount under Offset.
This allows subsequent compensation for slight shifts compared to the
initially measured reference position.
Note: After indirect qualification, you can also use Offset to add
holders and assign approach parameters to holders with probing
points that are so far out that they cannot be directly approached.
9 If necessary, enter the coordinates for the Additional position in
the machine system.
The additional location will be approached after each complete
change operation.
In the case of stylus system change with DSE, this definition is used for
navigation with an approach direction of X, e.g. to avoid collision
with a Perceptron stylus system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-23
10Click OK.
Travel path from the transfer position of the holder to the transfer
position of any other holder of the same assignment
Travel path from the transfer position of the holder to the workpiece
Travel path from the workpiece to the transfer position of the holder
If you define all theoretically possible paths, you will get per rack assignment a path from the workpiece, a path to the workpiece and a path to
any other holder for each holder.
Then, the stylus system moves along these paths and no longer along the
axis directions from and to the position before, after and during change.
The additional position, too, is then no longer valid. The corresponding
definition of these paths makes it possible to avoid collisions with all obstacles on the CMM (workpiece, fixtures, stylus changer racks and other
stylus systems) during stylus system change.
13-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The intermediate positions of this list are directly approached and not by
movement by axis as is the case with approach parameters. There are
exceptions regarding the transfer points:
When moving from one holder to the next, only the path from the
last intermediate position to the holder is approached by axis; in this
case, the first intermediate position is directly approached.
With travel after change, the first intermediate position will be approached by axis as usual. You can avoid this by entering the transfer
position itself as the first position of the path, i.e. 0 / 0 / 0.
With articulating probe holders, the rotation position is the end of the
path, unless otherwise defined.
During Change paths
If you have defined a path between two certain holders in the During
Change line, this path will be approached instead of the two During
Change positions. For all holder combinations for which you have not
defined any path, the During Change positions will continue to be approached. The intermediate positions are defined at the beginning of the
path relative to the transfer position of the holder. In this case, the rotation position is also at the end of the path, unless otherwise defined.
If you hide a holder in an assignment, all defined paths for this holder will
be deleted in this assignment. If you show a holder, the default values for
the approach parameters will be used first. Paths are initially not active.
You can change the default values for the approach parameters if no
assignment is active. From the Administration selection list, select the
Close Assignment entry.
If you create a new assignment, the approach parameters of the previously active assignment will be applied.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-25
Note: After changing the approach direction, you must requalify the
holder (except for the DSE). The values entered by you under Position in the window are automatically rotated.
7 For RC sensor mounts, select the corresponding required A or B angle
of rotation in steps of 2.5.
8 Click the Define path to... or Define path button for During
Change, Before Change and After Change.
9 Select the destination holder for the During Change path.
The dialog box for the definition of the approach path is opened.
13-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10Enter the point list for the safe path. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Import destination to add the destination holder's transfer
position to the list.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control console to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
Risk of collision! Move slowly and carefully.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-27
Note: Do not click OK as long as you have not completed the following
step. In addition, ensure that the dust cover is open.
6 CALYPSO reacts differently, depending on which type of probe is installed:
With a trigger probe you are asked to move the stylus to the center
of the circle. Ensure that you measure the holder location in the
area between the hexagon screw head and the surface.
With a measuring probe, a cone on the side of the holder is located
by self center probing.
With Renishaw probes (TP20 and TP200), you are prompted to
probe points on the MCR20 or SCR200.
With an RDS, CSC or ISC probe, the additional reference surfaces
are automatically probed after probing the upper reference surface.
The approach direction is determined automatically for the ISC and
CSC.
With an XXT, a cone on the rack is determined by self center probing. You must define the length of the stylus if necessary. Proceed
in the same way as for determining the master stylus length
(Defining the length of the master stylus [ 1317]).
When the measurement is finished, you will see a symbol for the stylus
system in the holder symbol. The name is below the symbol.
7 Repeat these steps for every holder which has not yet been defined.
The second stage is the change of the plate of the SP 600 and the
SCP 600 (Stylus Change Port 600) holder.
13-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
13-29
13-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
P1
P6 P7
Z+
Y+
P2
X+
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the MCR20 are labeled
from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted.
The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in them
can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed during
stylus system changes.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-31
9 Click OK.
13-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the SCR200 are labeled
from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted and reconnect the cable between
the SCR200 and the SI200 to reactivate the photoelectric barrier.
9 Click OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-33
The stylus system is assigned, which can be seen if the stylus system
name appears below the icon for the holder.
5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no stylus system has
been assigned as yet.
13-34
2 Click the stylus system holder icon where the currently installed stylus
system should be stored (the icon for an empty holder on the rack).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click the Changer selection list and select the Store stylus system in holder entry.
The CMM places the stylus system in the selected holder. There is then
no longer a stylus system installed in the probe.
4 Click OK.
5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a stylus system, as described in Inserting the stylus system [ 316].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-35
3 Click Ref. sphere position and enter the direction of the reference
sphere post.
4 Select the probing mode (recommended: Standard) and probe the
reference sphere in the shaft direction.
When defining the geometry of the master stylus, the reference sphere
must be in the 45, 135, 225 or 315 position to prevent collisions with
the reference sphere post.
If the difference between the previous dead weight offset and the new
dead weight offset of the master stylus exceeds 30 m, you are prompted
to determine the dead weight offset again. The calculation can take a
few seconds to complete.
NOTICE
During the recalculation, the stylus must stand free (without contacting
the material).
13-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 From the Edit selection list, select Add stylus system holder.
If you entered several probes in the configuration, a selection window
appears.
3 Select the required holder.
When using several different holder systems, you must observe the different clearance distances of the holders.
When using the FCR25 holder together with the RDS holder, the During
Change position must be increased to a value of 150 for the FCR25, otherwise a collision with the holder of the RDS may be caused.
4 Assign a name to the group if necessary.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-37
You will find more information about the alignment of the VAST XXT probe
in the separate operating instructions for probing systems.
1 Click Extras Settings CMM and create a new measuring system on the Measuring Systems notebook page.
2 Check the interface type on the Interface notebook page.
3 Select all probes (i.e. the XXT) used for the RDS on the Probe notebook page by selecting the menu item in the submenu.
The activated probe and stylus system types are ticked.
4 Check the data on the Machine index card and set up the connection
to the CMM.
The currently inserted probe is stored as the master stylus.
Note: A later change of the master stylus is only possible by deleting
and assigning the measuring system again.
13-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-39
13-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This method allows you to qualify the stylus changer racks that are arranged together with the workpiece on a pallet.
Suitable holders
XXT
RDS
Conditions
MT and ProMax
XXT
RDS
Any stylus.
Collision-free qualification is possible.
Slot distance is already saved in the system.
Intersection point of the axes has been defined (e.g. after a reversal
measurement).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-41
Holder type
Conditions
ZCR
Length of the stylus has been defined (in the same way as with
the VAST master stylus by probing a point with the adapter plate
and then with the stylus itself).
Other probes:
Any stylus.
Intersection point of the axes has been defined (e.g. after a reversal measurement).
The length of the master stylus and the length of the XXT stylus are defined in the Automatic stylus change window.
NOTICE
The conditions for the automatic qualification of the holders is only
checked directly before the execution of the Qualification of stylus
system holders utility.
If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the CNC run is canceled and a
message is displayed informing you that the qualification is not possible.
13-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the desired holders in the left list and add them to the right list
using Add.
3 Change the order for the CNC run by means of the arrow icons, if
required.
The following information is shown in the list:
Holder name
Holder type
Approach Direction
4 Define the parameters for the qualification procedure in the list:
Mode: CNC / Manual / Compute
CNC: Qualification in the CNC run
Manual: Switch-over to manual qualification during the CNC run
Compute: No qualification. The data is adopted from the information about the holders.
Stylus system and styli used for qualification
Datum reference frame
Machine system: The changer is firmly arranged on the measuring
table.
Base Alignment: The changer is arranged together with the workpiece on the pallet.
(In the case of RC_CAA) Angle A and Angle B which are used
for qualification
CALYPSO
13-43
13-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14
Chapter
AutoRun interface
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-1
14-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Important AutoRun
terms
A certain number of new terms are encountered in the context of AutoRun interfaces. These terms are important for understanding the functions of AutoRun.
AutoRun interface
In an AutoRun interface, you no longer work in a measurement plan
but rather with measurement plans as objects. The measurement
plans are represented by measurement plan icons (see Layout of
the AutoRun interface [ 143]).
Desk
An AutoRun interface can contain one or more hierarchically linked
desks. A desk contains measurement plan icons and pallets (see
Basics about desks [ 144]).
Pallet
You can space several workpieces over a defined grid on a pallet and
then measure them all at once (see Basics about pallets [ 146]).
Branch
A branch is a direct link between desks (see Basics about branches [ 149]). The hierarchical structure of the desks is mapped by
branches.
Keyword
Each icon (measurement plan or pallet) can have its own unique keyword. You can use the keywords to find a desired icon (see Basics
about keywords [ 149]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-3
The illustration below briefly describes the major features of the AutoRun
interface.
Display of the measurement plan comment
Toolbar
Desk
14-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement
plan icon
Pallet
Desk link
Automatic Run
File
Con!guration
Edit
Layer
Measurement
Stylus system
Navigation
Tools
View
Testblock1
unnamed(Testblock1)
User Information
CNC Start parameter
Send results to printer
Q-DAS
Print plots
Manual Alignment
Measurement
Measurement type
Run
User de!ned
Loops
Stop
Sequence
Several icons from the same measurement plan can be contained in one
desktop, distinguished, for example, by different start parameters or parameter files. CALYPSO then assigns a serial number in brackets to the
name of the measurement plan (e.g. test block1 (2)).
When you select a run in the CNC start parameters, the name of the run
is appended with a hyphen to the measurement plan name (e.g. test
block1 - test run).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-5
CALYPSO needs to know the position of the pallet. This means you
have to define a base alignment for the pallet and this, in turn, means
that each pallet requires its own measurement plan.
X
Pallet alignment
14-6
With irregular arrangement, the position of each individual workpiece is defined by a separate part alignment.
CALYPSO must know whether the part alignments on the pallet refer
to the pallet system or to the machine system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Y
X
If the part alignments refer to the machine system, they are not
moved when offsetting and rotating the pallet system. Therefore,
the base or start alignments of the workpieces must be re-qualified if you wish to change the position of the pallet on the machine
and to maintain the assignment of the pallet and workpieces.
Y
X
X
Pallet types
There are four different pallet types:
Regular
Pallet
Irregular
The workpieces are positioned ac- The workpieces are freely distributcording to a predefined, regular X- ed on the pallet; the location of
Y grid on the pallet.
each workpiece is defined.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-7
Regular
Irregular
During a CNC start, the pallet system and the part alignment of the
first pallet location are loaded. All
other pallet locations are computed.
During a CNC start, the part alignments of all pallet locations are
loaded.
The pallet type is determined when defining the pallet (Adding a pallet
to a desk [ 1431]).
3D pallet
If you enter a positive value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from bottom to top.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
If you enter a negative value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from top to bottom.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
14-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
When you open an AutoRun file with 3D pallets, but CALYPSO is not
connected to a CMM of the METROTOM type, the layers of the 3D
pallets will not be displayed. The pallet will be shown as a 2D pallet with
only the pallet locations of the first layer. In this case, it is only possible
to measure the pallet locations of the first layer.
All layers of the 3D pallet will be available as soon as you connect CALYPSO to METROTOM.
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for example: Machine processing stage type workpiece.
On every level, you then create as many branches as there are levels below
it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you access the desk with the
measurement plan for the desired workpiece.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-9
14-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prerequisites
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can start a measurement are as follows:
The correct measurement plan must have been found and marked
beforehand.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-11
Note: If you possess the necessary equipment, you can also scan the required keyword using a barcode reader.
Conditions:
The AutoRun interface is loaded (see Loading the AutoRun interface [ 1411]).
The workpiece to be measured is at the correct position on the
CMM.
1 Select Tools Looking for run... from the menu.
The Looking for run window is opened.
Looking for run
Enter a keyword:
14-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
While entering the search criterion, CALYPSO shows a list of all icons
containing the current search criterion as keyword or measurement
plan name. No distinction is made between upper and lower cases.
4 If the desired icon is shown in the list, select the icon from the list.
5 To display the list again, click Search or ENTER.
If necessary, CALYPSO changes to the layer that contains the desired icon
and highlights this icon. The highlighted icon is displayed in the dialog
box next to Selected icons.
If no icon matching the entered search criterion is found, the text (Nothing) will be displayed in red next to Selected icons.
NOTICE
If a measurement plan is included several times in a layer, then the search
via measurement plan name shows several icons found. Therefore, check
whether the icons found correspond to the desired search result.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-13
Please select
run
AutoRun 5.0 - Roundness1 (6)
(All Characteristics)
- AutoRun
5.0 - A
Diameter1
Plane
Run
Roundness1
Text
After the start of the CNC run, the marked icons will be executed in the
sequence in which you selected them.
14-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
14-15
If you have privileges to enter CNC start parameters, define the CNC
start parameter (see Defining CNC start parameters [ 1438]).
Then restart the measurement.
If you run several measurement plans one after the other, you can enter
the printout header parameters for all started measurement plans for
which the forced input at CNC start has been activated. This saves you
from entering the parameters at the end of one and prior to the start of
the next measurement plan.
Use the Continue > and < Back buttons to page in the Input Parameter window through the input pages for all concerned measurement plans and make your settings. On the last page, click OK to start
processing of the marked icons.
14-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
After clicking Cancel and confirmation of a query, the CNC run for all
marked icons is started. All entries confirmed with Continue > will be
accepted. For all other measurement plans, the available printout header
parameters will be used.
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the Forced Input of Printout Header Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the pre-parameters
of a measurement plan.
You will find more information on the Stop Light window in Checking
and controlling the measurement plan run [ 711].
CALYPSO
14-17
NOTICE
The CAD window is closed by default after every measuring run. If you
want to keep it open, activate Tools Show CAD.
Green
The measuring results are OK.
Yellow
The measuring results are within the warning limit range.
Red
The measuring results are not OK.
DIN PAR
DIN REC
The color coding is displayed until the icon is remeasured or the AutoRun
interface is closed.
Result summary
You can show a short summary of measuring results for each measured
icon. To do so, highlight the desired measurement plan or pallet icon. The
Result tab shows the following information:
Short summary
This is where the part number, date and time of the measurement are
shown.
14-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Number of characteristics
Characteristics within tolerance
Characteristics outside tolerance
Characteristics exceeding the warning limit
Characteristics not calculated
Number of coordinate systems
Number of text elements
Saved printouts in PDF format
If you highlight a pallet icon, the summaries of all measured pallet locations will be listed one below the other together with the number of the
pallet location. In this case, the pallet locations are not sorted according
to the number but according to the moment of the measurement.
To do so, you must have the privilege Show Custom Printout or Show
Default Printout.
Procedure
Highlight the measurement plan or pallet icon whose last default printout
or custom printout you want to open.
In the context menu of the icon, select the entry Printout from last
run <printout_type>.
If you selected Custom Printout, the measurement plan will be loaded
before the custom printout is displayed. This can take a few seconds. The
custom printout of the last run started by AutoRun is loaded.
The Default Printout is usually displayed immediately regardless of
whether the run was started by CALYPSO or AutoRun.
Default printout
Custom printout
The printout header data of an AutoRun icon may differ from those of
the original measurement plan. The printout header data of the AutoRun
icon is shown.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-19
NOTICE
The assignment of pallet location and saved actual values of the last CNC
run is not possible with pallets, since the pallet location is not saved.
Thats why the printout header data of the original measurement plan is
used.
An exception is the part number, whose count is incremented by AutoRun.
14-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
configure AutoRun, i.e. assign privileges to the users and check the
settings of the CMM in the system configuration (see Configuring
AutoRun [ 1421]).
prepare the measurement, i.e. make the settings for the CNC run (see
Preparing a measurement [ 1437]).
NOTICE
For many of the following instructions you can also use the respective
context menu instead of the menu items of the menu bar.
Configuring AutoRun
Steps for configuring AutoRun
With the aid of AutoRun interfaces, CALYPSO processes are defined and
mapped such that even inexperienced users will have no trouble running
them.
Before you start mapping desks, the first thing to do is assign privileges
for the future users. You also have to check the parameters set in the
system settings for measurement and for the CMM and make any
changes that might prove necessary.
Starting AutoRun
1 Close all open measurement plans.
2 Select Plan AutoRun.
AutoRun is started and opens the Automatic Run window with a new,
empty AutoRun interface named noname.arn.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-21
14-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
It is also possible to define the user privileges in the system setup. To do
so, select Extras Settings Users and enter the privileges on the
User Rights notebook page.
Special aspects
Change Privileges
Exit
New Document
Save Document
Save Document As
Open Document
Change paths in document
Privileges for adapting the fixed paths after copying the AutoRun interfaces.
Copy/Paste Icon(s)
Delete Icon(s)
Move/resize icon(s)
Load/remove picture(s)
New Desk
Delete Desk
New Measurement Plan
New Pallet
Define Pallet Parameters
Define Loop in Pallet
Add Meas. Plan to Pallet
New Desk Link
Export of Measurement Plan Icons
Import of Measurement Plan Icons
Define Sequence
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-23
Privilege
Special aspects
Start/Stop Measurement
Define keywords
Workdesk disabled if Find run dialog is open If you assign this privilege, mouse actions will be
disabled in the workspace when the Looking for
run window is open.
This is intended to prevent an unintentional focus
change (and thus unintentional runs) when barcodes are being scanned.
Define List of Characteristics CNC pa- Access to the List of Characteristics parameters
rameter
and to information on the measuring run in the
Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define Run Parameters is not set.
14-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Privilege
Special aspects
Define run selection on icons
Define Parameter File CNC parameter Access to the Parameter File in the Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define Run Parameters is not set.
Define printout header data
Measurement
Environment
Change stylus
CALYPSO
14-25
There is an explanation in the Online Help under Changing the environment [ 1013].
icon [ 1428]
If a measurement plan is needed several times on the AutoRun interface,
then you can easily and quickly copy and paste the corresponding icon to
the AutoRun interface.
Copying and pasting an icon [ 1445]
Defining desks
You can structure your AutoRun interface with the aid of desks. A desk
contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together. You can
change to different desks via branches.
14-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for example: Machine - processing stage - type - workpiece.
1 If you have not yet defined a desk in this interface, select
Desk Rename and assign a new name to the No Name layer.
(Each time a new AutoRun interface is defined, CALYPSO creates a
desk named No Name, which you should rename before use).
- or If you have already defined a desk, select Desk New and enter a
name.
The name of the new desk appears in a selection list in the toolbar.
Ja
Nein
Abbrechen
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-27
14-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The name of the last icon highlighted has a dark gray background.
Conditions:
You have the authorization Move/resize icon(s) (see Assigning AutoRun user rights [ 1422]).
1 Highlight the desired icons.
2 To snap the icons, select Alignment <Alignment method>
from the context menu.
CALYPSO provides the following alignment methods:
Alignment methods Description
Align left
The icons are aligned along the left margin of the last icon selected.
Horizontal center
Align right
Align top
The icons are aligned to the last icon selected at the top.
Vertical center
Align bottom
The icons are aligned to the last icon selected at the bottom.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-29
The two rightmost or leftmost icons remain at their position. All icons in between are distributed in horizontal direction such that the intermediate distances
are equal.
Same height
Mapping a pallet
Pallets in AutoRun
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted in a regular pattern or
in a free arrangement on a pallet. CALYPSO determines the position of
the pallet on the table by computing the pallet's base alignment. The
position of the workpieces is derived from the alignment of the measurement plan and the column and rows of the pallet.
3D pallet
CALYPSO supports 2D and 3D pallets. However, a 3D pallet is only available if the METROTOM measuring machine is connected to CALYPSO.
You will find more information on 2D and 3D pallets in Basics about
pallets [ 146].
Preparing a pallet
Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step
does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns.
14-30
CALYPSO
with regular arrangement: the part alignment of the first pallet location
Adding a pallet
1 Click the Pallet icon and open the desired measurement plan.
The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Pallet Parameters
Pallet Name:
Unnamed
Comment:
Pallet type
Pallet System:
Part Alignment:
Regular
Base Alignment
Start Alignment
Selection of the
pallet system
Group Rows
Group Columns
Number
Number
Distance
Distance
Styli List
Number
Distance
Apply
Reset
OK
Cancel
2 Enter a name for the pallet in the Pallet Name input field.
3 Tick the Regular check box for a regular pallet and enter the pattern:
In the Group Columns group, enter the Distance and the
Number of columns.
In the Group Rows group, enter the Distance and the Number of rows.
If CALYPSO is connected to a METROTOM measuring machine,
you must enter the Distance and the Number of layers in the
Styli List group.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-31
4 Determine the pallet system depending on the type of pallet you wish
to define:
If the part alignments refer to the pallet system, you must activate
Parts referring to pallet.
If the part alignments do not refer to the pallet system but to the
machine system, you must deactivate Parts referring to pallet.
5 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System selection list.
6 Click LOS Position for a pallet with free arrangement and transfer
the appropriate part alignment for each individual workpiece into the
list in the LOS Position window.
7 Click OK.
The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You
still have the option of defining the size and the appearance of the icon
(Positioning and configuring icons on the desk [ 1428]).
14-32
CALYPSO
3 Enter the loop parameters: Click Insert to insert a line and enter the
start value, end value and step width of the loop.
4 Press OK to confirm.
5 Select the Loops option to prepare the pallet for the CNC run.
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see Preparing a measurement [ 1437]), so that the pallet can be measured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-33
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see Preparing a measurement [ 1437]), so that the pallet can be measured.
14-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
approached prior to every pallet measuring run as this would be very time
consuming. The start position should only be approached prior to the
measurement of the first pallet location. This can be accomplished with
the aid of PCM commands.
In the case of a single pallet, the current pallet location number and the
number of the first pallet location are additionally included in the printout
header data.
Add a query to the pre-parameters of the measurement plan. This query
is used to check whether the current pallet location number corresponds
to the first pallet location number. When the numbers correspond to each
other, the CMM should move to a defined position.
Example:
if (getRecordHead("palletlocationnumber") ==
getRecordHead("firstpalletlocationnumber")) then
positionCMM(100,-100,-50)
endif
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
CALYPSO
14-35
endif
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
The barcode of the measurement plan icon or of the pallet icon with
which the workpiece is to be measured is affixed to each workpiece
or pallet.
14-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Creating a branch
1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from which
you want to link to another desk by means of a branch.
2 Click the Desk symbol and enter the name of the desk to which the
branch is to lead.
If you want to go to a new desk that has not been defined yet, enter
the new name.
3 Click OK.
CALYPSO creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of the
destination desk).
Preparing a measurement
Overview: Preparing a measurement
Once you have defined desks with measurement plans or pallets, you can
prepare for measurement. You can perform all preparations for measurement or only some - this depends on the privileges you have assigned
to the user who is going to perform measurement.
You have the following options for preparing the measurement:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-37
14-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result
Selection
CMM
Order of run
Base Alignment
Custom Printout
Start Alignment
Compact Printout
Display plots
Navigate-Feature To Feature
Print plots
Automatic
EXCEL-printout
Copies
Run Mode
All Characteristics
Current Selection
PostScript
Speed in mm/s
Result To File
Table File
Parameter File
Merge File
Q-DAS
PTX
PiWeb
DMIS
Printout header data
OK
Cancel
Help
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-39
Further information on the CNC run and on this window can be found
under Starting a CNC run [ 77] and under Start Measurement /
Measurement Plan Definition in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the
Online Help.
5 Press OK to confirm.
14-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Press OK to confirm.
In the CNC start parameters, the system administrator or the user can
enter additional printout header parameters, overwrite default parameters or accept the data of the original measurement plan after clicking
Data Input in the Input Parameter window.
As soon as the user performs the CNC start, the Input Parameter
window opens for all measurement plans activated via Force Input at
Start, one page for each icon involved. In this way, the user can determine the printout header data for all following measurements upon CNC
start.
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the Forced Input of Printout Header Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the input parameters of a measurement plan.
Defining a printout
You can define the printout header output specifically for each measurement plan and each pallet in the AutoRun interface.
The user privilege for defining the printout is called Define Printout.
The printout output via AutoRun is icon-related. Settings which are
changed in a measurement plan icon are only valid for this specific icon
even if the same measurement plan applies to another icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-41
If you want to change the printout for several icons of the same measurement plan, edit the original measurement plan and load the settings
of the measurement plan for the individual icons.
These settings are also active when the last custom printout is opened
subsequently. Thus it is possible to open for one measurement several
custom printouts with different formats and settings one after the other.
3 Make the desired settings for the printout on the three index cards.
The settings correspond to those in the Format custom printout window for the original measurement plan. The settings for the
default printout, the selection of the Excel and DMIS report and the
printout reset are not included.
- or To transfer the settings for these icons from the original measurement
plan to AutoRun, click Load settings from measurement
plan.
4 Tick the Apply settings for next run check box if you would like
that the settings made should only apply to the next CNC run.
The settings made here will be reset after the next CNC run of this
icon.
14-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Managing AutoRun
Overview: Managing AutoRun
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up the AutoRun
interface and make sure it remains up to date.
The following tasks are possible:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-43
This window shows a list of all desks, measurement plans and icons of
the AutoRun interface and the actual paths. The Valid column shows
whether the path exists.
Note: The setting Yes under Valid means that the path exists. This
must not necessarily be the path which contains the object displayed,
however. The setting No under Valid means, in contrast, that this
path is not the correct path for the displayed object.
The list shows all desks in the same way in succession.
The first line is a subheading with the name of the desk.
The second name contains the path for the background image if
available.
The following lines contain the desk, pallet and measurement plan
icons included in this desk as well as the paths of the pallet and
measurement plan icons. Additionally with regard to pallets, if no
measurement plan has been inserted in a pallet, the path cannot
be entered and the column with the validity always indicates No.
If an icon is linked to an image, a line with the text (Image) and the
path of the image file appears after the line with the icon name.
If the icon contains the absolute path for a parameter file (see Loading
parameter file in the CNC run), an additional line with the text (Parameter File) and the path of the parameter file appears after the line
for the image.
2 You can modify the paths by overwriting them.
- or Highlight the lines you want to modify. To do so, use the context menu
with its menu items.
Use the Search for and Replace with fields to replace the paths
in the highlighted (or all) lines.
14-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To complete the Replace with field, you can use the Reset and
Looking for directory symbols.
Start replacement by clicking Replace or with OK.
The replacement process is executed.
When ticking the Request Each Replacement check box, you
have the option of confirming or retracting each individual replacement or canceling the entire process.
Otherwise, a message about the number of replacements made appears upon completion of the replacement.
Note: The names of the image files and measurement plans are not
changed by the replacement. CALYPSO ensures that these names remain unchanged.
This prevents, for example, a measurement plan change. Thus, it is not
possible to transfer CNC start parameters or printout header data accidentally from one measurement plan to another measurement plan.
If a measurement plan is to be replaced, you must assign the corresponding icon again. The same applies to images.
Managing desks
You can change the name of a desk or delete it from the AutoRun interface. Use for this the Rename or Delete menu item in the Desk menu.
Before renaming or deleting a desk, make sure that the desired one is
displayed on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-45
14-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15
Chapter
Duplex mode
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-1
Master
Slave
Measured
values
Measured
values
Calculation
Evaluation
Make the preparations for duplex mode. In particular, CALYPSO must
know how the two measuring ranges, originally independent, relate to
each other (see Preparing the duplex mode [ 154]).
Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log off (see
Measuring with a duplex CMM [ 1515]).
Asynchronous run
15-2
The duplex mode runs in the asynchronous mode. The measurement plan
is measured From Feature List. Master and client measure parallel to their features. Both machines move at the same time. If the
master requires data from the client for calculating a specific feature,
the master will only continue after having received the data.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
In the same way as in duplex mode, you can also control more than two
measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can increase the
measuring range and you can save measuring time in asynchronous
mode. The procedure is principally the same as in duplex mode; you have
a master and several clients.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-3
The files for duplex mode [ 157] are available and correct.
15-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Slave = cmmws_2
Slave1 = cmmws_2
Slave = cmmws_1
Master = cmmws_2
Slave1 = cmmws_1
Master = name2
Slave1 = name1
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-5
3 On the client computer, select the Slave option and enter the parameters for coupling:
Port number: taken from the services file in the ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
Mapping of the measuring columns to the computers: on the
basis of the computer names in the hosts file, in this case, for
example, cnc2.
Check the connection before coupling.
4 On the client computer, select Extras Settings Environment and open the Dual Arm notebook page.
15-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Enter the directory paths for the measurement plans and the base
alignments:
Directory path: locally valid designation of the corresponding
path on the client computer.
Mounted as...: valid network designation under which the client
system can access the path on the master system.
The connection in the network must be enabled and active.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-7
czcol1
czcol2
czcol3
czcol4
ZVICONTROL
counter
8881/tcp
8882/tcp
8883/tcp
8884/tcp
8888/tcp
9888/tcp
#Column1
#Column2
#Column3
#Column4
4960/tcp
4959/tcp
4961/tcp
4962/tcp
cmmws_2
cmmws_1
CMMWS_2
CMMWS_1
#PC-column2
#PC-column1
cmm_2
cmm_1
CMM_2
CMM_1
#Controler2
#Controler1
##############################################################
########
cmmws_2 is here the address of the 2nd network card of the PC at
column 2.
cmm_2 is here the address of the control unit at column 2.
15-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Step 1:
[ 159]
Step 2:
mode [ 154]
Step 3:
puters [ 1510]
Step 4:
Step 6:
Translational coupling
A reference sphere is positioned in the center of the common area.
Translational coupling involves computing the offset of the two device
zero points.
CALYPSO has a measurement plan for each method with which you can
proceed with coupling.
Stylus
Install the appropriate master stylus in each column for coupling. This
ensures maximum accuracy. You have the option of using some other
qualified styli if less accuracy is sufficient.
Subsequent coupling
Once the two measuring ranges have been coupled for the first time, the
relevant data is stored in CALYPSO and is evaluated for measurements in
duplex mode. The coupling has to be readjusted under the following
circumstances:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-9
Method
Translational + rotational
Translational + rotational
Translational
Translational
15-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is
Wait for Master ...:
You can now proceed to redefine the coupling [ 1513] or, if this
has already been done, you can start measuring.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-11
It is best to check the measurement plan before using it if you are unsure
whether all the settings are correct.
1 Open the desired measurement plan for coupling.
2 Select Resources Features Settings Editor.
3 Make sure that the following settings are selected:
Stylus System Stylus: MasterProbe (or the qualified stylus
you are going to use) is the setting for all features.
MAN-CNC mode: The MAN setting applies to all features.
Dual Arm Columns: The Slave1 setting applies to all features to be measured with column 2.
4 Open the definition template of the 3-D Best Fit 1 characteristic.
15-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Make certain that the Slave1 (arm ID slave) entry is set under
Receiver.
6 Save the measurement plan.
CALYPSO
15-13
Deleting the coupling matrix on the client and rebuilding it from scratch
1 In the Stop Light window, go to Duplex Master and click Special.
2 Click Reset connection data.
The coupling matrix is deleted. You have to redefine coupling before you
can use the duplex mode.
15-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column. This
means that large holes, for example, have to be interlinked by means
of individual points. (Each feature is assigned to exactly one measuring
column).
Unless otherwise defined in the Measurement Plan Editor Features,
the master is generally used for measuring features.
Probing the first point or the first position defines the measuring column to which the feature belongs.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-15
View this information in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Columns (default or Master means master;
Slave1 means slave).
Check the following functions and settings using the Features Settings Editor:
Columns
Move Clear Offset
Blocking Distance
Stylus system
Stylus
Clearance Group
Stylus angle
NOTICE
You have to save the measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise
the client will not be able to read the current alterations.
Testing a measurement
plan
You can test the measurement plan by opening the list of features and
selecting Edit Select Duplex Master Features (or Select Duplex Client Features). Thus you select from the list as well as in the
CAD window exactly those features that are to be measured by the master and the client respectively.
When you start the measurement plan for the Current Selection, CALYPSO measures all selected features - and, possibly, also other features
if they are included as a reference in one of the selected features.
15-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-17
15-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-1
16-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RTP20 probe
RTP20 probe
Basics about the RTP20 probe
The RTP20 is an articulating probe without integrated motor. The stylus
can be rotated around the A and B axes of the probe in steps of 15, thus
allowing 168 different angular positions.
( LL )
( OC )
( LL )
For manual positioning, release the locking lever, engage the probe
in the desired position and lock the lever again. Then enter the new
angular position in CALYPSO (see Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO [ 1611]).
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, this will affect
the measuring results and the probing system may be destroyed during
CNC operation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-3
RTP20 probe
16-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
(PR)
(PP)
(ST)
The pivot sphere of the pivot pole has been qualified (see Qualifying
the pivot sphere with the RTP20 [ 166]).
If the RTP20 is used in combination with the MCR20 stylus changer rack,
select the approach parameters of the individual stylus holder locations
in a way to ensure collision-free movements between the pivot pole and
the stylus changer rack.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-5
Moreover, make sure that the pivot pole (PP) and the stylus changer rack
(ST) are mounted to the same side of the CMM (see illustration).
PP
SC
PP
PP
SC
SC
In the illustration, the red arrow represents the approach direction. The
pivot pole can be placed to the left or right of the stylus changer rack.
If your configuration is different from the one shown here (for example, if
the pivot pole protrudes further into the measuring range than the stylus
changer rack), you will have to adapt the approach parameters accordingly
to ensure a collision-free automatic stylus system change. To do so, select
Approach Parameters and adapt the positions Before Change,
After Change and Over stylus system holder. Further information
on this subject can be found in the chapter Stylus system changer [ 131] of the Basics Instructions.
16-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Carefully and precisely align the orientation cup to the pivot sphere.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-7
Avoid touching the pivot sphere and do not apply any pressure to the pivot
pole. If the pivot pole is deformed, safe functioning of the semi-automatic
positioning is no longer guaranteed. The pivot pole needs to be replaced.
6 Once the correct position is reached, click OK in the request window.
The pivot sphere has now been qualified and CALYPSO is ready for semiautomatic angle positioning.
16-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The probe moves to the pivot pole (PP) mounted on the measuring
table.
(PP)
The probe moves along the pivot pole up to the top. The locking lever
(LL) is thus pushed downwards and turned down.
The probe is now unlocked.
(LL)
The orientation cup (OC) of the probe is positioned exactly above the
sphere at the end of the pivot pole.
(OC)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-9
The CMM motion is used to rotate and tilt the probe until the required
angular position of the stylus is reached.
The pivot sphere remains within the orientation cup during the entire
process.
To relock the probe after indexing, proceed in the same way as for
unlocking the probe.
The positioning process has now been completed.
16-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Risk of collision!
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, wrong measuring
points may be probed. Moreover, there is a risk of collision between the
probe and the workpiece, stylus changer rack or pivot pole.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-11
16-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17
Chapter
.................................................................................................................
The VAST XTR gold probe presents certain particular aspects to be considered when using it. This chapter describes all structural features and
the procedure for the use of the VAST XTR gold probe.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-1
17-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
What is new?
The most important distinctive feature of the VAST XTR gold is the installed rotary joint. This joint is used to rotate the stylus receptacle in steps
of 15 degrees about a vertical axis and to thus position it at the correct
angle to the component. In some cases, the rotary table is therefore not
required.
Technical solution
The new feature of the VAST XTR gold is the extended rotation function
of the plate: The rotational axis is driven by internal power generators.
The rotation function is only guaranteed in combination with the ZSH-70R-24 plate.
First, the solenoid of the VAST XTR gold stylus changer releases the plate
for rotation. The plate is fitted with a lock to guarantee fixed connection
to the rotational axis of the VAST XTR gold which is firmly connected to
the stylus changer. The rotational axis has a travel range of 2 mm in the
Z axis and holds the plate during the rotation. After reaching the nominal
position of the plate, the plate is loaded again into the stylus changer of
the VAST XTR gold.
During both manual and automatic plate change, the two unlock buttons
must be pressed at the same time to enable locking and unlocking of the
rotational axis.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-3
IMPORTANT
Changing the plate without pressing the unlock buttons leads to damage
of the probe and plate.
Special advantages
The VAST XTR gold demonstrates its strengths for a number of workpieces:
It measures components with many characteristics and angle positions such as gear boxes of helicopters and locomotives. The rotatability of the plate makes it possible to minimize stylus configurations
and thus stylus changing times.
The rotary joint allows the sensor to also access internal gears which
so far could only be measured with complex stylus configurations.
The new sensor is also especially suitable for large and heavy parts, for
example in shipbuilding and in the construction of wind power engines
and heavy machinery: For workpieces with a weight of more than five
tons, it is difficult to find a suitable rotary table for the required accuracy
and workpiece weights.
Control
Plate
ZSH-70-R-24 1)
Stylus changer
1)
17-4
The VAST XTR gold probe may only be used on CMMs which are
specially prepared by the service or development department.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Automatic stylus system change with the VAST XTR gold is only possible in combination with the ZCR-70 rack and the ZSH-70-R-24 plates
or the VAST standard plates.
You must create a new CMM (measuring system) with the VASTXTR probe in CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-5
Always press the two unlock buttons after the release prompt prior to
inserting or removing the plate.
After the manual change of the plate, make sure that both unlock buttons
protrude outwards from the plate edge. This is the only way to clamp the
plate correctly.
To do so, loosen the four screws on the lower side so that the cube can
be rotated. Then tighten the screws again.
Qualifying the stylus
17-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO
17-7
17-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alphabetic index
1
1D linear pattern 421
1-sphere method (rotary table) 1218
2
2 point diameter
Details 574
2D linear pattern 421
2D objects
In the CAD model 225
2-sphere method (rotary table) 1221
3
3D best fit 349
On the CAD model 350
3D curve 455
Intersection with cylinder in the CAD
window 242
Unknown cut in the CAD window
241
3D microstyli 1129
3D mouse 18
3D objects
In the CAD model 225
A
Access
To measuring results, programming
8104
Accuracy, variable
Best fit of the free form surface 477
ACR3
Defining holder positions 1329
Special aspects 138
Adding
New user 1010
Stylus 1111
Additional feature
Gear 479
HOLOS 479
Additional positions 672
Additional travel paths 672
Air scanning 728
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alignment
3D best fit 349
Access to origin 5108
By means of computed iteration 330
Deleting 5121
From the CAD model 348
Loading 5121
Preassigning 49
Saving 5120
Alignment method
Using alternative 351
Alignments via utilities 5113
Alternating operation
CALYPSO and UMESS 731
Alternative alignment method
Using 351
Angle 572
Angle point 469
Angle range
Characteristic 573
Angular dimensions in formulas 637
Angular position
Entering ~ for RTP20 1611
Angularity 571
Any inputs
In single template/graphic 864
Approach paths
Holders 1324
ASCII file
Importing with tolerance curve 597
ASCII file with tolerance curve
Format 5103
ASCII files (curve) 887
Assigning privileges 1011
Assigning, privileges 1011
Assignments
Stylus system changer 1315
Audiovisual information 675
Automatic backup 64
Automatic feature recognition
Defining 413
Automatic login 1012
Automatic mode, decimal places 616
Automatic navigation check 670
Automatic stylus system change 1334
Alphabetic index
AutoRun
Basics 143
Branches 149
CNC parameters 1438
Configuring 1421
Configuring icons 1428
Controlling measuring runs 1417
Copying and pasting icons 1445
Creating branches 1437
Defining desks 1426
Defining the scope of measurement
1413
Desk 144
Displaying printouts 1419
Entering printout header parameters
1416
Finding a measurement plan 1412
For users 1410
Keywords 149
Layout 143
Loading the interface 1411
Managing 1443
Mapping a pallet 1430
Measurement end 1417
Measurement plan icons 145
Moving to park position 1435
Moving to start position 1434
Pallets 146
Paths for measurement plans 1443
Positioning measurement plan 1428
Preparing a measurement 1437
Showing the quality of the measuring
results 1418
Starting a measurement 1415
Tasks of the system administrator
1421
User rights 1422
Auto-Run
Assigning keywords 1436
Background image 1426
Selecting the measuring configuration
1413
AutoSave 64
Average 568
Details 586
Axial runout 572
B
Background image
Auto-Run 1426
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
badElementFormula
Example of application 724
Banners
In the CAD window 229
Base alignment
Adapting 327
Basics 321
Calculating back to CAD origin 347
Creating new 324
Customizing iteratively with abortion
condition (example) 328
Defining 319
Deleting 349
Editing 333
Loading 323
Loading secondary alignment 342
Moving 334
Offsetting 334
Resetting 349
Rotating by distances 336
Setting temperature compensation
379
Temperature compensation 378
Base alignment match 5122
Performing 5126
Preparing 5123
Basic concept CALYPSO 115
Basics 32
AutoRun 143
Characteristics 52
Clearance planes/groups 665
Computed alignment 320
Measurement plans 32
Retract planes 666
Travel paths 664
Batch files 648
File names 649
Bend parameters, stylus
Applying 493
Recording 492
Best fit
3D ~ on the CAD model 350
3D best fit (alignment) 349
According to Chebyshov (Minimum
Feature) 55
According to Gauss (LSQ feature) 54
As circumscribed/inscribed feature 55
As least absolute value feature (L1 feature) 55
As tangential element 55
Several features 5113
Best fit of bore pattern 5106, 5108
Best-fit methods 53
Use 56
Bore missing 434
Boundary curves
In the CAD model 225
Bubble help 123
Buttons
In protocol templates 925
C
CAD
~ program window, displaying 225
~ views, displaying and printing 225
Conversion settings 225
Defining the display 216
Extraction settings 225
CAD entities
Editing the hierarchy 248
CAD face point 443
CAD file
Creating a measurement plan 244
CAD file, importing 415
CAD files
Converting in the background 416
Loading 417
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CAD model
Accepting local alignment 348
Adding a coordinate system 250
Always displaying points 216
As a solid 221
Changing perspective 219
Comment 217
Controlling loading 217
Creating a curve by means of an intersection with a cylinder 242
Creating a curve with the unknown cut
method 241
Creating a space-point grid 240
Creating new entities 238
Defining a 2D line 213
Defining a circle 213
Defining a geometry feature 215
Defining a probing point 211
Defining a rectangle 214
Defining a space point 212
Defining an edge point 213
Defining features for the distance check
214
Defining the display 216
Deleting 225
Deleting view 224
Displaying actual points 228
Displaying all features 210
Displaying characteristics 228
Displaying clearance planes 216
Displaying feature 210
Displaying features 216, 228
Displaying form and location 217
Displaying measuring results 227
Displaying text line 217
Editing bodies 237
Editing features 236
Editing the hierarchy 236
Exporting 247
Extracting characteristics 59, 514
Extracting coordinate system 214
Extracting features 418
Faces from either side 217
Hiding 216
Hiding CT point cloud 216
Hiding features 216
Hiding form and location 217
Hiding probing object 217
Hiding texts 217
In the CAD window 22
Loading the view 223
Alphabetic index
Mirroring 238
Moving 218
Redrawing 225
Remedying problems 246
Rotating 219
Saving 247
Saving the view 223
Selecting features 210
Selecting/defining features 210
Settings 225
Showing 216
Showing CT point cloud 216
Showing form and location icons 216
Showing model coordinates 217
Showing points 216
Showing probing object 217
Showing silhouettes 216
Showing texts 217
Specifying strategy for features 417
Splitting into areas 221
Storage location 225
Surface measurement 730
Transforming 235
Transforming a CAD entity 253
Transforming the coordinate system
252
Updating 245
Zooming the view out or in 218
CAD models
Views in protocol templates 911
CAD presentation
Utility 5127
CAD surface point
Details 444
CAD window
Basics 22
Buttons 27
Mapping work area 248
Modifying a representation 229
Output methods 232
Outputting as a plot 233
Outputting view 232
Representing banners 229
With CAD model 22
Work area 23
Working in ~ 24
CALYPSO
Alternating operation with UMESS
731
Exiting 130
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CalypsoInterface
Programming the interface 8105
Canceling
Measurement plan run 714
Canceling measurement plan run 714
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy 127
Cartesian
Characteristics 566
Change behavior
Multi-sensor systems 134
Changing
Assignment of styli 1335
CMM configuration 1013
Measurement parameters 1014
Password 1012
Point list 4170
User-specific settings 1013
Changing the CMM configuration 1013
Characteristic
Linking ~ to a characteristic 641
Characteristic attributes
Assigning values 558
Basics 557
Importing ~ with values 559
INI file 560
Characteristic name
Replacing 636
Characteristics 115, 569
Adding 629
Assigning to several features 522
Basics 52
Best-fit methods 53
Color coding 58
Connecting with feature 518
Copying 631
Copying ~ with references 633
Copying into other features 436
Copying properties 541
Decimal places 616
Defining 57
Definition templates 517
Deleting 632
Extracting from CAD model 59, 514
For distance - more 567
For form and location 569
For size - angle 564
For size - curve dimensions 566
For size - distance 566
For size - standards 563
Generated 572
Grouping 633
Index card 58
Index exchange 530
List of all ~ 563
Moving 632
Name default 618
Nominal values 531
Renaming 635
Searching 636
Setting datums 524
Special program 591
The calculation 53
Tolerances 531
Ungrouping 633
Waviness, details 593
With indexes 528
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristics, details
Angle 572
Angularity 571
Average 568
Axial runout 572
Cartesian 566
Circular pitch 568
Coaxiality 571
Concentricity 571
Cone angle 565
Curve distance 567
Curve expansion 567
Curve form 570
Curve length 567
Curve slope 567
Curve stroke 567
Cylinder form 570
Diameter 563
Diameter two 568
Distance symmetry point 566
Feature angle 565
Flatness 569
Flatness with reference length 570
Focus 1 cartesian 567
Focus 1 polar 567, 568
Focus 2 cartesian 567
Focus 2 polar 568
Form 570
Half cone angle 565
Inclination angle 565
Length of perpendicular 564
Line profile 570
Maximum result 568
Minimum 568
Parallelism 571
Perpendicularity 571
Pipe evaluation 569
Polar 2D 566
Polar 3D 566
Polar position angle 564
Polar position height 564
Polar position radius 564
Profile 570
Projection angle one 565
Projection angle two 565
Radial runout 571, 572
Radius 563
Radius measurement 564
Radius two 568
Rotation angle 565
Alphabetic index
Roundness 569
Roundness with angle 569
Simple distance 566
Slot length 568
Slot width 568
Space point distance 566
Straightness 570
Straightness with reference length
570
Surface area 567
Symmetry 571
True Position 571
Waviness 569
X value 563
Y value 563
Chebyshov (Minimum Feature) 55
Checking the wall thickness 5110
Circle 445
Circle in contour best fit 4148
Details 4152
Circle path
Self-centering probing 4174, 4175
Circle path on plane 4192
Circular patterns 421
Circular pitch 568
Details 580
Circular projection 430
Clearance distance 672
Approach each time 672
Copying into other features 436
Clearance group
Via formula 638
Clearance groups
Assigning 669
Defining 669
Retract plane in 669
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Clearance plane
Via formula 638
Clearance planes 116
Assigning 669
Blocking individual edges 361
Closer to the workpiece 672
Copying into other features 435
Defining by probing 359
Defining with CMM 357
Displaying in the CAD model 216
General 356
Generating automatically 360
Manually defining 358
Outer 671
RT clearance planes 1240
Testing 360
Clearing after collision 717
Clearing the CMM 717
CMM
Connecting 313
Index card 311
CMM data
Saving 102
CMM disk 102
CMM index card 311
CNC
Exporting points 891
CNC parameters
AutoRun 1438
CNC run
Continue at missing probing 711
Rotary table position at the end 1233
RT prealignment 1230
Starting 77
Support 721
Coaxiality 571
Collision
Reaction following ~ 716
Special aspects with RDS 717
Color coding
Characteristics 58
Features 45
Holders stylus changer 1314
Colors
In the CAD model 225
Combined evaluation
Evaluation 628
Combining paths 4188
Compact printout
Example 82
Output in the Multiple Printouts mode
89
Output in the Single Printouts mode
86
Preparing 821
Compact printouts
Defining a printout 88
Compatibility of measurement plans 38
Compensation
Perpendicularity error 1211
Complex data binding
In report templates 922
Computed alignment
Basics 320
Concentricity 571
Conditions
Setting 640
Cone 452
Cone addition (construction) 4146
Cone angle 565
Cone angle, half 565
Conf.dat 5117
Configuration area
PiWeb BasicReporter 94
Configuration file
User-defined characteristic attributes
561
Configuration file, erosion module 5117
Configuring
AutoRun 1421
Connection lines
In protocol templates 912
Connection to the CMM 313
Construction
Defining 497
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Constructions
Average 4146
Cone addition 4146
Definition 495
Edge point 4141
Intersection 4116
Maximum 4145
Maximum point 4145
Minimum 4145
Minimum point 4144
Overview 495
Perpendicular 4115
Plane with offset 4148
Projection 4141
Symmetry 4132
Tangent 4142
Context menu 110
Continuing
At missing probing 711
Controlling
Manual run 79
Measurement plan run 711
Controlling light signal 719
Controlling measuring runs
AutoRun 1417
Conversion CAD
Settings 225
Coordinate system
Copying into other features 435
Defining 319
Defining references 323
From best fit of bore pattern 5107
From CAD model 214
With index 321
Coordinate systems
Basics 116
Coordinates
Showing in CAD model 217
Alphabetic index
Copying
Characteristics 631
Features 631
Icons 1445
Result file 899
With details 631
Copying datum reference frame 541
Copying evaluation method for feature
540
Copying graphic parameters 541
Copying ISO286 540
Copying lower tolerance 540
Copying shape of zone 540
Copying tolerance class 540
Copying upper tolerance 540
Correction
Perpendicularity errors, local 1211
Coupling the measuring ranges (duplex
mode) 158
Creating a space-point grid 240
Critical characteristics
Limiting, example 724
Repeat measurement 723
CT point cloud
Displaying in the CAD window 216
CT properties
Preparations 318
Current selection
For the CNC run 74
Curve 455
Curve distance 567
Curve distance file 887
Curve expansion 567
Curve form 570
Curve length 567
Curve slope 567
Curve stroke 567
Curve, 2D 455
Curve, 3D 455
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Custom printout
Automatic fields 822
Defining a printout 88
Example 82
Global dummies 822
Local dummies 822
Output in the Multiple Printouts mode
89
Output in the Single Printouts mode
86
Preparing 821
Result presentation 822
Structure 821
With input prompt, example 836
Cylinder 450
Converting ~ to circles 636
Cylinder form 570
Cylindricity
Multiple circle plot 847
D
Data binding
In report templates 922
Data transfer
Reference spheres 1150
Datum reference frame
According to CALYPSO 524
According to ISO 5459 524
Datums
For characteristics 524
Parallelism 526
Perpendicularity 527
Decimal places
Results 616
Default names
File structure 619
Internal feature names 620
Loading a file 624
Loading file 619
Default printout
Defining a printout 88
Example 82
Output in the Multiple Printouts mode
89
Defining
Clearance groups 669
Desks 1426
Stylus system 113
Defining feature
Options 42
Defining length of master stylus 1317
Defining measuring reference 431
Defining references 323
Degrees with formulas 637
Deleting
Base alignment 349
Characteristics 632
Desk 1445
Features 632
Measurement plans 63
Toolboxes 658
Desk
Deleting 1445
Renaming 1445
Desks
Adding measurement plans 1427
Determining temperatures
By automatic probing 371
By manual input 376
By manual probing 370
Diameter 563
Diameter two 568
Directory structures 113
Display
CAD program window 225
Display of formulas 639
Display Sensor Signals
For 3D microstyli 1129
Displaying technology
In the CAD model 225
Distance symmetry point 566
DMIS files 886
DMIS output
Configuring 894
DML data in the table file 896
Dummies
Global 822
Local 822
Duplex mode
Preparing 154
Preparing in Calypso 154
System files 157
Use 1515
Duplicating
Of features 48
DuraMax
Configuring the stylus system changer
718
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Dynamic images
In protocol templates 911
E
Edge point (construction) 4141
Editing bodies 237
Element templates
PiWeb BasicReporter 927
Eliminating outliers
General settings 546
Ellipse 456
End angle
Characteristic 573
Entering
Nominal values 531
Tolerances 531
Entering memo 130
Entering printout header parameters
AutoRun 1416
Entering text with the mouse 110
Entries with the mouse 110
Erosion module 5115
Configuring 5117
Error report 103
Preparing 103
Preparing saving 104
Using 105
Evaluation
Subsequent, measuring results 8100
Evaluation parameters 542
Evaluation range
Basics 4164
Defining 4165
Display in the CAD window 4169
Particularities 4168
Evaluation settings
Copying into other features 436
Excel report
Example Characteristic.xls 817
Example FeatChar.xls 819
Example Feature.xls 818
Excel reports
Outputting 812
Exiting
CALYPSO 130
Measurement plan run, controlled
715
Alphabetic index
Export
Icons 1446
Measuring points 887
Points, manual 892
Exporting
CAD model 247
Measuring results 885
Exporting points
CNC 891
Manually 892
Exporting points manually 892
External batch files 648
File names 649
Extracting from CAD
Settings 225
F
Faces from either side
Showing in CAD model 217
FCR25 1335
Feature
Assigning characteristic 518
Preassignments 43
Recalling in its entirety 4103
Feature angle 565
Characteristic 573
Feature end
Automatic 412
Feature name
Replacing 636
Feature recognition
Automatic 411
When defining features 414
Feature recognition, automatic
Defining 413
10
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature, defining
As pattern 424
By duplicating 48
By probing 47
Importing from the CAD model 420
Tips and tricks 436
Using definition templates 47
Variable 47
Features 115
3D curve 455
Adding 629
Adding ~ to desks 236
Angle point 469
Circle 445
Color coding 45
Cone 452
Copying 631
Copying ~ with details 631
Copying ~ with references 633
Copying properties 435
Creating new ~ in the CAD model
238
Curve 455
Cylinder 450
Deleting 632
Details 438
Duplicating 48
Editing in the CAD model 236
Ellipse 456
Evaluation range 4164
Free form surface 473
General curve 472
General surface 472
In loops 644
Index card 44
Line, 2D 448
Line, 3D 450
List 439
Moving 632
Name default 618
Offset plane 462
Plane 446
Point 442
Preassignments 49
Radius point 467
Recall of 497
Rectangle 458
Renaming 635
Representation, editing 36
Rotary table parameters 1241
Searching 636
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Footers
In protocol templates 96
forbiddenChars.txt
Format of the file 833
Form 570
Form and location data
Extracting from CAD model 59, 514
In the CAD window 217
Form plot
Activating 875
CAD view as a plot 878
Changing settings 883
Curve distance 854
Curve form 851
Dialog box 882
Flatness 846
Format files 878
Fourier analysis 881
From characteristic 872
Layout 840
Output options 840
Outputting 873, 877
Printing 883
Roundness 881
Setting the type 876
Waviness 5104
Form plots
For characteristics 872
In report templates 917
Format files for plots 878
Designing 880
Formula
For clearance plane/group 638
Formula input
Angle 637
Formulas
Displaying 639
Entering 638
For angles 637
In patterns 423
Free form surface 473
Free form surface, best fit
Variable accuracy 477
Free patterns 421
G
Gage correction qualification 492
Alphabetic index
11
Gap
Characteristic 572
Gauss (LSQ feature) 54
GDT symmetry 579
Gear 479
GEAR PRO 479
General curve 472
General surface 472
Geometry best fit 5113
Graphic
Changing properties 862
Creating a new single template 862
Magnified representation of the deviations 865
Opening a single template 860
Graphics
Outputting texts, lines and legends
863
Outputting variables 864
Graphics editor
Graphics 860
Graphics element
Defining 842
Utilities 5120
Grid
Protocol templates 920
Grid lines
In the CAD model 225
Groups
Creating 633
Renaming 635
Ungrouping 633
H
H3
Scanning a circle path with several styli
4188
Headers
In the protocol template 96
Help
Displaying 123
Hierarchy
Of the CAD entities 248
Holder
Approach paths 1324
Color coding 1314
Setting a manual path 1325
Holos 479
Homing the CMM 313
Horizontal rotary table axis 129
12
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Horizontal-arm CMMs
Combining measurement plans 627
Hyperlinks
In protocol templates 925
I
Icon
Arranging on the AutoRun interface
1429
Copying and pasting 1445
Exporting 1446
Importing 1427
Removing 1445
Icons
Snapping to grid 1428
Images
In protocol templates 911
Import
CAD data 415
Icon 1427
Measurement plan for RT axis 1213
Inclination angle 565
Index card
Characteristics 58
Features 44
Index exchange 530
Individual printout
Displaying 813
Printing 813
Individual printouts 82
Information file
For measurement plan 675
Information on run 721
INI file
For characteristic attributes 560
INI file for stylus data output
Structure 1148
Initializing
CMM 1015
Initializing the CMM 1015
Internet
Access to 123
Interrupting
Measurement plan run 714, 715
Intersection (construction) 4116
Iteration
Computed, for space points 330
J
Joystick
Locking axes 718
K
Keeping position
Copying into other features 435
Keywords
Assigning 1436
Kink point 4154
L
L1 feature 55
Laser tracker
Offset for reflector tool 613
Least absolute value feature (L1 feature)
55
Least-material condition 535, 536
Legend
In graphic/single template 863
Length of perpendicular 564
Details 573
Licenses
Activating 120, 1014
Deactivating 120
Floating 121
In the network 121
Licenses for options
Zeiss License Activation Utility 119
Zeiss License Manager 119
Limit curve for waviness 5101
Limit values
For styli 1127
Measuring for styli 1128
Line profile 570
Line, 2D 448
Line, 3D 450
Linear patterns 421
Linear pitch 568
Details 584
Lines
In graphic/single template 863
In protocol templates 912
List of features 439
LMC 535, 536
Loading mode
Lowerable rotary tables 1231
LRT 1231
RT-AB rotary table 1239
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alphabetic index
13
M
Macro
Advantages 650
Basics 651
Creating 654
Editing 655
In the measurement plan 650
Integrating 654
Naming conventions 651
Parameterizing ~ measurement plan
650
Settings 653
Updating 656
Using 653
Magnification in graphic/single template
865
Management
Reference spheres 1151
Managing
AutoRun 1443
Manual paths
For holders 1325
Holders 1324
Manual run
Controlling 79
Starting 78
Warning limits 710
Manual stylus change 316
Masking
Points for scanning 615
Mass moment of inertia
Rotary table 123
Master 1010
Master measurement plan
Evaluation 628
Master measurement plan, horizontal-arm
CMMs 627
Master page
Protocol template 95
Master stylus
Entering data 1113
Maximum
Details 586
Maximum material condition 535, 536
Maximum result 568
MCR20
Special aspects 136
MCR200
Defining holder positions 1330
Measurable variables
Representation 36
14
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement
Ending, AutoRun 1417
Preparing AutoRun 1437
Relative 425
Running 73
Starting 77
Starting in AutoRun 1415
With measuring reference 431
With missing bores 434
With working planes 426
Measurement area illumination 714
Measurement cylinder method (rotary table) 1224
Measurement parameters, changing
1014
Measurement plan
Adding an information file 675
Controlling manual run 79
Controlling the run 711
Creating from a super characteristic
661
Editing 68
Exchanging styli 67
Feature names 618
From CAD file 244
Mirroring 625
Multimedia information 675
Paths in AutoRun 1443
Run 72
Saving 64
Saving version 64
Starting a CNC run 77
Starting manual run 78
Tab 311
Undoing changes 635
Measurement plan area 16, 310
Measurement plan editor
Basics 68
Characteristics 365
Designing a table 69
Editing nominal data 612
Features 364
Features, RT parameters 1242
Tabular editor 611
Measurement plan features
Replacing 636
Searching 636
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measuring points
Exporting 887
Masking 552
Saved measuring points, subsequent
evaluation 8101
Saving ~ for subsequent evaluation
8100
Measuring results
Activating output in DMIS format
885
Configuring output in DMIS format
894
Copying result file 899
Curve points 887
Evaluating subsequently 8100
Exporting 885
Programming access 8104
Saving as DMIS 886
Saving as PDF 887
Saving as Q-DAS 886
Saving for PiWeb 886
Saving in merge file 885
Saving in table file 885
Measuring thread 4189
Measuring values
Eliminating outliers 543
Filtering 543
Menu bar 16
Merge file 885
Merging
Of measurement plan elements 633
Microstyli 1129
Midpoint 443
Minimum 568
Details 586
Mini-plans 74
Mirroring
CAD model 238
Measurement plan 625
Missing bore 434
Missing probing
Continue with CNC 711
MMC 535, 536
MMC/LMC 534
Mode when qualifying 1132
Modification
CAD model 235
Modifying
System settings 109
Modifying the CAD model 235
Mouse
For text entries 110
Alphabetic index
15
N
Navigation check
Automatic 670
Navigation paths
Rotary table 1231
Nest level in loops 647
Net point 443
Network licenses 121
Nominal data
Editing ~ in the measurement plan editor 612
Nominal values
Copying 540
Defining 531
Editing ~ in the measurement plan editor 612
O
Offset
For reflector tools 613
Offset plane 462
O-Inspect 714
Online help
Calling 123
Notes 126
Screen structure 124
Typographic conventions 126
Using 123
Videos 126
Warnings 126
Online Help
Using 124
16
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Opening
Measurement plan 34
Stop light window 1015
Operating instructions
Displaying 123
Operation
Keyboard 18
Three-button mouse 18
Two-button mouse 18
Origin of the coordinate system 5108
Outer clearance planes 671
Outliers
Eliminating (basics) 544
Eliminating (procedure) 549
Eliminating ~ in the CAD window
553
ViScan 551
Output
Form and location plot 873
View, CAD window 232
Output files
Defining names 888
P
P6 alignment 351
Pages
Protocol template 95
Pallet
Mapping 1430
Measuring runs with a loop 1433
Measuring runs, individual 1434
Parallelism 571
Datums 526
Parameter
In single template/graphic 864
Part alignment
Basics 320
Creating new 324
Defining 319
Loading 323
Rotating 335
Rotating by distances 336
Rotating reference axis 341
Rotating to distance 338
Rotating to origin line 339
Rotating to same deviation 340
Passive rotary table 1234
Password
Changing 1012
Path generation
Circle 4185
Circle path on plane 4192
Cone 4185
Cylinder 4185
Lines 4193
Overview 4180
Planes 4190, 4192
Rectangular path 4194
Unknown contour 4184
Paths for measurement plans, AutoRun
1443
Pattern 421
And formulas 423
Basics 421
Copying into other features 436
Defining 424
Recall 499
PCM function
For workpiece recognition 711
PDF files 887
Perpendicular 4115
Perpendicularity 571
Datums 527
Perpendicularity error
Local compensation 1210
Local compensation, procedure 1211
Pipe evaluation 569
Pitch plot 859
PiWeb
Saving measuring results 886
PiWeb BasicReporter
Basics 92
Calling 93
Closing 926
Program window 94
Protocol templates 919
Setting up pages 95
Toolbox 99
Plane 446
Plane point 443
Plot
3D view cylindricity 849
Circle in contour construction 858
Multiple circle ~ for cylindricity 847
Straightness for surface lines 850
Surface lines for cylinder form 847
Plot output
CAD window 233
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot window
Possibilities 870
Point 442
Point cloud
Editing 236
Point list 4169
Changing 4170
Point masking 615
Point recall
Defining ~ with the mouse 4109
From files 4112
Options 4105
Parameterizing 4107
Specifying points more accurately
4109
With range specification 4105
Point set
Additional feature 484
Defining 484
Editing 236
Evaluating 487
Points
Exporting during CNC run 891
Exporting manually 892
Showing in CAD model 216
Polar 2D 566
Polar 3D 566
Polar pattern offset 421
Polar position angle 564
Polar position height 564
Polar position radius 564
Position list (pattern) 421
Postsettings
Copying into characteristics 541
Copying into other features 436
Preassignments
Features 43
Preparations
Multiple printouts 363
Rotary table 127
Prerequisites
Rotary table 355
Presettings
Copying into characteristics 541
Copying into other features 436
Principle of CALYPSO 117
Printing
CAD model 232
Printing the CAD model 232
Alphabetic index
17
Printout
Displaying 813
Printing 813
Printout format editor
Overview 823
Structure 824
Printout header data
Defining own 828
Entering 76
Global 76
INI file 830
INI file, example 833
Local 76
Overview 837
Preparing 827
TXT file 829
Printout header editor
Form files 867
Printout header fields
Defining own 828
INI file 830
TXT file 829
Printout settings 363
Printouts
Defining ~ output 88
Excel reports 812
INI file for header data, example 833
Multiple printouts mode 89
Overview 82
Printout types 82
Single Printouts mode 86
Subsequent (AutoRun) 1419
Text output 5118
Working with multiple printouts 810
Probing
Avoiding faulty probing during selfcentering probing 4170
Continue at missing ~ 711
Probing object in CAD window 217
Problems
During the CNC run 721
Product information
On the internet 123
Profile 570
Basics 576
Profile element
Additional feature 483
Program data
Displaying 1014
18
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Projection
On nominal plane 430
Rotational 430
Projection (construction) 4141
Projection angle one 565
Projection angle two 565
Projection plane
Copying into other features 436
Preassigning 49
Properties
Graphic/single template 862
Protocol template
Designing 93
Setting up pages 95
Protocol templates
Arranging elements 920
Basics 92
Buttons 925
CAD model views 911
Calling external file 925
Following pages 914
Headers and footers 96
Hyperlink 925
Images 911
Lines 912
Properties, element 919
Saving 926
Table of contents 97
Tables 914
Text 910
Variables 910
Q
Q-DAS files 886
Qualification method 1132
Qualification of stylus system holders
Utilities 5115
Qualifying
Mode 1132
R
Rack assignment
Activating 1316
Creating 1315
Using 1315
Radial runout 571, 572
Radian measure
In the formula window 637
Radius 563
Radius measurement 564
Details 573
Radius point 467
Radius two 568
Range specification point recall
Defining 4105
Parameterizing 4107
RC
Creating list 1117
List, automatic 1120
RDS
After collision 717
Creating RC list 1117
Defining the geometry 1318
Defining the slot distance 1318
RC list, automatic 1120
Setting the angle positions 1115
Recall 497
Feature 4103
Methods of point recall 4105
Pattern 499
Reference points 4101
Recall file
Format 4114
Rectangle 458
Rectangular path 4194
Reference axis secondary reference
Rotating 337
Reference point
For feature 555
Reference points
Recalling 4101
Reference sphere
Basics 1149
Correction of flexibility 1149
Creating a new ~ 1152
Data transfer from older versions
1150
Determining position 1123
Editing data 1153
Management 1151
Outputting data 1155
Qualifying the ~ 1122
RSH shaft definition 1154
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reflector tool
Determining offset 613
Relative measurement 425
Release information 123
Remark window 721
Renaming
Characteristics 635
Desk 1445
Features 635
Groups 635
Measurement plans 64
Stylus 1112
Repeat measurement
Activating via PCM 726
Critical characteristics 723
Evaluating 728
Limiting critical characteristics 724
Performing 726
Preparing 724
Repeating measurements 723
Replacing
Characteristic name 636
Feature name 636
Report page
Protocol template 95
Report templates
Form plots 917
Linking an element to a characteristic
922
Restoring changes 924
Templates for toolbox elements 927
Undoing changes 924
Representation of measurable variables
36
Restarting measurement plan run 717
Result element 569
Details 590
Result presentation 822
Results
Decimal places 616
Retract distance
Copying into other features 436
Retract plane 669
REWI additional correction
Basics 1210
Defining 1211
Alphabetic index
19
Rotary table
Defining 355, 127
Defining position at the end of the CNC
run 1233
General 122
Homing 1210
Horizontal axis 129
Importing measurement plan for axis
1213
Loaded RT-AB 1239
Logging in 127
Mass moment of inertia 123
Measuring features 1234
Measuring in a number of positions
1243
Mechanical alignment 1229
Parameters in the feature 1241
Positioning the ~ manually 1235
Prealignment at CNC start 1230
Qualification methods 1216
Qualifying axis 1215
Rotational pattern 1244
Setting the axis 1213
Setting the position 129
Status of the axis 1214
Using the ~ passively 1234
Visualizing tilting moment of RT-AB
1238
Rotary table position
Copying into other features 436
Rotate plane 320
Rotate space 320
Rotate to Distance 338
Rotate to same deviation 340
Rotating the base alignment
Purpose 334
Rotating to origin line 339
Rotation angle 565
CAD model 225
Rotation axis
Projection around ~ 430
Rotational pattern 421
Measuring with rotary table 1244
Rotational projection 430
Roundness 569
Roundness with angle 569
Roundness with reference angle
Basics 587
RPS alignment 350
With loop 646
RSH shaft definition 1154
20
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RT axis
Importing measurement plan 1213
RT clearance planes 1240
RT homing 1210
RT parameters
Measurement plan editor features
1242
RT position
Copying into other features 436
RTA curve for waviness 5101
RTA parameter file
Format 5103
RT-AB
Loaded rotary table 1239
Safety instructions 123
Visualizing the tilting moment 1238
RTP20
Configuring 164
Entering the angular position 1611
Prerequisites for semi-automatic operation 165
Qualifying the pivot sphere 166
Semi-automatic operation 165
Semi-automatic operation sequence
168
Structure 163
Ruler
Protocol templates 920
Run control
With batch files 648
Running
Measurement 73
Measurement plan 72, 73
Running a measurement plan 73
Printout header data 76
S
Safety
For rotary table 122
For RT-AB 123
Saving
CAD model 247
Measurement plans 63, 64
Measuring results 885
Protocol templates 926
Scanning
Automatically measuring 4178
General settings 4180
Point masking 615
Several styli 4188
Scope of measurement
Defining the ~ for AutoRun 1413
SCP600
Defining holder positions 1328
SCR200
Defining holder positions 1332
Special aspects 137
Screen structure, online help 124
Searching
Characteristics 636
Features 636
Secondary alignment
Loading 342
Secondary reference
Rotating reference axis 337
Selecting the coupling method (duplex
mode) 159
Selecting the measuring configuration
AutoRun 1413
Self-centering probing 4172
Basics 4170
Circle path 4174, 4175
Restrictions 4171
Special features 4171
Self-centering qualification (rotary table axis) 1227
Sensitivity factor 1129
Sensor monitoring 1129
Server
For licenses 121
Setting up
Stylus system changer 1310
Settings
Loading for measurement plans 36
Macros 653
Setup mode 711
Shaft of the reference spheres
RSH shaft definition 1154
Shape of zone 577
Shortcuts 19
Simple data binding
In report templates 922
Simple distance 566
Single printouts 86
Outputting Excel reports 812
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Single template
Changing properties 862
Creating 862
Editing 860
Magnified representation of the deviations 865
Opening 860
Outputting texts, lines and legends
863
Outputting variables 864
Single templates
For diagrams, overview 844
Slot 457
Length, characteristic 568
Width, characteristic 568
SP25 1335
Space mouse 18
Space point 443
Space point distance 566
Special program 569
Sphere 455
Sphere point 468
Standard custom printout
Example 814
Standard custom printout (compressed)
Example 816
Start
PiWeb BasicReporter 93
Start alignment
Basics 322
Creating new 324
Loading 323
Loading secondary alignment 342
Starting
Calypso 13
CNC run 77
Manual run 78
Starting a measurement plan 77
Manual run 78
Starting Calypso 13
Station point
Additional feature 489
Step cylinder 464
Step point 4156
Stop light window 712
Interrupting measurement plan run
714, 715
Opening 1015
Stopping
Measurement plan run 714, 715
Alphabetic index
21
Storage location
CAD model 225
Straightness 570
Straightness with reference length 570
Basics 589
Stylus
~ table for RC, automatic 1120
3D microstyli 1129
Adding 1111
Angle range in automatic mode
4177
Automatic search 4175
Basics about qualification 1125
Bend parameters, applying 493
Bend parameters, recording 492
Copying into other features 435
Creating ~ table for RC 1117
Editing 113
Exchanging ~ in a measurement plan
67
Limit values for qualification 1127
Measuring limit values 1128
Qualifying automatically 317, 1138
Qualifying manually 1134
Qualifying with manual path 1136
Qualifying with measurement plan
1139
Renaming 1112
Results of stylus qualification 1138
Scanning with several ~ 4188
Sensor monitoring 1129
Setting the angle positions 1115
Stylus changer
Color coding and holders 1314
Stylus changer rack
Qualifying in the CNC run - run 1342
Qualifying in the CNC run - suitable
holders 1341
Stylus data
Creating new ~ 1144
Editing 1144
Managing 1143
Stylus data list
Printing 1146, 1147
Stylus qualification
Basics 1125
Data of the reference sphere 1153
Position of the reference sphere
1123
With manual path 1136
22
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stylus system
Adding styli 1111
Change behavior multi-sensor 134
Copying into other features 435
Editing 113
Inserting 316
Printing list with data 1146, 1147
Redefining 113
Validity 315
Stylus system change
Automatic 1334
Basics 132
RDS with SP25 and FCR25 1335
RDS with XXT 1337
Semi-automatic 1334
TP20 or TP200 133
Two-stage ~, configurations 133
With VAST XTR gold 177
Table of contents
Protocol template 97
Tables
In protocol templates 914
Tabular editor
In the measurement plan editor 611
Tangent (construction) 4142
Tangential element 55
Taskbar 1015
Temperature compensation
Activating 369
Base alignment 378
Different materials 378
General 367
Of the base alignment 379
Workpiece and clamping 378
Text
In protocol template 910
Text element 5118
Text file
With point set, format 475
Texts
Displaying in the CAD model 225
In graphic/single template 863
Three-button mouse 18
Tips and tricks 123
TOL/PROFS 576
Tolerance curve (waviness)
Importing 597
Tolerance polynomial for waviness 599
Tolerance steps for waviness 595
Tolerance zones, projected 538
Tolerances
Defining custom ~ 537
Entering 531
File with custom ~ 537
LMC 535, 536
MMC 535, 536
MMC/LMC 534
Predefined 532
Projected tolerance zones 538
Toolbar 16
Structuring 111
Toolbar editor 111
T
Table file
Characteristic names 897
DML data 896
Reference 895
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alphabetic index
23
Toolbox
PiWeb BasicReporter 99
Templates for elements 927
Toolboxes 657
Creating 657
Deleting 658
Using 658
Tooltips 123
Touch point 443
TP20
Stylus system change 133
TP200
Stylus system change 133
Training block 128
Transformation
CAD entities and coordinate systems
249
CAD model 235
Travel paths
Basics 664
Checking 667
Editing 664
True Position 571
True position with best fit of bore pattern
Use 5108
True Position with best fit of bore pattern
Basics 5106
Turbine blade
Additional feature 481
CNC run 483
Two-button mouse 18
Types of bracket in loops 647
U
UMESS
Alternating operation with CALYPSO
731
Unknown contour 4184
User
~ settings, changing 1013
Master 1010
Adding 1010
Switching 1011
User information
Integrating 675
Loading 676
24
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
User rights
AutoRun 1422
User support 123
User-defined characteristic attributes 557
Configuration file 561
Using distance check 5110
Using the best-fit methods 56
Utilities
Erosion module 5115
Geometry best fit 5113
Overview 5112
Probing system qualification 5114
Text element 5118
V
Variables
In protocol template 910
VAST XTR gold
Basics 173
Conditions 174
Particularities for the measurement
176
Prerequisites 174
Stylus system change 177
VAST XTR gold probe 173
VDA printout (without values)
Example 815
Videos in the online help 126
View
Of the CAD model 225
Viewing system messages 1014
ViScan
Filter and outliers 551
Warning limits
Manual CNC 710
Waste basket 633
Waviness 569
Basics 593
RTA curve 5101
Tolerance curve 597
Tolerance polynomial 599
Tolerance steps 595
Work area 16
CAD icons 17
CAD window 17
Measurement plan area 16
Menu bar 16
PiWeb BasicReporter 94
Toolbar 16
Work areas
In the CAD window 248
Working planes 426
Workpiece recognition
By probing attempt 711
X value 563
XXT
Probe 1337
Rack 1337
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Y
Y value 563
Z
ZCR-70
For VAST XTR gold 177
Zeiss training block 128
Zoom factor
CAD model 225
Zooming
CAD model 218
Zooming in
CAD model 218
Zooming out
CAD model 218
Alphabetic index
25
26
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO